...  ; 'iuTi 


K-nvSw; 


vv  '•* 

JAN  28  1332 

‘  v^OfllCAL  S twV 


*\*£ 


Division 

Section 


BSZ5Z5 

r^6>4 

H2.3 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2019  with  funding  from 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Library 


https://archive.org/details/syllabusfornewteOOrobe_O 


SYLLABUS  FOR 
NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


A.  T.  ROBERTSON,  m.a.,  d.d.,  ll.d 


L.ITT.D. 


By  PROFESSOR  A.  T.  ROBERTSON 


Syllabus  for  New  Testament  Study 

The  Minister  and  His  Greek  New  Testament 

A  Harmony  of  the  Gospels  for  Students  of  the  Life 
of  Christ 

Types  of  Preachers  in  the  New  Testament 
Paul,  the  Interpreter  of  Christ 

Practical  and  Social  Aspects  of  Christianity  (Ex¬ 
position  of  James) 

A  Short  Grammar  of  the  Greek  New  Testament 
Studies  in  Mark’s  Gospel 

A  Grammar  of  the  Greek  New  Testament  in  the 
Light  of  Historical  Research 

A  Translation  of  Luke’s  Gospel 

John  the  Loyal:  A  Sketch  of  John  the  Baptist 

Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Jesus 

Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul 

The  Pharisees  and  Jesus.  The  Stone  (Princeton)  Lec¬ 
tures  for  1916. 

Luke  the  Historian  in  the  Light  of  Research 
The  Student’s  Chronological  New  Testament 
The  Glory  of  the  Ministry 
The  Divinity  of  Christ  in  the  Gospel  of  John 
Paul’s  Joy  in  Christ:  Studies  in  Philippians 

Making  Good  in  the  Ministry:  A  Sketch  of  John 
Mark 

The  New  Citizenship 

Commentary  on  Matthew:  The  Bible  for  Home  and 
School 

Keywords  in  the  Teaching  of  Jesus 
Life  and  Letters  of  John  A.  Broadus 
The  Teaching  of  Jesus  Concerning  God  the  Father 
Studies  in  the  New  Testament 


SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW 
TESTAMENT  STUB$Tof? 

AX 

A  Guide  for  \  ' 

Lessons  in  the  Class-Room^  oaiciAL 


BY 

A.  T.  ROBERTSON,  m.a.,  D.D.j  LL.D.j  LITT.D. 

Professor  of  New  Testament  Interpretation  in  the 
Southern  Baptist  Theological  Seminary 
Louisville,  Kentucky 


NEW 


YORK 


GEORGE  H.  DORAN  COMPANY 


COPYRIGHT,  1923, 

BY  SUNDAY  SCHOOL  BOARD 
OF  THE  SOUTHERN  BAPTIST  CONVENTION 

Fifth  Edition ,  Revised 
and  Enlarged 


COPYRIGHT,  1915,  BY  A.  T.  ROBERTSON 


SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY.  II 


PRINTED  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES  OF  AMERICA 


PREFACE 


The  immediate  purpose  of  this  Syllabus  is  to  facilitate 
the  work  in  the  class  in  New  Testament  English  in  the 
Southern  Baptist  Theological  Seminary.  It  is  not  de¬ 
signed  for  general  use,  though  other  institutions  have 
adopted  it.  The  book,  revised  throughout,  serves  the 
function  of  a  broad  outline  of  the  New  Testament  his¬ 
tory  with  precise  references  to  the  text-books  used  for 
the  daily  lessons.  The  method  pursued  is  the  study  of 
the  sources  of  our  knowledge  as  far  as  practicable  with 
the  aid  of  useful  helps.  The  course  follows  the  historical 
development  of  the  events  of  the  period  and  the  inter¬ 
pretation  of  the  New  Testament  books  is  based  on  his¬ 
torical  exegesis.  The  whole  of  the  New  Testament  era 
is  covered  in  one  session  of  eight  months  and  the  work 
is  of  necessity  rapid,  while  comprehensive.  This  grasp 
of  the  whole  period  is  essential  for  proper  interpretation 
of  any  single  portion.  The  more  important  books,  with 
various  critical  standpoints,  are  mentioned  from  time  to 
time.  The  rather  full  bibliographies  are  useful  for  future 
exhaustive  study  of  special  topics  and  for  research  work. 
They  have  been  brought  up  to  date.  The  plan  and  spirit 
of  the  course  are  due  to  John  A.  Broadus,  who  estab¬ 
lished  it  in  1859,  the  first  course  in  the  English  New 
Testament  in  any  theological  seminary  so  far  as  I  know. 
All  ministers  need  a  thorough  grip  upon  the  English 
New  Testament  whether  they  do  or  do  not  know  the 
Greek.  The  knowledge  of  each  reacts  favorably  upon 
the  other.  Neither  takes  the  place  of  the  other.  Both 
are  necessary  to  the  real  student  of  the  New  Testament. 
The  student  who  enters  this  class  ought  to  know  at  least 


vi 


PREFACE 


what  is  in  the  author’s  Studies  in  the  New  Testament . 
In  addition  to  the  assignment  for  each  lesson  specific  ref¬ 
erences  for  wider  reading  are  given  for  the  benefit  of 
unusually  well  equipped  men. 

It  happens  that  this  year  1923  marks  the  conclusion  of 
thirty-five  years  of  teaching  in  the  Seminary  and  that  I  am 
sixty  years  old.  This  is  the  Fifth  Edition  of  the  Syllabus, 
while  the  Short  Grammar  of  the  Greek  New  Testament 
appears  in  the  Sixth  Edition  and  the  Grammar  of  the 
Greek  New  Testament  in  the  Light  of  Historical  Re¬ 
search  in  the  Fourth  Edition  this  year.  Two  new 
volumes,  published  this  year,  The  Minister  and  His 
Greek  New  Testament  and  A  Translation  of  Luke's 
Gospel,  will  make  twenty-six  volumes  to  my  credit, 
alas,  for  the  public. 

A.  T.  Robertson. 

Louisville,  Ky.,  1923. 


CHART  OF  INTERBIBLICAL  AND 
NEW  TESTAMENT  TIMES 

(Many  of  the  dates  are  confessedly  provisional,  especially  in  the  Apostolic 
history.) 


DATE 


B.  C. 

405 

400 

399 


334 

333 

331 


330 

323 

320 

312 

299 


285-247 

250 


225 

216 

198 


RULERS  OF  JUDEA 

HIGH  PRIESTS 

WRITINGS  AND 
EVENTS  IN  JUDEA 

Under  Persia  536 
B.  C.  to  331  B.  C. 

Artaxerxes  Mne- 
mon. 

Part  of  Book  of 
Baruch. 

Book  of  Tobit 
possibly. 

Jonathan. 

End  of  Persian 
rule.  Beginning  of 
Greek  rule  over 
Judea.  Alexander 
the  Great. 

Death  of 

High  Priest 

Jaddua,  last 

name  men¬ 

tioned  in  O.  T. 
(Neh.  12 : 11  f.) 

Ptolemaic  rule 
over  Jews. 

Simon  I,  The 
Just,  High  Priest. 

Ptolemy  Phila- 
delphus. 

Traditional  date 
of  the  so-called 
Great  Synagogue 
and  the  fixing  of 
canon  of  the  O.  T. 

Translation  of 
the  S'eptuagint  be¬ 
gun. 

Probable  date  of 
Ecclesiasticus  or 
the  Wisdom  of 
Son  of  Sirach. 

Appearance  of 
Chasidim. 

Eleazer  (287- 
26). 

Beginning  of 

Seleucid  rule  over 
Jews,  under  An- 
tiochus  the  Great. 

Jewish  -  Alexan¬ 
drian  Philosophy. 

Aristobulus  and 
Wisdom  of  Solo¬ 
mon  here  or  little 
later. 

CONTEMPORARY 

EVENTS 


Retreat  of  the 
Ten  Thousand 
(Xenophon). 

Death  of  Soc¬ 
rates. 

Roman  Consuls 
begin. 

Plato. 

Aristotle. 

Battle  of  Grani- 
cus. 

Battle  of  Issus. 


Alexander  con¬ 
quers  Persian  Em¬ 
pire. 

Alexander  dies 
at  Babylon. 

Ptolemaic  Rule 
begins  in  Egypt. 

Seleucid  Kings 
begin  rule  in  Syria. 

Seleucid  Era. 


Zeno. 

Epicurus. 

First  Punic  War. 


Second  Punic 
War. 

Battle  of  Cannae 
(Hannibal). 


Vll 


Vlll 


CHART 


DATE 


RULERS  OF  JUDEA 


B.  C 
190 


175 

172 


Antiochus  Epi- 
phanes  begins  his 
efforts  to  Hellen- 
ize  the  Jews. 


HIGH  PRIESTS 


WRITINGS  AND 
EVENTS  IN  JUDEA 


CONTEMPORARY 

EVENTS 


Jason,  the 
Hellenizing 
High  Priest. 


Antiochus  the 
Great  beaten  by 
Romans  at  Mag¬ 
nesia.  Romans 
gain  foothold  in 
the  East. 


Menelaus, 
another  Hel¬ 
lenizing  High 
Priest. 


167 

166 

165 

161 

160 


153 


146 


143 

142 

135 

130 

108 

105 

104 


Beginning  of 
Maccabean  Revolt 
under  Mattathias. 

Judas  Macca- 
baeus. 


Death  of  Judas 
at  Eleasa. 

Jonathan  Macca- 
baeus  succeeds  him. 


Death  of  Al- 
cimus  (Hellen¬ 
izing  High 
Priest) . 

No  High 
Priest  for  7 
years. 

Jonathan 
made  High 
Priest  and  so 
combines  polit¬ 
ical  and  reli¬ 
gious  office. 


Rededication  of 
the  Temple. 

Book  III,  of 
Sybilline  Oracles 
probably  about 
this  time. 

Book  of  Judith. 


Probably  I.  Es- 
dras. 

Probably  also 
part  of  Book  of 
Enoch. 


Simon  Macca- 
baeus  rules. 


John  Hyrcanus 
rules. 


Political  inde¬ 
pendence  of  the 
Jews. 


Aristobulus  calls 
himself  King  of 
Judea. 

Alexander  Jan- 
naeus  reigns. 


Samaritan  tem¬ 
ple  destroyed. 

Destruction  of 
Samaria. 

The  Essenes. 


Revival  of  Hel¬ 
lenism. 

Clash  with  Phar¬ 
isees,  and  siding 
with  S'adducees. 
Party  strife. 


100 


Polybius. 


Third  Punic 
War. 


Carthage  and 
Corinth  destroyed. 


Embassy  to 
Rome. 

Terence. 


Gracchi. 


Cicero  and  Pom' 
pey  born. 


Power  of  Marius. 


Birth  of  Julius 
Caesar. 


CHART 


IX 


DATE 

RULERS  OF  JUDEA 

HIGH  PRIESTS 

WRITINGS  AND 

CONTEMPORARY 

EVENTS  IN  JUDEA 

EVENTS 

T5  C. 

Book  of  Jubilees 
or  Little  Genesis 

Sylla. 

Lucretius. 

86 

and  Psalms  of 
Solomon. 

Catullus. 

Revival  of  Phar- 

isaism. 

78 

Salome  -Alexan- 

Hyrcanus 

74 

dra  rules. 

High  Priest. 

Separation 
again  between 
political  and 

religious  rule. 

Birth  of  Herod 

the  Great. 

69 

AristobulusKing. 

H  y  r canus 

Overthrow  of 

High  Priest 
still. 

Hyrcanus  by 
Aristobulus. 

66 

Antipater  takes 
side  of  Hyrcanus. 

Pompey  sent  to 
Asia. 

65 

Syria  a  Roman 
Province  and  so 

end  of  Seleucid 
kings. 

63 

Pompey  re-in¬ 
states  Hyrcanus. 

Pompey  enters 
Temple. 

Catiline. 

Cicero. 

Roman  rule  of 
Judea  really  be- 

60 

gins. 

First  Trium- 

virate  (Pompey, 

Caesar,  Crassus). 

57 

54 

Rule  by  Councils. 

Crassus  plunders 
Jerusalem. 

Rise  of  the  Par- 

thians  to  power. 

48 

Caesar  crosses 

the  Rubicon. 

Defeat  of  Pom¬ 
pey  at  Pharsalia. 

Caesar  with  Cle¬ 
opatra  in  Egypt. 

Downfall  of  Re¬ 
public. 

47 

Hyrcanus  ap¬ 
pointed  Ethnarch 

1  Maccabees  and 

Caesar  perpetual 
Dictator. 

II  Maccabees  both 

by  Caesar,  and  An- 

belong  to  this  cen- 

tipater  his  Prime 

tury. 

Minister  (Procu- 

Probably  also  the 

44 

rator). 

so-called  IV  Mac¬ 
cabees. 

Assassination  of 

Caesar. 

42 

Battle  of  Phi- 

lippi  and  victory 
of  the  Second 
Triumvirate  (Oc¬ 
tavius,  Antonius, 
Lcpidus)  over 

Brutus  and  Cas- 

sius. 

X 


CHART 


DATE 


B.  C. 
41 

40 


37 

35 


31 

27 

25 

20orl9 

6 

5 
4 
4 

A.  D. 
4 

6 


7 

9 

12 

14 

15 

16 


RULERS  OF  JUDEA 

HIGH  PRIESTS 

WRITINGS  AND 
EVENTS  IN  JUDEA 

Herod  appointee 
Tetrarch  and  rule 
taken  away  from 
Hyrcanus,  Judea 
now  a  Roman 
Province. 

Parthians  estab¬ 
lish  Antigonus  as 
King. 

Herod  becomes 
King  of  Judea. 

Parthians  cap¬ 
ture  Jerusalem 
while  Herod  flees 
to  Rome  and  is 
appointed  King  of 
Judea. 

Herod  marries 
Mariamne. 

Hillel  and  Sham- 

Hyrcanus 
deposed  and 

Ananelus  made 
High  Priest. 
Aristobulus 

High  Priest. 
His  drowning. 

Succeeded  by 
Jesus  and  then 
Simon. 

mai,  rival  teachers 
of  Rabbinism  in 
Jerusalem. 

Scribism  domi¬ 
nant  in  Palestine. 

Jewish  Rabbi¬ 

nical  Theology 
(Talmud  A.  D. 
200-500). 

Rise  of  Hero- 
dians. 

Samaria  rebuilt. 

Herod  begins 
repairing  the  Tem¬ 
ple  at  Jerusalem. 

Birth  of  John 
the  Baptist. 

BIRTH  OF  JE¬ 
SUS. 

Death  of  Herod 
the  Great. 

Matthias. 

Arr.helaus  Eth- 

Joseph. 

Joasar. 

narch  of  Judea. 

Eleasar. 

Archelaus  de¬ 
posed  and  Judea 
again  made  Prov¬ 
ince  of  Rome. 

Coponius  Procu¬ 
rator. 

Jesus. 

Ananus. 

Rise  of  Zealots. 

Visit  of  the  Boy 
Jesus  to  Jerusa¬ 
lem. 

Ambivius  Procu¬ 
rator. 

Annius  Rufus 
Procurator. 

Valerius  Gratus 
Procurator. 

Assumption  of 
Moses. 

Ishmael. 

Simon. 

1 

CONTEMPORARY 

EVENTS 


Anthony  loses  a 
kingdom  for  Cleo¬ 
patra. 


Virgil. 


Tibullus. 


Battle  of  Actium 
and  victory  of  Oc¬ 
tavius  over  An- 
tonius. 

Octavius  be¬ 
comes  Emperor 
(Augustus). 

Cornelius  Nepos. 

Sallust. 

Horace. 

Livy. 


Ovid. 

Herod  Antipas 
Tetrarch  of  Gali¬ 
lee  and  Perea. 
Philip  Tetrarch  of 
Iturea,  Trachoni- 
tis,  etc. 

Diodorus 

Siculus. 

Strabo. 


Death  of  Au¬ 
gustus. 

Tiberius  be¬ 
comes  full  Em¬ 
peror  (after  two 
years  co-reigning 
in  the  Provinces). 


CHART 


xi 


DATE 


18 

25 
(or  26) 

26 
(or  27) 

30 
(or  29) 

Pass¬ 

over- 

Forty 

days 

later. 

30 

Pente¬ 

cost. 

34 

34- 36 

35- 37 
36 


37 


39 


41 


43 

44 


45 

48 

49 
52 

50-51 


54 

55-57 


59-60 

59 

60 


RULERS  OF  JUDEA 


Pontius  Pilate 
(Procurator.) 


Recall  of  Pon¬ 
tius  Pilate.  Sue 
ceeded  by  Marcel- 
lus. 

Maruelus. 


Herod  Agrippa  I, 
given  Judea  also. 
Rules  as  King. 


Death  of  Agrippa 
I.  and  Judea  a 
province  again. 
Cuspius  Fadus 
Procurator. 


Alexander. 

Cumanus. 


Felix. 


Festus  succeeds 
Felix. 


HIGH  PRIESTS 


Caiaphas. 


Jonathan. 

Theophilus. 


Simon. 


Matthias. 

Ellonaios. 


Joseph 

Ananus. 


Ishmael. 


Joseph. 


WRITINGS  AND 
EVENTS  IN  JUDEA 


John  Baptist  be¬ 
gins  ministry. 
Baptism  of  Jesus. 

Crucifixion  and 
Resurrection  of 
Christ. 


Ascension  of 
Christ. 


Descent  of  the 
Holy  Spirit. 


Death  of  Ste¬ 
phen. 

Conversion  of 
Saul. 

Writings  of 
Philo  (born  about 
B.  C.  20). 


Death  of  James 
the  Apostle.  Im¬ 
portant  date  in  ca¬ 
reer  of  Paul  be¬ 
cause  of  visit  to 
Jerusalem  at  time 
of  famine  and 
death  of  Herod 
(Acts  11:30). 

Epistle  of  James. 

Conference  at 
Jerusalem. 

Epistles  of  Paul 
to  the  Thessaloni- 
ans  (First  group). 


CONTEMPORARY 

EVENTS 


Death  of  Philip 
the  Tetrarch. 


Caligulus  Em¬ 
peror. 

Herod  Agrippa 
I,  made  King. 

Herod  Antipas 
deposed  as  Tet¬ 
rarch. 

Claudius  Em¬ 
peror. 


Rebellion 
Theudas. 


of 


Second  group  of 
Paul’s  Epistles.  1 
Cor.,  2  Cor.,  Gal., 
Rom.  Date  of 
Galatians  uncer¬ 
tain. 

The  Judaizers. 
Important  date 
in  career  of  Paul. 

Possibly  Mark 
and  Matthew  by 
this  time. 

Probably  Gospel) 
of  Luke  during 
stay  at  Caesarea 
(58-60). 


Rebellious  out¬ 
breaks  of  Jews 
against  Rome. 
Nero  Emperor. 


Burrhus. 

Seneca. 


CHART 


Xll 


DATE 


RULERS  OF  JUDEA 


HIGH  PRIESTS 


WRITINGS  AND 
EVENTS  IN  JUDEA 


CONTEMPORARY 

EVENTS 


59-61 

62 

61-63 


64 

65 

66 

66-68 

67 

68 

69 

70 

75 

79 

81 

85 

90 

95 

96 
98 

98-100 


Albinus. 


Gessius  Florus. 


People  revolt 
against  Rome. 


End  of  Jewish 
state. 


.  Departure  of 

Paul  to  Rome. 

Ananus. 

. .  Third  group  of 

Paul’s  Epistles, 
Philippians,  Colos- 
sians,  Ephesians 
and  Philemon. 

Paul  set  free. 

The  Gnostics. 


Matthias.  Epistles  of  Peter, 
Jude,  and  that  to 
the  Hebrews,  most 
probably  between 
64  and  69. 

.  Josephus  Gover¬ 
nor  of  Galilee. 

.  Pastoral  Epistles 

of  Paul  (Fourth 
Group). 

.  Possible  death 

of  Simon  Peter. 

.  Paul’s  second 

imprisonment  and 
death. 

.  _  Flight  of  Chris¬ 
tians  to  Pella. 

.  Destruction  of 

Temple  and  Jeru¬ 
salem  by  Titus. 

.  End  of  Sanhed¬ 
rin. 

. .  Rabbinic  School 

at  Jamnia. 

.  Writings  of  Jo¬ 
sephus. 

.  Possible  date  of 

Epistles  of  John. 


Possible  date  of 
Gospel  of  John. 

Probable  date  of 
Revelation  of  John. 


Death  of  John 
and  close  of  Apos¬ 
tolic  time.  To¬ 
wards  close  of  this 
century  2  (4)  Es- 
dras  and  Apoca¬ 
lypse  of  Baruch 
were  doubtless 
written  and  also 
parts  of  Enoch 
and  Sybilline  Ora¬ 
cles.  Here  also  be¬ 
long  Epistle  of 
Clement  of  Rome, 
and  so-called  Epis¬ 
tle  of  Barnabas. 


Burning  of 
Rome. 

Persecution  of 
Christians. 


Romans  driven 
from  Jerusalem. 


Vespasian  in 
Galilee  and  Judea. 

Death  of  Nero. 
Brief  reigns  of 
Galba,  Otho,  Vit- 
ellius. 

Vespasian  Em¬ 
peror. 

Quintus  Curtius. 

Epictetus. 

Pliny  the  Elder. 


Titus  Emperor. 

Domitian  Em¬ 
peror. 

Cerinthus. 

Ebionites, 

Martial. 

Juvenal. 

Persecution  of 
Christians  under 
Domitian. 

Tacitus. 

Nerva  Emperor. 
Trajan  Emperor. 
Plutarch. 
Quintilian. 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

PREFACE  ..........  y 

CHART  OF  INTERBIBLICAL  AND  NEW  TESTAMENT  TIMES  .  .  vii 

GENERAL  BIBLIOGRAPHY  ....  25 

BOOKS  ABOUT  BOOKS  ON  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT  .  .  25 

BIBLE  DICTIONARIES  .......  26 

IMPORTANT  EDITIONS  OF  THE  ENGLISH  NEW  TESTAMENT  .  27 

CONCORDANCES  ........  27 

BOOKS  ON  OLD  TESTAMENT  QUOTATIONS  ....  28 

INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT  ...  28 

NEW  TESTAMENT  HISTORY  AND  TIMES  ....  31 

THEOLOGY  OF  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT  ....  35 

HERMENEUTICS,  OR  INTERPRETATION  ....  36 

EXTRA-CANONICAL  EARLY  CHRISTIAN  LITERATURE  .  .  37 

PART  I:  THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY 

(400  B.  C.  to  B.  C.  6  or  5)  .  .  .  .  43 

BIBLIOGRAPHY . 43 

THE  OLD  TESTAMENT  APOCRYPHA  AND  PSEUDEPIGRAPHA  .  43 

PHILO  . . .  47 

JOSEPHUS . 48 

THE  TALMUD  ........  49 

THE  TARGUMS . 52 

HANDBOOKS  ON  THE  INTERBIBLICAL  PERIOD  ...  52 

LESSON  I:  IN  THE  PERSIAN  PERIOD  (B.  C.  400- 
B.  C.  331) . 53 

LIST  OF  PERSIAN  RULERS  ......  54 

LIST  OF  HIGH  PRIESTS  DURING  PERSIAN  PERIOD  OF  THE 

INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY  ......  54 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  PERSIAN  PERIOD  ....  55 

LESSON  II :  IN  THE  GREEK  PERIOD  (B.  C.  331-167)  55 

Alexander  and  the  Ptolemies  (B.  C.  331-198)  .  55 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  ALEXANDER  THE  GREAT  ...  56 

BOOKS  ON  THE  PTOLEMAIC  ERA . 57 

xiii 


XIV 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 


PART  I:  THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY 


(Continued) 

BOOKS  ON  THE  SEPTUAGINT  ......  57 

Text . 57 

Concordance  and  Grammar  .....  57 

Special  Books  .......  58 

LIST  OF  PTOLEMAIC  KINGS . 58 

LESSON  III:  IN  THE  GREEK  PERIOD  (Cont’d), 
SELEUCID  RULE . 59 

FURTHER  BOOKS  ON  ECCLESIASTICUS  ....  60 

LIST  OF  THE  SELEUCID  KINGS  .....  61 

LIST  OF  JEWISH  HIGH  PRIESTS  DURING  THE  GREEK  PERIOD 

TILL  OFFICE  PASSES  TO  THE  MACCABEES  ...  62 

LESSON  IV:  FIRST  LESSON  IN  THE  MACCABEAN 
PERIOD  (Beginning  of  the  Maccabean  Revolt,  B.  C- 
167-166) .  62 

BOOKS  ON  MACCABEAN  PERIOD  .....  65 


LESSON  V:  SECOND  LESSON  ON  THE  MACCA¬ 
BEAN  PERIOD  (Judas  Maccabseus  B.  C.  166-161)  .  65 

SEVEN  CHIEF  CAMPAIGNS  BY  JUDAS  ....  66 


SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  JUDAS  MACCABEUS  ...  66 

LESSON  VI:  THIRD  LESSON  ON  THE  MACCA¬ 
BEAN  PERIOD  (Jonathan  Maccabseus,  Simon  Mac- 
cabseus  and  John  Hyrcanus,  B.  C.  161-106)  ...  67 

LESSON  VII:  FOURTH  LESSON  ON  THE  MACCA¬ 
BEAN  PERIOD  (Decline  of  the  Maccabean  Dynasty 
and  Beginning  of  Roman  Period,  B.  C.  106-47)  .  .  68 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  ROMAN  PERIOD  ....  70 

LESSON  VIII:  IN  THE  ROMAN  PERIOD  .  .  70 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  HEROD  ......  71 

JEWISH  LITERATURE  OF  THE  INTERBIBLICAL  AND  NEW 

TESTAMENT  TIMES  .  .  .  .  .  .  •  72 

LESSON  IX:  IN  THE  ROMAN  PERIOD  ( Continued )  73 

LESSON  X:  IN  THE  ROMAN  PERIOD  ( Continued )  75 

LESSON  XI:  THE  JEWISH  PARTIES  ...  76 

PHARISEES,  SADDUCEES,  SCRIBES,  ESSENES,  HERODIANS, 

ZEALOTS  .........  76 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  JEWISH  PARTIES  ....  77 


CONTENTS 

PART  I:  THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY 
(Continued) 

LESSON  XII :  THE  JEWISH  EXPECTATIONS  CON¬ 
CERNING  THE  MESSIAH . 

BOOKS  ON  THE  MESSIANIC  HOPE  OF  THE  JEWS  AND 
ESCHATOLOGY  ........ 

LESSON  XIII:  A  GLIMPSE  OF  THE  WORLD  INTO 
WHICH  JESUS  WAS  BORN . 

Literature  Useful  for  the  Purpose 

PART  II:  THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  (B.  C.  6 
or  5  to  A.  D.  29  or  30)  .... 

BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  IMPORTANT  WORKS  ON 
THE  GOSPELS  AND  THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  . 

i:  THE  GOSPELS  ........ 

1.  Introduction  to  the  Four  Gospels  . 

2.  The  Synoptic  Problem  ..... 

3.  The  Authorship  and  Character  of  the  Fourth 

Gospel  ........ 

II I  COMMENTARIES  ON  THE  GOSPELS  .... 

1.  Series  on  Entire  New  Testament  . 

(a)  For  English  Readers  ..... 

(b)  For  Greek  Students  ..... 

2.  Commentaries  on  Matthew  .... 

(a)  For  English  Students  ..... 

(b)  F"or  Greek  Students  ..... 

3.  Commentaries  on  Mark  ..... 

(a)  For  English  Students  ..... 

(b)  For  Greek  Students  ..... 

4.  Commentaries  on  Luke  ..... 

(a)  For  English  Students  ..... 

(b)  For  Greek  Students  ..... 

5.  Commentaries  on  John  ..... 

(a)  For  English  Students  ..... 

(b)  For  Greek  Students  ..... 

Ill:  HARMONIES  OF  THE  GOSPELS  ..... 

IV  :  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  ....... 

1.  Bibliographies  and  Criticism  of  Literature  on 

the  Life  of  Christ  ..... 

2.  Introductory  Problems  ..... 

3.  Exhaustive  Treatises  on  the  Life  of  Christ  . 

4.  Handbooks  ....... 

5.  Very  Radical  Works  ..... 

6.  lesus  Treated  as  a  Paranoiac 

7.  The  Historicity  of  Jesus  .... 


xv 

PAGE 


78 

78 


81 

81 


89 


89 

89 

89 

91 

95 

99 

99 
99 

100 

102 

102 

102 

103 

103 

104 

105 

105 

105 

106 
106 

107 

108 
109 

109 

110 
111 
112 

113 

114 
114 


XVI 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 


PART  II:  THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  (Continued) 

8.  The  Jesus  or  Christ  ( Jesus  or  Paul )  Contro¬ 

versy  ......  115 

9.  The  Person  of  Christ  .....  116 

10.  Special  Aspects  ......  120 

11.  The  Miracles  of  Jesus  .....  122 

12.  The  Parables  of  Jesus  .....  124 

13.  The  Teaching  of  Jesus  .....  125 

(a)  Teaching  as  a  Whole  .....  125 

(b)  The  Father  and  the  Holy  Spirit  .  .  .  127 

(c)  Christ’s  Idea  of  Himself  ....  127 

(d)  The  Kingdom  and  Eschatology  .  .  .  128 

(e)  Ethical  and  Social  Problems  .  .  .  .  129 

14.  Lives  of  Christ  for  Children  ....  130 

15.  Poems  about  Christ  .....  131 

16.  Romances  .......  131 

17.  Non-Scriptural  Accounts  of  Jesus  .  .  .  132 

LESSON  I:  BEGINNINGS  OF  THE  GOSPELS  AND 
PREPARATION  FOR  THE  BIRTH  OF  JESUS  .  133 

LESSON  II:  THE  BIRTH  OF  JESUS  .  135 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  VIRGIN  BIRTH  ....  136 

OTHER  BOOKS  OF  INTEREST  ......  136 

LESSON  III:  THE  LONG  YEARS  OF  SILENCE  .  137 

SPECIAL  BOOKS . 138 

LESSON  IV:  JOHN  THE  BAPTIST  ....  138 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  JOHN  THE  BAPTIST  ....  139 

LESSON  V:  CHRISTS  BAPTISM  AND  TEMPTA¬ 
TION  . 141 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  TEMPTATION  OF  JESUS  .  .  142 

LESSON  VI:  FROM  BETHANY  BEYOND  JORDAN 
TO  CAPERNAUM . 143 

BOOKS  ON  THE  TWO-WINE  CONTROVERSY  .  .  .  145 

LESSON  VII:  THE  EARLY  MINISTRY  IN  JUDEA 
AND  SAMARIA . 145 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  SAMARITANS  AND  NICODEMUS  .  .  146 

LESSON  VIII:  BEGINNING  OF  THE  GALILEAN 

MINISTRY . 146 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  .  ......  148 

LESSON  IX:  THE  SABBATH  CONTROVERSY  .  148 

BOOKS  ON  THE  SABBATH  QUESTION  ....  149 

BOOKS  ON  CHRIST  AND  THE  OLD  TESTAMENT  .  .  .  149 


CONTENTS 

PART  II:  THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  (Continued) 

LESSON  X:  THE  SERMON  ON  THE  MOUNT 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  LORD’S  PRAYER  .... 

BOOKS  ON  THE  SERMON  ON  THE  MOUNT 

LESSON  XI:  GOING  TO  WORK  WITH  THE 
TWELVE . 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  JESUS’  ALLUSION  TO  JONAH 

LESSON  XII:  THE  FIRST  GREAT  GROUP  OF 
PARABLES  .  .  . 

LESSON  XIII:  REMAINDER  OF  THE  BUSY  DAY 
AND  CLOSE  OF  GALILEAN  CAMPAIGN  . 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  DEMONOLOGY  ..... 

LESSON  XIV:  THE  FIRST  THREE  WITHDRAW¬ 
ALS  FROM  GALILEE . 

LESSON  XV:  THE  FOURTH  RETIREMENT  . 

LESSON  XVI:  THE  CLOSE  OF  THE  SEASON  OF 
RETIREMENT . 

LESSON  XVII :  THE  GREAT  CONFLICT  IN  JERU¬ 
SALEM  AT  THE  FEAST  OF  TABERNACLES 

LESSON  XVIII:  WITHDRAWAL  FROM  JERUSA¬ 
LEM  INTO  JUDEA  AND  RETURN  TO  FEAST 
OF  DEDICATION . 

LESSON  XIX:  FROM  BETHANY  BEYOND  JOR¬ 
DAN  TO  THE  RAISING  OF  LAZARUS  AT 
BETHANY  NEAR  JERUSALEM  .... 

LESSON  XX:  THE  LAST  JOURNEY  TO  JERU¬ 
SALEM  . 

LESSON  XXI:  SUNDAY  AND  MONDAY  OF  THE 
LAST  WEEK . 

LESSON  XXII:  THE  LAST  DAY  IN  CHRIST’S 
PUBLIC  MINISTRY . 

WESSON  XXIII:  FROM  THE  DISCOURSE  ON  THE 
MOUNT  OF  OLIVES  TO  THE  LAST  PASSOVER 
MEAL . 

LESSON  XXIV:  FROM  THE  LORD’S  SUPPER  TO 
THE  AGONY  IN  THE  GARDEN  .... 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  CHRIST’S  FAREWELL  DISCOURSE  AND 
THE  INTERCESSORY  PRAYER . 


xvii 

PAGE 

149 

151 

152 

154 

155 

155 

156 
158 

158 

159 

161 

162 

163 

164 

165 

167 

168 

169 

171 


172 


CONTENTS 


xviii 

PAGE 

PART  II:  THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  (Continued) 

LESSON  XXV:  THE  ARREST  AND  TRIAL  OF 
JESUS . 172 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  TRIAL  OF  JESUS  .  .  .  174 

LESSON  XXVI :  THE  CRUCIFIXION  ...  175 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  CRUCIFIXION  ....  176 

LESSON  XXVII:  THE  RESURRECTION  AND  AS¬ 
CENSION  . 178 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  RESURRECTION  AND  ASCENSION  .  180 

PART  III:  THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPIS¬ 
TLES  (Probably  A.  D.  30  to  A.  D.  go)  .  185 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

1:  BOOKS  ON  THE  APOSTOLIC  PERIOD  ....  185 

L  General  History  ......  185 

2.  Culture  of  the  Period  .....  185 

3.  Philosophy  .  . . 186 

4.  History  of  Religion  and  Morality  .  .  .  188 

5.  The  History  of  Apostolic  Christianity  .  .  192 

II :  SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  LIFE  AND  TEACHING  OF 

PETER . 196 

III:  SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  LIFE  AND  TEACHING  OF  THE 

APOSTLE  JOHN . 197 

IV :  THE  LIFE  AND  TEACHING  OF  JAMES  .  .  .  198 

V:  LIFE  AND  TEACHING  OF  LUKE  ....  199 

VI :  LIFE  AND  TEACHING  OF  PAUL  ....  199 

1.  Life  and  Work  ......  200 

2.  The  Epistles  of  Paul  Treated  as  a  Whole  .  202 

3.  The  Teachings  of  Paul  .....  203 

VII :  SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  ACTS . 205 

1.  Discussions  .......  205 

2.  Commentaries  on  the  English  Text  .  .  206 

3.  Commentaries  on  the  Greek  Text  .  .  .  207 

LESSON  I:  BEGINNINGS  OF  APOSTOLIC  HIS¬ 
TORY  (A.  D.  29  or  30) .  208 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ABOUT  THE  HOLY  SPIRIT  .  .  .  209 

LESSON  II:  THE  YEARS  OF  WAITING  IN  JERU¬ 
SALEM  (A.  D.  30-4) . 210 

LESSON  III:  THE  YOUTH  OF  SAUL  OF  TARSUS  210 


CONTENTS 


xix 

PAGE 

PART  III:  THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPIS¬ 
TLES  (Continued) 

LESSON  IV:  THE  SCATTERED  DISCIPLES  AND 
THE  OUTSIDE  WORLD . 211 

LESSON  V:  SAUL’S  CONVERSION  (About  A.  D.  35)  212 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  SAUL’S  CONVERSION  ....  213 

LESSON  VI:  THE  YEARS  OF  TRANSITION  (A.  D. 

36-46) .  213 

LESSON  VII:  THE  EPISTLE  OF  JAMES  (A.  D.  49)  214 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  JAMES  .  .  .  .  215 

1.  On  the  English  Text  .....  215 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text  ......  215 

LESSON  VIII:  PAUL’S  FIRST  MISSIONARY  JOUR¬ 
NEY  (A.  D.  48-49)  216 

LESSON  IX:  THE  CONFERENCE  AT  JERUSA¬ 
LEM  (A.  D.  49) . 217 

LESSON  X:  FROM  ANTIOCH  TO  TROAS  (A.  D.  49)  218 

LESSON  XI:  PAUL  AT  PHILIPPI,  THESSALONICA 
AND  BERCEA  (A.  D.  49  or  50) . 218 

LESSON  XII:  PAUL  AT  ATHENS  (A.  D.  49  or  50  .  219 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  ATHENS . 219 

LESSON  XIII:  PAUL  AT  CORINTH  (A.  D.  50-52)  .  219 

LESSON  XIV:  THE  THESSALONIAN  LETTERS 
AND  RETURN  TO  ANTIOCH  (A.  D.  50  or  51)  .  220 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  I  AND  II  THESSALONIANS  .  220 

1.  On  the  English  Text  .....  220 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text  ......  221 

LESSON  XV:  PAUL  AT  EPHESUS  (52-55  or  56)  .  222 

LESSON  XVI:  FIRST  CORINTHIANS  1-7  (A.  D.  55 


or  56) . .  223 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  I  CORINTHIANS  .  .  .  223 

1.  On  the  English  Text  .....  223 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text  ......  224 

LESSON  XVII:  FIRST  CORINTHIANS  8-16  .  .  225 


XX 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 


PART  III:  THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPIS¬ 
TLES  (Continued) 

LESSON  XVIII:  FROM  EPHESUS  TO  MACEDONIA 
AND  II  CORINTHIANS  1-7  (A.  D.  55  or  56)  .  .  225 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  II  CORINTHIANS  ALONE  .  225 

1.  On  the  English  Text  .....  226 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text  ......  226 

LESSON  XIX:  II  CORINTHIANS  8-13  (A.  D.  55 
or  56) .  226 

LESSON  XX:  EPISTLE  TO  THE  GALATIANS 
(Probably  A.  D.  55  or  56)  ......  227 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  GALATIANS  .  .  .  227 

1.  On  the  English  Text  .....  227 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text  ......  228 

LESSON  XXI:  ROMANS  1-8  (A.  D.  56  or  57)  .  .  229 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  ROMANS  ....  229 

1.  On  the  English  Text  .....  229 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text  ......  230 

LESSON  XXII:  ROMANS  9-16 . 231 

LESSON  XXIII:  THE  LAST  JOURNEY  TO  JERU¬ 
SALEM  (Spring  of  56  or  57)  .....  231 

LESSON  XXIV:  PAUL  AT  JERUSALEM  THE  LAST 
TIME  (Pentecost  of  56  or  57)  .....  231 

LESSON  XXV:  PAUL  A  PRISONER  AT  C2ESAREA 
56-58  or  57-59)  ........  232 

LESSON  XXVI:  PAUL’S  VOYAGE  TO  ROME  (Au¬ 


tumn  of  58  or  59  to  Spring  of  59  or  60)  .  .  .  232 

LESSON  XXVII :  PAUL  IN  ROME  AND  THE  LET¬ 
TER  TO  THE  PHILIPPIANS  (A.  D.  60-2  or  61-3)  .  233 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  PHILIPPIANS  .  .  .  234 

1.  On  the  English  Text  .....  234 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text  ......  234 

LESSON  XXVIII:  PHILEMON  AND  COLOSSIANS 
(A.  D.  62  or  63) .  235 


SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  PHILEMON  AND  COLOSSIANS  235 

1.  On  the  English  Text  .....  235 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text  ......  236 

LESSON  XXIX:  EPHESIANS  (A.  D.  62  or  63)  .  .  236 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  EPHESIANS  .  .  .  237 

1.  On  the  English  Text  .....  237 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text . 237 


CONTENTS  xxi 

PAGE 

PART  Ills  THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPIS¬ 
TLES  (Continued) 

LESSON  XXX:  RELEASE  OF  PAUL  AND  I  TIM¬ 
OTHY  (Probably  63  to  66  or  67)  .  .  .  .  238 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  PASTORAL  EPISTLES  .  .  239 

1.  On  the  English  Text  .....  239 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text  ......  240 

LESSON  XXXI:  THE  LAST  YEAR  OF  PAUL’S  LIFE 
(Autumn  of  67  till  Summer  of  68)  ....  241 

LESSON  XXXII:  I  PETER  (About  A.  D.  65)  .  .  242 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  EPISTLES  OF  PETER  AND  JUDE 

1.  On  the  English  Text  .....  242 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text  ......  242 

LESSON  XXXIII:  JUDE  AND  II  PETER  (About 
A.D.  66-67) .  244 

LESSON  XXXIV:  HEBREWS  1-7  (About  A.  D.  69)  .  244 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  HEBREWS  ....  244 

1.  On  the  Greek  Text  ......  245 

LESSON  XXXV:  HEBREWS  8-13  ....  246 

LESSON  XXXVI:  THE  EPISTLES  OF  JOHN  (Per¬ 
haps  A.  D.  85-90) .  247 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  THE  EPISTLES  OF  JOHN  .  247 

1.  On  the  English  Text  .....  247 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text  .....  248 

PART  IV:  THE  REVELATION  OF  JOHN 

(Probably  about  A.  D.  95)  .  .  251 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  REVELATION  .  .  .  .251 

1.  On  the  English  Text  .....  251 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text  .....  253 

LESSON  I:  REVELATION  1-3 . 254 

LESSON  II:  REVELATION  4-11 . 257 

LESSON  III:  REVELATION  12:  1-19:  10  .  260 

I  :  PRETERIST  THEORIES  ......  260 

Objections  ........  261 

II :  FUTURIST  THEORIES  ......  263 

III:  HISTORICAL  THEORIES  ......  264 

Objections  ........  265 

Two  Great  Difficulties  .....  2 66 

LESSON  IV:  REVELATION  19:  11-22:21  .  271 

i:  DIFFERENT  THEORIES  ABOUT  THE  MILLENNIUM  .  271 

II :  TIME  OF  BEGINNING . 274 


GENERAL  BIBLIOGRAPHY 


SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW 
TESTAMENT  STUDY 


GENERAL  BIBLIOGRAPHY 

BOOKS  ABOUT  BOOKS  ON  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT 

Briggs — Theological  Encyclopaedia. 

Bruckner — Theologischer  Jahresbericht :  Das  Neue 
Testament  (published  annually). 

Jones,  M. — The  New  Testament  in  the  Twentieth  Cen¬ 
tury  (1914). 

Moffatt — An  Introduction  to  the  Literature  of  the  New 
Testament  (1911.  Third  Ed.,  1920). 

Schaff — Theological  Propaedeutic  (1893). 

Schuerer — History  of  the  Jewish  People  in  Time  of 
Christ  (has  exhaustive  lists  at  beginning  of  chapters). 
Thayer — Books  and  Their  Use  (1903). 

Vincent — Student’s  New  Testament  Handbook  (1893). 
Votaw  and  Bradley — Books  for  New  Testament  Study 
(1901). 

Votaw — Books  for  New  Testament  Study  (Biblical 
World  for  October,  1905,  and  May,  1911). 

Weidner — Theological  Encyclopaedia  (1889). 

Windisch  —  Englisch  -  Amerikanische  Literatur  zum 
Neuen  Testament  in  den  Jahren  1914  bis  1920 
(Zeitschrift  fur  die  neut.  Wiss.  1921  Heft  1-3). 
Windisch — Literature  on  the  New  Testament,  1914-1920 
(Continental  Europe).  Harvard  Theol.  Review, 
April,  1922. 


25 


26  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


BIBLE  DICTIONARIES 

Buckland — Universal  Bible  Dictionary  (1914). 

Cheyne — Encyclopaedia  Biblica.  Four  volumes  (1899- 
1903). 

Davis — A  Dictionary  of  the  Bible.  One  volume  (second 
edition  1903). 

Easton — Illustrated  Bible  Dictionary.  One  volume 
(1893). 

Guthe — Kurzes  Bibelworterbuch.  One  volume  (1903). 

Hastings — A  Dictionary  of  the  Bible.  Five  volumes 
(1898-1904). 

Hastings — A  Dictionary  of  the  Bible.  One  volume 
(1909). 

Hastings — A  Dictionary  of  Christ  and  the  Gospels. 
Two  volumes  (1906-1908). 

Hastings — Dictionary  of  the  Apostolic  Church.  Two 
volumes  (1916-1918). 

Hastings — Encyclopaedia  of  Religion  and  Ethics. 
Twelve  volumes  (1908-1922). 

Hauck — Realencyklopadie  fur  protestantische  Theologie 
und  Kirche.  3  Aufl.  Twenty-two  volumes  (1896- 
1909). 

Jackson — New  Schaff-Herzog  Encyclopaedia  of  Re¬ 
ligious  Knowledge.  Thirteen  volumes  (1908-1913). 

Jacobus — A  Standard  Bible  Dictionary.  One  volume 
(1909).  New  ed.  in  press. 

Mathews  and  Smith — A  Dictionary  of  Religion  and 
Ethics  (1921). 

Orr — International  Standard  Bible  Encyclopaedia.  Five 
volumes  (1915). 

Smith — A  Dictionary  of  the  Bible.  Four  volumes 
(1888).  Revised  A— J,  1893. 

Smith — A  Dictionary  of  the  Bible.  One  volume  (1902, 
reprint) . 

Singer — The  Jewish  Encyclopaedia.  Twelve  volumes 
(1901-6). 


GENERAL  BIBLIOGRAPHY 


27 


The  Temple  Bible  Dictionary.  One  volume  (1910). 
Wright — Illustrated  Bible  Treasury  (1896). 

IMPORTANT  EDITIONS  OF  THE  ENGLISH  NEW  TESTAMENT 

Besides  standard  versions  of  the  whole  Bible  (the  King 
James’  or  Authorized  Version,  the  1911  Bible,  which  is 
the  Authorized  Version  slightly  altered,  the  Canterbury 
Revision,  the  American  Standard  Version)  and  special 
editions  of  the  English  Bible  (like  the  Cross  Reference 
Bible,  the  Scofield  Reference  Bible,  the  Variorum  Teach¬ 
ers’  Bible,  the  Temple  Bible,  the  Century  Bible,  the  Bible 
for  Home  and  School,  Messages  of  the  Bible,  the  Modern 
Reader’s  Bible),  there  are  excellent  translations  of  the 
New  Testament  (like  the  Bible  Union  Version,  Moffatt’s 
Historical  New  Testament  and  also  his  New  Translation 
of  the  New  Testament  and  his  Parallel  New  Testament, 
Weymouth’s  Modern  Speech  New  Testament,  the  Twen¬ 
tieth  Century  New  Testament,  Robertson’s  Student’s 
Chronological  New  Testament,  Goodspeed’s  American 
Vernacular,  etc.)  Of  interest  also  is  The  New  Testa¬ 
ment  in  Braid  Scots  by  W.  W.  Smith  (1901)  and 
Courtney’s  The  Literary  Man’s  New  Testament  (1914). 

CONCORDANCES 

Cruden — Complete  Concordance  (1885). 

Gillespie — Englishman’s  Greek  Concordance  (1885). 
Hatch  and  Redpath — Concordance  to  the  Septuagint. 
Six  volumes  (1892-6).  Supplement  on  Proper 
Names  (1900). 

Hazard — Complete  Concordance  to  the  American  Stand¬ 
ard  Bible  (1922). 

Moulton  and  Geden — Concordance  to  the  Greek  Testa¬ 
ment  (1897). 

Strong — Exhaustive  Concordance  to  the  Bible  (1894). 
Strong — Student’s  Concordance  and  Revised  Version 
(1882). 


28  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 

Thoms — Concordance  to  the  Revised  Version  of  the  New 
Testament  (1883). 

Young — Analytical  Concordance  to  the  Bible.  Seventh 
edition  (1893). 

Walker — Comprehensive  Concordance  to  the  Bible 
(1894). 

BOOKS  ON  OLD  TESTAMENT  QUOTATIONS 

Bartlet  and  Others — New  Testament  in  the  Apostolic 
Fathers  (1905). 

Boehl — Alttestamentliche  Citate  im  Neuen  Testament 
(1878). 

Dittmar — Vetus  Testamentum  in  Novo  (1899). 

Gough — New  Testament  Quotations  (compared  with 
Hebrew  and  LXX,  1855). 

Huhn — -Die  Alttestamentliche  Citate,  etc.  (1900). 

Johnson — The  Quotations  of  the  New  Testament  from 
the  Old  (1896). 

McNeile — Our  Lord’s  Use  of  the  Old  Testament  (Cam¬ 
bridge  Biblical  Essays,  1909). 

McFarland — Jesus  and  the  Prophets  (1905). 

Scott — New  Testament  Quotations. 

Taylor,  C. — The  Gospel  in  the  Law  (1869). 

Toy — Quotations  in  the  New  Testament  (1884). 

Turpie — The  Old  Testament  in  the  New  (1868). 

Vollmer — Die  Alttestamentlichen  Citate  bei  Paulus 
(1895). 

introduction  to  the  new  testament 

Allen  and  Grensted — Introduction  to  the  Books  of 
the  New  Testament  (1913). 

Bacon — The  Making  of  the  New  Testament. 

Bacon— -An  Introduction  to  the  New  Testament  (1900). 

Balmforth — The  New  Testament  in  the  Light  of  the 
Higher  Criticism  (1904). 


GENERAL  BIBLIOGRAPHY  29 

Barth — Einleitung  in  das  Neue  Testament  (1908).  5 

Aufl.  (1920.) 

Belzer — Einleitung  in  das  Neue  Testament.  Second  edi¬ 
tion  (1902). 

Bleek — Einleitung  in  das  Neue  Testament.  4  Aufl. 
(1886). 

Clemen — Die  Enstehung  des  Neuen  Testament  (1906). 
2  Aufl.  (1919). 

Cobern — The  New  Archaeological  Discoveries  and  Their 
Bearing  on  the  New  Testament.  Fifth  edition 
(1921). 

Conybeare — History  of  the  New  Testament  Criticism 
(1910). 

Cruttwell — Literary  History  of  Early  Christianity 
(1893). 

Davidson,  S. — Introduction  to  the  New  Testament. 
Third  edition  (1894). 

Dods— Introduction  to  the  New  Testament  (1894). 

Feine — Einleitung  in  das  Neue  Testament.  2  Aufl. 
(1918). 

Gardner,  P. — A  Historic  View  of  the  New  Testament 
(1901). 

Gloag — Introduction  to  the  New  Testament.  Four 
volumes  (1879). 

Godet — Introduction  to  the  New  Testament.  (Part  I., 
1894;  Part  II.,  Div.  i.,  1899). 

Goodspeed — The  Story  of  the  New  Testament  (1915). 
Gregory,  C.  R. — Einleitung  in  das  Neue  Testament 
1909). 

Harnack — History  of  Early  Christian  Literature  until 
Eusebius  (1897). 

Heinrici — Der  literarische  Charickter  d.  Neut.  Schriften 
(1908). 

Holtzman,  H.  J. — Lehrbuch  der  historisch-kritischen 
Einleitung  in  das  Neue  Testament.  3  Aufl.  (1892). 
Jacquier — Histoire  des  Livres  du  Nouveau  Testament. 
Four  tomes  (1903-8). 


30  SYLLABUS  FOE  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 

w 

Jacquier — Etudes  de  Critique  et  de  Philologie  du 
Nouveau  Testament  (1920). 

Jones,  M. — The  New  Testament  in  the  Twentieth  Cen¬ 
tury  (1914). 

Julicher — An  Introduction  to  the  New  Testament 
(1904). 

Kerr — Introduction  to  New  Testament  Study  (1892). 

Knopf — Einfiihrung  in  das  Neue  Testament  (1919). 

Knowling — Literary  Criticism  of  the  New  Testament 
(1908). 

McClymont — The  New  Testament  and  Its  Writers 
(1893). 

McClymont — History  and  Results  of  New  Testament 
Criticism  (1913). 

Milligan — The  New  Testament  Documents.  Their 
Origin  and  Early  History  (1913). 

Moffatt — The  Historical  New  Testament  (1901). 

Moffatt— -An  Introduction  to  the  Literature  of  the  New 
Testament  (1911  and  1920). 

Moffatt — The  Approach  to  the  New  Testament  (1921). 

Nash — Higher  Criticism  of  the  New  Testament  (1903). 

Peake — Critical  Introduction  to  the  New  Testament 
(1910). 

Ramsay — The  Bearing  of  Recent  Discovery  on  the  Trust¬ 
worthiness  of  the  New  Testament  (1915). 

Ramsay — The  First  Christian  Century  (1911). 

Robertson,  J.  A. — The  Hidden  Romance  of  the  New 
Testament  (1920). 

Salmon — Introduction  to  the  New  Testament  (1892). 

Soden,  H.  von — The  History  of  Early  Christian  Litera¬ 
ture  (1906). 

Strong,  A.  H. — Popular  Lectures  on  the  Books  of  the 
New  Testament  (1914). 

Symes — The  Evolution  of  the  New  Testament  (1921). 

Weiss,  B. — A  Manual  of  Introduction  to  the  New  Testa¬ 
ment.  Two  volumes  (1889).  Dritte  Aufl.  (Berlin, 
1897). 


GENERAL  BIBLIOGRAPHY 


31 


Wrede — The  Origin  of  the  New  Testament  (1909). 
Zahn — An  Introduction  to  the  New  Testament.  Three 
volumes  (1909). 

(The  above  list  includes  only  the  more  important  of  the 
comparatively  recent  books  and  does  not  include  books 
on  special  problems  like  the  synoptic  question — only  the 
New  Testament  as  a  whole— and  does  not  include  books 
on  the  canon,  the  geography  of  Palestine  and  customs  of 
the  people,  New  Testament  Archaeology,  which  are  treated 
in  the  class  in  Biblical  Introduction.  New  Testament 
Criticism,  like  Old  Testament  Criticism  is  formally  taught 
in  the  class  in  Biblical  Introduction.  For  books  on  the 
language  of  the  New  Testament  and  the  text  of  the  New 
Testament,  students  are  referred  to  my  Grammar  of  the 
Greek  New  Testament  in  the  Light  of  Historical  Research 
and  the  books  on  New  Testament  Textual  Criticism.) 

NEW  TESTAMENT  HISTORY  AND  TIMES 

(Books  Covering  Aspects  of  the  Whole  Period.) 

Abbott — Society  and  Politics  in  Ancient  Rome  (1909). 
Adam — Religious  Teachers  of  Greece  (1908). 

Angus — Environment  of  Early  Christianity  (1915). 
Arnold — The  Roman  System  of  Provincial  Administra¬ 
tion  (1906). 

Bentwich — Hellenism  (1919). 

Bergmann — Jiidische  Apologetik  im  neutestamentlichen 
Zeitalter  (1908). 

Botsford — Ancient  History. 

Botsford — History  of  Greece. 

Botsford — History  of  Rome. 

Bousset — Die  Religion  des  Judenthums  im  neutestament¬ 
lichen  Zeitalter.  2  Aufl.  (1906). 

Breasted — Ancient  Times:  A  History  of  the  Ancient 
World  (1918). 


32  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Breed — Preparation  of  the  World  for  Christ.  Second 
edition  (1893). 

Buchler — Types  of  Palestinian  Piety  (1922). 

Bury — History  of  the  Roman  Empire  from  B.  C.  28  to 
A.  D.  180  (1893). 

Case — The  Evolution  of  Early  Christianity  (1914). 

Clemen — Primitive  Christianity  and  Its  Non-Jewish 
Sources  (1912). 

Cornill — History  of  the  People  of  Israel  (1898). 

Deissmann — Light  From  the  Ancient  East  (1910). 

Dewick — Primitive  Christian  Eschatology  (1912). 

Dill — Roman  Society  From  Nero  to  Marcus  Aurelius 
(1905). 

Dollinger — The  Gentile  and  the  Jew.  Two  volumes 
(1906). 

Edersheim — History  of  the  Jewish  Nation  (1885). 

Edersheim — Sketches  of  Jewish  Social  Life  (1876). 

Ewald — History  of  Israel.  Eight  volumes  (1876-86). 

Farrar — Early  Days  of  Christianity  (1882). 

Farrer — Paganism  and  Christianity  (1891). 

Felten — Neutestamentliche  Zeitgeschichte.  Two  vol¬ 
umes  (1910). 

Ferrero — The  Greatness  and  Decline  of  Rome.  Five 
volumes  (1907-9). 

Ferrero — Characters  and  Events  of  Roman  History 
(1909). 

Fisher — Beginnings  of  Christianity.  Second  edition 
(1911). 

Foakes — Jackson  and  Kirsopp  Lake — The  Beginnings  of 
Christianity  (1921-  ). 

Friedlander — Die  religiosen  Bewegungen  innerhalb  des 
Judentums  in  Zeitalter  Jesu  (1905). 

Friedlander — Roman  Life  and  Manners  under  the  Early 
Empire.  Three  volumes  (1909-10). 

Glover — Conflict  of  Religions  within  the  Roman  Empire 

(1911). 


GENERAL  BIBLIOGRAPHY  3S 

Glover — Progress  in  Religion  to  the  Christian  Era 
(1922). 

Grant — The  Peasantry  of  Palestine  (1907). 

Gratz — Geschichte  der  Juden.  5  Aufl.  (1906). 

Hall — Historical  Setting  of  the  Early  Gospel  (1912). 

Hardy — Christianity  and  the  Roman  Government  (1894). 

Harnack — Mission  and  Expansion  of  Christianity  in  the 
First  Three  Centuries.  Two  volumes  (1908). 

Hausrath — History  of  New  Testament  Times.  Four 
volumes  (1878-95). 

Herford — Pharisaism  (1912). 

Hollmann — The  Jewish  Religion  in  the  Time  of  Jesus 
(1909). 

Holtzmann,  O.  —  Neutestamentliche  Zeitgeschichte 
(1895).  2  Aufl.  (1906). 

Inge — Society  in  Rome  Under  the  Caesars  (1894). 

Jeremias — Babylonisch  im  Neuen  Testament  (1904). 

Kaerst — Geschichte  des  hellenistischen  Zeitalters.  Two 
volumes  (1901-9). 

Kruger — Hellenismus  und  Judentum  im  neutestament- 
lichen  Zeitalter  (1908). 

Latimer — Judea  From  Cyrus  to  Titus  (1899). 

Ledrain — Histoire  d’lsrael  (1892). 

Livingston — The  Legacy  of  Greece  (1922). 

Mackie — Bible  Manners  and  Customs  (1898). 

Maclear — Class  Book  of  New  Testament  History 
(1890). 

Mahaffy — Survey  of  Greek  Civilization  (1896). 

Mahaffy — The  Silver  Age  of  the  Greek  World  (1906). 

Mathews — The  History  of  New  Testament  Times  in 
Palestine.  Second  edition  (1910). 

Mommsen — History  of  Rome.  Five  volumes  (1894). 

Mommsen — The  Provinces  of  the  Roman  Empire  from 
Caesar  to  Diocletian.  Two  volumes  (1909). 

Monroe — Source  Book  of  the  History  of  Education  for 
the  Greeks  and  Romans  (1902). 


34>  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Morrison — -The  Jews  Under  Roman  Rule.  Fourth  edi¬ 
tion  (1899). 

Orr — Neglected  Factors  in  the  Study  of  the  Early  Prog¬ 
ress  of  Christianity  (1899). 

Ottley — Short  History  of  the  Hebrews  in  the  Roman 
Period  (1900). 

Oesterley  and  Box — The  Religion  and  Worship  of  the 
Synagogue  (1907). 

Pfleiderer — Primitive  Christianity:  Its  Writings  and 
Teachings  in  Their  Historical  Connections.  Three 
volumes  (1906-10). 

Pressense — The  Ancient  World  and  Christianity. 

Radin — The  Jews  among  the  Greeks  and  the  Romans 
(1915). 

Rall — New  Testament  History  (1914). 

Ramsay,  W.  M. — The  Church  in  the  Roman  Empire 
(1893). 

Ramsay,  W.  M. — Roads  and  Travel  in  the  New  Testa¬ 
ment  (article  in  Hastings  D.  B.,  Volume  V.) 

Ramsay — The  Bearing  of  Recent  Discovery  on  the  Trust¬ 
worthiness  of  the  New  Testament  (1915). 

Reitzenstein — Die  hellenistichen  Mysterienreligionen. 

Riggs — History  of  the  Jewish  People  in  the  Maccabean 
and  Roman  Periods  (1900). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — Studies  in  the  New  Testament 
(1915). 

Schurer — The  Jewish  People  in  the  Time  of  Christ. 
Five  volumes  (1891). 

Schwalm — La  vie  privee  du  peuple  juif  a  l’epoque  de 
Jesus  Christ  (1910). 

Smith,  George  Adam — Historical  Geography  of  the 
Holy  Land.  Fourteenth  edition,  two  volumes 
(1908). 

Stapfer — Palestine  in  the  Time  of  Christ.  Third  edition 
(1885). 

Stobart — The  Glory  That  Was  Greece  (1911). 

Stobart — The  Grandeur  That  Was  Rome  (1912). 


GENERAL  BIBLIOGRAPHY 


35 


Strack  und  Billerbeck — Kommentar  zum  Neuen  Tes¬ 
tament  aus  Talmud  und  Midrasch  (1922). 
Streatfield — Preparing  the  Way  (1919). 

Trumbull — Studies  in  Oriental  Social  Life  (1907). 
Tucker — Life  in  the  Roman  World  of  Nero  and  St. 
Paul  (1910). 

Uhlhorn — Conflict  of  Christianity  with  Heathenism 
(1879). 

Wade — New  Testament  History  (1922). 

Wendland — Die  hellenistisch-romische  Kultur  in  ihren 
Beziehungen  zu  Judentum  und  Christentum.  3  Aufl. 
(1912). 

Wenley — Preparation  for  Christianity  in  the  Ancient 
World  (1898). 

Wernle — Beginnings  of  Christianity.  Two  volumes 
(1903-4). 

theology  of  the  new  testament 

(Merely  a  Few  of  the  Leading  Books  on  the 

Whole  Field.) 

Alexander — System  of  Biblical  Theology  (1888). 
Bernard — Progress  of  Doctrine  in  the  New  Testament 
(1867). 

Beyschlag — Theology  of  the  New  Testament.  Two 
volumes  (1895). 

Bovon — Theologie  du  Nouveau  Testament.  Two  vol¬ 
umes  (1893-4). 

Bruce — The  Kingdom  of  God  (1893). 

Cone — The  Gospel  and  Its  Earliest  Interpretations.  Sec¬ 
ond  edition  (1894). 

Estes — Theology  of  New  Testament  (1900). 

Fairbairn — Studies  in  Religion  and  Theology  (1910). 
Feine — Theologie  des  Neuen  Testaments  (1910).  3 

Aufl.  (1919). 

Fletcher — Psychology  of  the  New  Testament. 

Gould — Biblical  Theology  of  the  New  Testament  (1900). 


36  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Holtzmann,  H.  J. — Lehrbuch  der  Neutestamentlichen 
Theologie.  Two  volumes  (1897). 

Nairne — The  Faith  of  the  New  Testament  (1920). 
Schlatter— Theologie  des  Neuen  Testaments.  Two 
volumes  (1909-10). 

Stevens — The  Theology  of  the  New  Testament  (1899). 
Weinel — Biblische  Theologie  des  Neuen  Testaments. 
Die  Religion  Jesu  und  der  Urchristentums.  3  Aufl. 
(1921). 

Weiss,  B. — Biblical  Theology  of  the  New  Testament. 

Two  volumes  (1888-9).  6  Aufl.  (1895). 

Weiss,  B. — The  Religion  of  the  New  Testament  (1904). 
Wernle- — Beginnings  of  Christianity.  Two  volumes 
(1903-4). 

Wibrich — Juden  und  Griechen. 

HERMENEUTICS,  OR  INTERPRETATION 

Barnes — A  Companion  to  Biblical  Studies  (1916). 
Briggs — A  General  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  Holy 
Scripture  (1899). 

Carpenter — The  Bible  in  the  Nineteenth  Century 
(1903). 

Cave — Introduction  to  Theology  and  Its  Literature 
(1896). 

Clarke — The  Use  of  the  Scriptures  in  Theology  (1905). 
Clemen — Religionsgeschichtliche  Erklarung  des  Neuen 
Testaments  (1909). 

Dods — The  Bible:  Its  Origin  and  Nature  (1905). 

Eysinga — Die  hollandische  radikale  Kritik  des  Neuen 
Testaments  (1912). 

Farrar — The  History  of  Interpretation  (1886). 
Farrar— The  Messages  of  the  Books  (1885). 

Gilbert — A  Short  History  of  the  Interpretation  of  the 
Bible  (1908). 

Gunkel — Zum  religionsgeschichtlichen  Verstandnis  des 
Neuen  Testaments  (1903). 


GENERAL  BIBLIOGRAPHY  37 

Heffern — Apology  and  Polemic  in  the  New  Testament 
(1922). 

Immer — Hermeneutics  of  the  New  Testament.  Third 
edition  (1890). 

Lockhart — Principles  of  Interpretation  (1900). 

Machlachlan — The  New  Testament  in  the  Light  of 
Modern  Knowledge. 

Milligan — The  Expository  Value  of  the  Revised  Ver¬ 
sion  (1916). 

Moulton,  J.  H. — From  Egyptian  Rubbish  Heaps 
(1916). 

Moulton,  R.  G. — Literary  Interpretation  of  the  Bible 
(1899). 

Nash — History  of  the  Higher  Criticism  of  the  New 
Testament  (1903). 

Peake — The  Bible  in  the  Twentieth  Century  (1910). 

Sanday — The  Oracles  of  God.  Third  edition  (1891). 

Selwyn — The  Oracles  of  the  New  Testament  (1911). 

Scott,  E.  F. — The  Apologetic  of  the  New  Testament 
(1907). 

Scott,  E.  F. — New  Testament  Study  (1922). 

Selleck — The  New  Appreciation  of  the  Bible  (1907). 

Smith,  H.  P. — Biblical  Interpretation  (1922). 

Stoddard — The  New  Testament  in  Life  and  Literature 
(1914). 

Strong — Popular  Lectures  on  the  Books  of  the  New 
Testament  (1914). 

Terry — Biblical  Hermeneutics.  Third  edition  (1890). 

Torrey — How  to  Study  the  Bible  (1905). 

Turner — New  Testament  Study  (1921). 

Schweitzer — The  Quest  of  the  Historical  Jesus  (1910). 

Willett  and  Campbell — The  Teachings  of  the  Books 
(1899). 

EXTRA-CANONICAL  EARLY  CHRISTIAN  LITERATURE 

Abbott — Light  on  the  Gospel  from  an  Ancient  Poet 
(1912). 


38  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Bardenhewer — Patrologie.  Third  edition  (1910). 

Bartlet  and  Other  Writers — The  New  Testament  in 
the  Apostolic  Fathers  (1905). 

Cruttwell — A  Literary  History  of  Early  Christianity. 
Two  volumes  (1893). 

Donahoo— Apocryphal  and  Legendary  Life  of  Christ 
(1903). 

Funk — Patres  Apostolici.  Second  edition  (1901). 

Gebhardt,  Harnack  and  Zahn — Patrum  Apostoli- 
corum  Opera.  Fifth  Edition  (1906). 

Giles — Codex  Apocryphus  Novi  Testamenti.  Two  vol¬ 
umes  (1852). 

Goodspeed — Index  Patristicus  (1907). 

Grenfell  and  Hunt — Logia  of  Jesus  (1897). 

Grenfell  and  Hunt — New  Sayings  of  Jesus  (1904). 

Griffenhoofe — The  Unwritten  Sayings  of  Christ 
(1903). 

Handmann — Das  Hebraer  Evangelium  (1888). 

Harnack — Geschichte  der  altchristlichen  Literatur  bis 
Eusebius.  Two  volumes  (1893-1904) . 

Harnack  und  Fleming — Ein  jiidisch-christliches  Psalm- 
enbuch  aus  dem  ersten  Jahnhundert  (1910). 

Harris — The  Newly-Recovered  Gospel  of  St.  Peter 
(1893). 

Harris — The  Odes  and  Psalms  of  Solomon  (1909). 

Hase — New  Testament  Parallels  in  Buddhistic  Literature 
(1907). 

Hennecke — Handbuch  zu  den  Neutestamentlichen 
Apokryphen  (1904). 

Hill— The  Earliest  Life  of  Christ  Ever  Compiled  from 
the  Four  Gospels,  Being  the  Diatessaron  of  Tatian 
(1894). 

Hone— Apocryphal  New  Testament  (1820). 

Horder — Newly  Found  Words  of  Jesus  (1905). 

Klein — Die  alteste  Christliche  Kateschismus  und  die 
jiidische  Propaganda-Literatur  (1909). 

Knopf — Das  nachapostolische  Zeitalter  (1905). 


GENERAL  BIBLIOGRAPHY  39 

Kruger — History  of  Early  Christian  Literature  in  the 
First  Three  Centuries  (1897). 

Lightfoot — The  Apostolic  Fathers.  Three  volumes 
(1885-90). 

Lock  and  Sanday — Two  Lectures  on  the  Sayings  of 
Jesus  (1897). 

Nicholson — The  Gospel  According  to  the  Hebrews. 

Orr — The  New  Testament  Apocryphal  Writings  (1904). 

Pick — The  Extra-Canonical  Life  of  Christ  (1903). 

Pick — Paralipomena :  Remains  of  Gospels  and  Sayings 
of  Christ  (1908). 

Pick — Apocryphal  Acts  of  Paul,  Peter,  John,  Andrew 
and  Thomas  (1909). 

Porter — Messages  of  the  Apocalyptical  Writers. 

Preuschen — Antilegomena :  Die  Reste  der  ausserkanon- 
ischer  Evangelien  und  urchristlichen  Ueberliefer- 
ungen.  2  Aufl.  (1905). 

Resch — Aussercanonische  Paralleltexte  zu  den  Evange¬ 
lien  (1893). 

Resch — Agrapha.  2  Aufl.  (1906). 

Ropes — Die  Spriiche  Jesu  die  in  den  kanonischen  Evan¬ 
gelien  nicht  iiberliefert  sind  (1896). 

Schaff,  P. — The  Teaching  of  the  Twelve  Apostles. 
Third  edition  (1890). 

Schlecht — Doctrina  XII  Apostolorum  (1901). 

Swete — The  Apocryphal  Gospel  of  St.  Peter  (1893). 

Swete — Patristic  Study  (1902). 

Taylor,  C. — The  Oxyrhynchus  Logia  and  the  Apocryphal 
Gospels  (1899). 

Taylor,  C. — The  Oxyrhynchus  Sayings  of  Tesus  Found 
in  1903  (1905). 

Walker — English  Translation  of  the  Apocrypha  of  the 
New  Testament  (Volume  VIII  Ante  Nicene 
Fathers). 

White,  Evelyn — The  Sayings  of  Jesus  from  Oxyrhyn¬ 
chus  (1922). 

Zahn — Tatian’s  Diatessaron  (1881). 


PART  I:  THE  INTERBIBLICAL 

HISTORY 

(400  B.  C.  to  B,  C.  6  or  5) 


PART  I:  THE  INTERBIBLICAL 

HISTORY 

(400  B.  C.  to  B.  C.  6  or  5.) 

The  text-books  used  in  connection  with  this  part  of  the 
Syllabus  are  Josephus,  the  Apocrypha  of  the  Old  Testa¬ 
ment,  and  the  Pseudepigrapha.  The  picture  is  drawn 
from  the  original  sources.  Free  use  of  the  best  books  on 
the  period  is  advised,  and  such  books  are  pointed  out  at 
the  proper  place.  Copious  lectures  are  given  with  each 
lesson,  showing  the  inner  development  of  the  history.  A 
knowledge  of  ancient  history  is  assumed  in  this  study  of 
the  interbiblical  history  of  the  Jews.  One  is  supposed  to 
have  some  acquaintance  with  the  outstanding  features  in 
the  history  of  Egypt,  Assyria,  Babylonia,  Greece  and 
Rome  as  well  as  of  the  Old  Testament.  A  selected  bibli¬ 
ography  is  given. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 

THE  OLD  TESTAMENT  APOCRYPHA  AND  PSEUDEPIGRAPHA 

Andre — Les  Apocryphes  de  Tancien  Testament  (1903). 

Andrews — Apocryphal  Books  of  the  Old  and  New  Testa¬ 
ments  (1908). 

Bagster  and  Sons— The  Apocrypha.  Including  III  and 
IV  Maccabees. 

Ball — Ecclestiastical  or  Deutero-canonical  Books  of  the 
Old  Testament  (1892). 

Bensley  and  James — Fourth  Esdras  (1895). 

Berrymann — Judische  Apocalyptik  im  neutestament- 
lichen  Zeitalter  (1908). 

43 


44  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Bissell — The  Apocrypha  of  the  Old  Testament  (Lange 
Comm.)  (1890). 

Bonwetsch— Das  slavishe  Henochbuch  (1896). 

Bousset — Die  jiidische  Apocalyptik  (1903). 

Bousset — Die  Religion  des  Judentums  im  neutestament- 
lichen  Zeitalter  (1903). 

Box — The  Ezra-Apocalypse  (1912). 

Burkitt — Jewish  and  Christian  Apocalypses  (1914). 

Butt  weiser— Outline  of  the  Neo-Hebraic  Apocalyptic 
Literature  (1901). 

Charles — Eschatology  (1899). 

Charles — The  Book  of  Enoch.  Second  edition  (1912). 

Charles — The  Apocalypse  of  Baruch  (1896). 

Charles — The  Assumption  of  Moses  (1897). 

Charles — The  Ascension  of  Isaiah  (1900). 

Charles — The  Book  of  Jubilees  (1902). 

Charles — The  Testaments  of  the  Twelve  Patriarchs 
(1908). 

Charles — Apocrypha  and  Pseudepigrapha  of  the  Old 
Testament.  Two  volumes  (1913). 

Charles — Religious  Development  Between  the  Old  and 
the  New  Testaments  (1914). 

Charles — A  Critical  History  of  the  Doctrine  of  the 
Future  Life  in  Israel,  in  Judaism  and  in  Christianity. 

Chowlson — Beitrage  zur  Entwickelungsgeschichte  des 
Judenthums  (1910). 

Churton — The  Uncanonical  and  Apocryphal  Books. 

Churton  and  Others — The  Apocryphal  Books.  With 
brief  commentary  (1880). 

Cook — The  Fathers  of  Jesus  (1886). 

Conrad — Die  religiosen  und  sittlichen  Anschauungen  der 
alttestamentlichen  Apokryphen  und  Pseudepigraphen 
(1907). 

Daubney — The  Use  of  the  Apocrypha  in  the  Christian 
Church  (1900). 

Daubney — The  Three  Additions  to  Daniel  (1906). 

Danziger — Jewish  Forerunners  of  Jesus  (1904). 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY 


45 


Deane — The  Book  of  Wisdom  (1881). 

Deane — Pseudepigrapha  (1891). 

Duff — I  and  II  Esdras. 

Fairweather  and  Black — The  First  Book  of  Macca¬ 
bees  (1897). 

Fairweather — I  and  II  Maccabees. 

Fritzsche  und  Grimm — Kurzgefasstes  exegetisches 
Handbuch  zu  den  Apokryphen  des  A.  T.  Three 
volumes  (1851-9). 

Geffcken — Die  Oracula  sibyllina  (1902). 

Geffcken — Komposition  und  Entstehungszeit  der  Orac¬ 
ula  sibyllina  (1902). 

Goodrick — The  Book  of  Wisdom  (1913). 

Gregg — The  Wisdom  of  Solomon. 

Gressmann — Israelitische  judische  Eschatologie  (1905). 

Harris — Odes  and  Psalms  of  Solomon  (1910). 

Hart — Ecclesiasticus  in  Greek  (1909). 

Harwell — The  Principal  Versions  of  Baruch  (1915). 

Hollmann — The  Jewish  Religion  in  the  Time  of  Jesus 
(1909). 

Holscher — Kanonisch  und  Apokryph  (1905). 

Holtzmann — Die  judische  Schriftgelehrsamkeit  zur  Zeit 
Jesu  (1901). 

Hughes — Ethics  of  Jewish  Apocryphal  Literature 
(1910). 

Issaverdens — The  Uncanonical  Writings  of  the  Old 
Testament. 

Kabisch — Das  Vierte  Buch  Ezra  (1889). 

Kautzsch — Die  Apokryphen  und  Pseudepigraphen  des 
A.  T.  Two  volumes  (1900). 

Keil — Kommentar  fiber  die  Bucher  der  Makkabaer 
(1875). 

Martin — Le  Livre  d’Henoch  (1907). 

Montefiore — The  Wisdom  of  Solomon  (1887). 

Montefiore — Aspects  of  Judaism  (1895). 

Moore — Judaism  at  the  Beginning  of  the  Christian  Era 

(1916). 


46  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Morfill  and  Charles — The  Book  of  the  Secrets  of 
Enoch  (1896). 

Nelson’s  Sons — Old  Testament  Apocrypha.  Revised 
English  Version  (1895). 

Oesterley — Ecclesiasticus  (1912). 

Oesterley — The  Religion  and  Worship  of  the  Synagogue 
(1907). 

Oesterley — The  Books  of  the  Apocrypha  (1914). 

Oesterley — Doctrinal  Teaching  of  the  Apocrypha 
(1914). 

Oxford  University  Press — The  Apocrypha.  Revised 
(1896). 

Philippi — Das  Buch  Henoch  (1868). 

Ryle  and  James — Psalms  of  the  Pharisees  (1891). 

Sayce — Tobit  and  the  Babylonian  Apocryphal  Writings. 

Schechter — Studies  in  Judaism  (1908). 

Schmidt — Ecclesiasticus. 

Schodde — Book  of  Jubilees. 

Sedgwick — The  Story  of  the  Apocrypha. 

Smend — Die  Weisheit  des  Jesus  Sirach.  Two  volumes 
(1906). 

Snell — The  Value  of  the  Apocrypha. 

Stevenson — Wisdom  and  the  Jewish  Apocryphal  Writ¬ 
ings  (1903). 

Swete — Greek  Text  of  the  Apocrypha.  Old  Testament 
in  Greek.  Three  volumes  (1895-1907). 

Swete — An  Introduction  to  the  Old  Testament  in  Greek. 
Revised  edition  by  Ottley  (1914). 

Terry — The  Sibylline  Oracles  (1899). 

Thackeray — The  Septuagint  and  Jewish  Worship 
(1921). 

Thomson — -Books  which  Influenced  Our  Lord. 

Vaganay — Le  Probleme  eschat.  dans  le  IV  Livre 
d’Esdras  (1907). 

Violet — Die  Ezra-Apokalypse.  Teil  I  (1910). 

Viteau  and  Martin— Les  Psaumes  de  Salomon  (1910). 

Voltz — Judische  Eschatologie. 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY 


47 


Volkmar — Einleitung  in  die  Apokryphen. 

Wace — Apocrypha.  With  Commentary.  Two  volumes 
(1888). 

Wahl — Clavis  librorum  veteris  testamenti  apocryphorum 
philologica  (1853). 

Westcott — Introduction  to  the  Four  Gospels  (1875). 
Winter  und  Wunsche — Die  judische  Literatur  seit 
Abschluss  des  Canon. 

Zockler — Apokryphen. 

Singer — The  Tewish  Encyclopaedia.  Twelve  volumes 
(1901-6). 


PHILO 

Aall — Der  Logos  (1899). 

Bentwich — Philo-Judaeus  of  Alexandria  (1910). 

Brehier — Les  idees  philosophiques  et  religieuses  de 
Philon  d’Alexandrie  (1908). 

Bucher — Philonische  studien. 

Cohn — Einteilung  und  Chronologie  der  Schriften  Philos. 

Cohn  and  Wendland — Philonis  Alexandrini  Opera  quae 
supersunt.  Greek  text  (1896). 

Conybeare — Philo  about  the  Contemplative  Life  (1895). 

Delaunay — Philo  d’Alexandrie.  Second  edition  (1870). 

Drummond — Philo  Judaeus:  or,  The  Jewish-Alexandrian 
Philosophy  in  Its  Development  and  Completion. 
Two  volumes  (1888). 

Frankel — Ueber  den  Einfluss  der  palastinenischen  Exe- 
gese  auf  die  Alexandrinische  Hermeneutik. 

Gfrorer — Philo  und  die  Alexandrinische  Theosophie 
(1831). 

Guthrie — The  Message  of  Philo-Tudaeus  of  Alexandria 
(1909). 

Guyot — Les  reminiscences  de  Philon  ches  Plotin  (1906). 

Herriot — Philon  le  Juif  (1898). 

James — Biblical  Antiquities  of  Philo  (1917). 

Kennedy — Philo’s  Contribution  to  Religion  (1919). 


48  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Kruger — Philo  und  Josephus  als  Apologeten  des  Juden- 
tums  (1906). 

Nairne — The  Alexandrine  Gospel  (1917). 

Paris  (Mangey) — Edition  of  Philo’s  Works  in  the 
Greek  Text  (1852). 

Reville— Le  Logos  d’apres  Philon  (1877). 

Ritter — Philo  und  die  Halacha  (1879). 

Ryle — Philo  and  Holy  Scripture. 

Siegfried- — Philo  von  Alexandria  (1875). 

Tauchnitz — Edition  of  the  Greek  Text. 

Windisch — Die  Frommigheit  Philos  und  ihre  Bedeutung 
f fir  das  Christentum  (1909). 

Yonge — Philo  Judaeus.  Complete  works.  Four  volumes 
in  Bohn  Library  1854-5.  One  volume  Macmillan, 
same  date. 

See  also  various  works  on  Greek  philosophy  and  the 

articles  on  Philo  in  dictionaries,  cyclopaedias  and  quar¬ 
terlies,  in  particular  Singer,  The  Jewish  Encyclopaedia. 

JOSEPHUS 

Bentwich — Josephus  (1914). 

Berendts — Die  Zeugnisse  von  Christentum  im  Slavischen 
de  Bello  Judaico  des  Josephus  (1906). 

Bloch — Die  Quellen  des  Flavius  Josephus  (1879). 

Boettger — Topographisch-historisches  Lexicon  zu  den 
Schriften  des  Flavius  Josephus  (1879). 

Destinon — Die  Chronologie  des  Josephus  (1880). 

Destinon — Die  Quellen  des  Josephus  (1882). 

Duschak — Josephus  und  die  Tradition  (1864). 

Holscher — Die  Quellen  des  Josephus  (1904). 

Krenkel — Josephus  und  Lukas  (1894). 

Kruger — Philo  und  Josephus  als  Apologeten  des  Juden- 
tums  (1906). 

Laqueur — Der  judische  Historiker  Flavius  Josephus 
(1920). 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY  49 

Margoliouth — Whiston’s  Translation  of  Josephus. 
Edited  with  notes  (1906). 

Muller — Des  Flavius  Josephus  Schrift  gegen  den  Apion 
(1877). 

Niese — Flavii  Josephi  Opera  cum  apparatu  critico.  Greek 
text.  Seven  volumes  (1887-95). 

Niese — Flavii  Josephi  Opera.  Editio  Minor.  Six  vol¬ 
umes. 

Nussbaum — Observationen  in  Flavius  Josephus  (1875). 

Olitzki — Flavius  Josephus  und  die  Halacha  (1885). 

Schlatter — Die  hebraischen  Namen  bei  Josephus 
(1913). 

Schmidt,  W. — De  Flavii  Josephi  elocutione  (1894). 

Shilleto — Whiston’s  Translation  Revised.  Five  vol¬ 
umes  (1889-90). 

Traill — J  osephus. 

Whiston — Standard  Translation. 

THE  TALMUD 

Abrahams — Studies  in  Pharisaism  (1917). 

Abelson — Jewish  Mysticism  (1912). 

Abelson — The  Immanence  of  God  in  Rabbinic  Litera¬ 
ture  (1912). 

Baeck — Das  Wesen  des  Judenthums  (1905).  2  Aufl. 

(1922). 

Barclay — The  Talmud  (1878). 

Bennett — The  Mishna  as  Illustrating  the  Gospel  (1912). 

Bergmann — Jiidische  Apologetik  im  neutestamentlichen 
Zeitalter  (1908). 

Bernfeld — Das  Talmud :  seine  Bedeutung  und  seine 
Geschichte. 

Bishoff — Jesus  und  die  Rabbinen  (1905). 

Bohl — Forschungen  nach  einer  Volksbibel  zur  Zeit  Jesu. 

Bousset — Die  Religion  des  Judentums  in  neutestament¬ 
lichen  Zeitalter  (1903). 


50  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Bousset — Jesu  Predigt  in  ihren  Gegensatz  zum  Juden- 
tum  (1892). 

Braunschweiger-— Die  Lehrer  der  Mischnah  (1890). 
Brody — Anthologia  Hebraica  (1922). 

Buchler — Das  galilaische  ’Am-ha-’Aretz  (1906). 
Buxtorf — Lexicon  Chaldaicum  Talmudicum  et  Rabbini- 
cum  (1640). 

Cook — The  Fathers  of  Jesus  (1886). 

Danziger — Jewish  Forerunners  of  Jesus  (1904). 
Delitzsch — Hillel  and  Jesus  (1867). 

Delitzsch — Talmudische  Studien. 

Duschak — Die  Moral  der  Evangelien  und  des  Talmud 
(1877). 

Friebig — Talmud  und  Theologie  (1903). 

Friedlander — Rabbinic  Philosophy  and  Ethics  (1912). 
Friedlander — Die  religiosen  Bewegungen  innerhalb  des 
Judentums  im  Zeitalter  Jesu  (1905). 

Geiger — Das  Judenthum  und  seine  Geschichte. 
Goldschmidt — Der  Babylonische  Talmud  (1897). 
Halper — Post-Biblical  Hebrew  Literature  (1921). 
Hamburger — Real-Encyclopadie  fur  Bibel  und  Talmud 
(1883). 

Herford — Christianity  in  Talmud  and  Midrash  (1903). 
Herford — Pharisaism  (1912). 

Hershon — -The  Treasures  of  the  Talmud. 

Kohler — Grundriss  einer  systematischen  Theologie  des 
Judentums  auf  geschichtliche  Grundlage  (1910). 
Laible — Jesus  Christus  im  Talmud  (1900). 

Lightfoot,  J. — Horse  Hebraicse  et  Talmudicse  in  4  Evan- 
gelia  (1663-1678). 

Mielzinier — Introduction  to  the  Talmud.  Second  edi¬ 
tion  (1903). 

Montefiore — Aspects  of  Judaism  (1895). 

Montefiore — The  Religious  Teaching  of  Jesus  (1910). 
Montefiore — Judaism  and  St.  Paul  (1915). 

Nicolas — Les  doctrines  religieuses  des  Juifs  pendant  les 
deux  siecles  anterieures  a  l’ere  chretienne  (1860). 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY 


51 


Oesterley — Religion  and  Worship  of  the  Synagogue 
(1907). 

Peters — Wit  and  Wisdom  of  the  Talmud  (1900). 

Pick — What  is  the  Talmud?  (1887). 

Pick — Jesus  and  the  Talmud  (1913). 

Pick — The  Cabala:  Its  Influence  on  Christianity  and 
Judaism  (1913). 

Rabbinowicz — Kritische  Uebersicht  der  Gesammt  und 
Einzelausgabe  des  Babylonischen  Talmuds  seit  1484. 
Twenty-six  volumes  (1880-6). 

Ragsport — Tales  and  Maxims  from  the  Talmud 
(1910). 

Raphall — The  Mishna. 

Reizenstein,  Jenmi — Rabbinic  Wisdom  (1921). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — The  Pharisees  and  Jesus  (1920). 

Robinson — The  Evangelists  and  the  Mishna  (1859). 

Rodkinson — English  Translation  of  the  Babylonian  Tal¬ 
mud  (1898). 

Schechter — Studies  in  Judaism  (1908). 

Schechter — Some  Aspects  of  Rabbinic  Theology 
(1909). 

Schottgen — Horae  Hebraicae  et  Talmudicae  (1733). 

Schwab — Le  Talmud  de  Jerusalem  (1871). 

Stapfer — Les  idees  religieuses  en  Palestine  a  l’epoque  de 
Jesus  Christ  (1878). 

Strack — Einleitung  in  den  Talmud.  4  Aufl.  (1908). 

Strack — Jesus,  die  Haretiker  und  die  Christen  nach  den 
altesten  Aufgaben  (1910). 

Strack  und  Billerbeck — Kommentar  zum  Neuen 
Testament  aus  Talmud  und  Midrasch  (1922). 

Surenhusius — Mishnah. 

Taylor,  C. — Sayings  of  the  Jewish  Fathers  (1897).  Ap¬ 
pendix  (1900). 

Thein — Der  Talmud. 

Tauchuma — Midrash. 

Weber — Die  Lehre  des  Talmud  (1880). 

Weber — Judische  Theologie  auf  Grund  des  Talmud  und 


52  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


verwandter  Schriften  gemeinfasslich  dargestellt.  2 
Aufl.  (1897). 

Wetstein— Novum  Testamentum  Graecum. 

Wunsche— Der  Jerusalemische  Talmud. 

Wunsche — Bibliotheca  Rabbinica. 

See  in  particular:  Singer— The  Jewish  Encyclopaedia. 

THE  TARGUMS 

For  the  various  Targums  (Jerusalem,  Jonathan,  Joseph, 
Onkelos)  see 

Berliner — Targum  Onkelos. 

Duschak — -Der  Moral  der  Evangelien  und  des  Talmud. 
Frankel — Targum  der  Propheten. 

Singer — Onkelos  und  seine  Verhaltnis  zur  Halacha. 
Singer — The  Jewish  Encyclopaedia. 

HANDBOOKS  ON  THE  INTERBIBLICAL  PERIOD 

Bevan — Jerusalem  Under  the  High  Priests  (1904). 
Cheyne — -Religious  Life  After  the  Exile. 

Conder — The  Hebrew  Tragedy  (1900). 

Fairweather — From  the  Exile  to  the  Advent  (1895). 
Fairweather — The  Background  of  the  Gospels  (1909). 
Garner — -Connection  of  Sacred  History  (1880). 

Grant — Between  the  Testaments  (1908). 

Gregg — Between  the  Testaments  (1908). 

Hunter — After  the  Exile.  Two  volumes  (1890). 
Huntington — Palestine  and  Its  Transformation  (1911). 
Kent — Makers  and  Teachers  of  Judaism  (1911). 

Kruger — Hellenismus  und  Judentum  im  neutestament- 
lichen  Zeitalter  (1908). 

Latimer— -Judea  from  Cyrus  to  Titus  (1899). 
Maclear— Class  Book  of  New  Testament  History 
(1890). 

Madden— Coins  of  the  Jews  (1881). 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY 


53 


Mathews — A  History  of  New  Testament  Times  in 
Palestine.  Second  edition  (1910). 

Morrison — The  Jews  Under  Roman  Rule.  Fourth  edi¬ 
tion  (1899). 

Ottley — A  Short  History  of  the  Hebrews  to  the  Roman 
Period  (1901). 

Paulus — Les  Juifs  avant  le  Messie  (1905). 

Prideaux — Connection  Between  the  Old  and  the  New 
Testaments.  Two  volumes  (1858). 

Rae — Connection  Between  the  Old  and  the  New  Testa¬ 
ments  (1904). 

Raphall — Post-Biblical  History  of  the  Hebrews  (1886). 
Redford — Four  Centuries  of  Silence  (1885). 

Riggs — History  of  the  Jewish  People  in  the  Maccabean 
and  the  Roman  Periods  (1900). 

Schlatter — Israels  Geschichte  von  Alexander  dem 
Grosse  bis  Hadrian  (1901). 

Schurer — The  Jewish  People  in  the  Time  of  Christ. 
Five  volumes  (1891). 

Skinner — Historical  Connection  Between  the  Old  and 
the  New  Testaments. 

Smith,  George  Adam — Jerusalem  from  the  Earliest 
Times  to  A.  D.  70.  Two  volumes  (1908). 

Toy — Judaism  and  Christianity  (1890). 

Waddy-Moss — From  Malachi  to  Matthew  (1899). 

Wise — History  of  the  Hebrew  Second  Commonwealth 
(1880). 

LESSON  I:  IN  THE  PERSIAN  PERIOD 
(B.  C.  400-B.  C.  331.) 

1.  Periods  of  the  Interbiblical  History: 

(a)  Persian  Period,  B.  C.  536  to  B.  C.  331 ;  beginning 

of  Interbiblical  History  uncertain,  about  B.  C. 
400. 

(b)  Greek  Period,  B.  C.  331  to  B.  C.  167. 


54  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


(c)  Maccabean  Period,  B.  C.  167  to  B.  C.  63. 

(d)  Roman  Period,  B.  C.  63  to  B.  C.  5,  when  Jesus 

was  born.  The  Roman  rule  continued  till  A.  D. 
70,  when  the  nation  of  the  Jews  perished  with 
the  destruction  of  Jerusalem. 

For  a  full  treatment  of  the  sources  of  our  knowledge 
of  the  Interbiblical  History  and  the  literature 
thereon  see  Schurer — History  of  the  Jewish  People 
in  the  Time  of  Jesus,  Div.  I.,  Vol.  I.,  pp.  1-166. 

2.  The  Jews  still  under  Persian  Rule,  down  to  B.  C.  331. 

Read  Josephus’  Antiquities,  Book  XI.,  chapter  vii. 
General  contents  of  each  of  the  four  works  of  Jose¬ 
phus  (War,  Antiquities,  Life,  Against  Apion). 
Note  especially  sketch  of  his  own  life.  Name  the 
books  in  the  Apocrypha.  Read  the  Book  of  Tobit 
(Apocrypha) . 

See  further  on  Tobit,  Schurer — History  of  the  Jew¬ 
ish  People,  Div.  II.,  Vol.  III.,  pp.  37-44. 

LIST  OF  PERSIAN  RULERS 

Cyrus,  B.  C.  536-529. 

Cambyses,  B.  C.  529-522. 

Darius  Hystaspis,  B.  C.  522-486. 

Xerxes,  B.  C.  486-465. 

Artaxerxes,  B.  C.  465-425. 

Xerxes  II.,  B.  C.,  425. 

Darius  Nothus,  B.  C.  425-405. 

Artaxerxes  Mnemon,  B.  C.  405-359. 

Ochus,  B.  C.  359-338. 

Arses,  B.  C.  338-336. 

Darius,  B.  C.  336-331. 

LIST  OF  HIGH  PRIESTS  DURING  PERSIAN  PERIOD  OF  THE 
INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY 

Eliashib  (time  of  Nehemiah,  B.  C.  445).  Exact  years 
not  known.  A  Sanballat  in  time  of  Nehemiah. 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY 


55 


Joiada.  Exact  years  not  known. 

Jonathan,  B.  C.  405-359. 

Jaddua,  B.  C.  359-331.  Latest  name  in  Old  Testament 
(Neh.  12:  Ilf.).  Close  of  Old  Testament  canon 
and  history.  A  Sanballat  in  Josephus  in  time  of 
Jaddua. 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  PERSIAN  PERIOD 

Benjamin — Persia  (Story  of  Nations  Series,  1888). 
Budge — Babylonian  Life  and  History  (1888). 

Cox — The  Greeks  and  the  Persians  (1876). 

Kent — The  Babylonian,  Persian  and  Greek  Periods 
(1899). 

Ragozin — Media  (Story  of  the  Nations  Series,  1887). 
Ragozin — Chaldsea  (Story  of  the  Nations  Series,  1886). 
Stave — Ueber  den  Einfluss  des  Parsismus  auf  den 
Judenthum. 

Cf.  also  Goodspeed — History  of  Ancient  World; 
Meyer — Ancient  History;  Rawlinson — Ancient  Mon¬ 
archies;  Sayce — Ancient  Empires. 

LESSON  II :  IN  THE  GREEK  PERIOD 
(B.  C.  331-167) 

Alexander  and  the  Ptolemies  (B.  C.  331-198) 

1.  Three  divisions: 

(a)  The  reign  of  Alexander  over  the  Jews  B.  C. 
331-323.  Alexander  was  recognized  B.  C.  336 
as  king  by  the  Congress  at  Corinth.  Reigned 
in  all  twelve  years  and  eight  months. 

(b)  Under  the  Ptolemies,  B.  C.  320-198.  Interval  of 

three  years  after  the  death  of  Alexander  before 
Ptolemy  Soter  conquered  Jerusalem. 

(c)  Under  the  Seleucid  Kings,  B.  C.  198-167.  Seleu- 


56  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


cid  line  from  Seleucus  Nicator.  Seleucid  Era 
began  in  Syria,  B.  C.  312. 

2.  The  Jews  under  Alexander: 

Josephus,  Antiquities,  Book  XI.,  ch.  viii.  Cf.  Dan.  8 
and  1 1 :  2-4. 

3.  The  Jews  under  the  Ptolemies: 

Origin  of  the  Septuagint — Josephus,  Antiquities,  Book 
XII.,  ch.  i.,  1-iii,  2  (skipping  sections  8-10  in  ch.  ii.) 
For  further  study  consult  Wheeler’s  Alexander  the 
Great  and  some  Bible  dictionary  on  the  subject  of  the 
Septuagint  and  Schurer — History,  etc.,  Div.  II.,  Vol. 
III.,  pp.  159-195. 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  ALEXANDER  THE  GREAT 

Arrian — Anabasis  of  Alexander. 

Church — A  Young  Macedonian  in  the  Service  of  Alex¬ 
ander. 

Curteis — Rise  of  the  Macedonian  Empire  (1879). 
Curtius — Life  of  Alexander. 

Droysen — Geschichte  Alexanders  des  Grosses  (1880). 
Droysen— Geschichte  des  Hellenismus.  Second  edition 
(1870). 

Hogarth — -Philip  and  Alexander  (1897). 

Mahaffy-— The  Story  of  Alexander’s  Empire  (1899). 
Mahaffy- — Progress  of  Hellenism  in  Alexander’s  Em¬ 
pire  (1905). 

Mahaffy — Greek  Life  and  Thought  from  Alexander  to 
the  Roman  Conquest  (1887). 

Muller — Scriptores  rerum  Alexandri  Magni  (1877). 
Plutarch — Sketch  of  Alexander  in  his  “Lives.” 
Schreiber— Studien  uber  das  Bildness  des  Grossen  Alex¬ 
anders. 

Wallis-Bridge — Life  and  Exploits  of  Alexander 
(1896). 

Wendland — Die  hellenistisch-Romische  Kultur.  3  Aufl. 
(1912). 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY 


57 


Wheeler — Alexander  the  Great  (1900). 

Williams — Life  of  Alexander  the  Great. 

See  also  Botsford— -History  of  Greece ;  Bury — History 
of  Greece ;  Gulick — Life  of  the  Ancient  Greeks ;  Grote, 
Myers,  etc. 


BOOKS  ON  THE  PTOLEMAIC  ERA 

Bouche-Leclerq— Histoire  des  Lagides.  Four  volumes 
(1903-7). 

Hultsch — Die  ptolemaischen  Miinz-und  Rechnungs- 
wiiste. 

Mahaffy — The  Empire  of  the  Ptolemies  (1895). 
Mahaffy — History  of  Egypt  Under  Ptolemaic  Dynasty 
(1899). 

Meyer — Das  Heerwesen  der  Ptolemaer  und  Romer  in 
Aegypten  (1900). 

Milne— History  of  Egypt  Under  Roman  Rule  (1890). 
Steiner — Der  Fiskus  der  Ptolemaer  (1913). 

Strack — Die  Dynastie  der  Ptolemaer  (1897). 

See  the  various  histories  of  Egypt :  Breasted — History 
of  the  Ancient  Egyptians ;  Petrie — History  of  Egypt,  etc. 


BOOKS  ON  THE  SEPTUAGINT 


Text 

Swete — The  Old  Testament  in  Greek.  Three  volumes. 
Second  edition  (1899). 

The  fuller  Cambridge  edition  of  the  Greek  text  is  now 
appearing. 

Concordance  and  Grammar 
Hatch  and  Redpath  (1896). 

Helbing — Grammatik  der  Septuaginta.  Laut-und  Wort- 
lehre  (1907). 


58  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Thackeray — A  Grammar  of  the  Old  Testament  in 
Greek.  Vol.  I.  (1909). 

Special  Books 

Churton — The  Influence  of  the  Septuagint  upon  the 
Progress  of  Christianity  (1861). 

Deissmann— Bible  Studies  (1901). 

Hatch — Essays  in  Biblical  Greek  (1892). 

Kennedy — Sources  of  New  Testament  Greek  (1895). 
Ottley — Handbook  to  the  Septuagint  (1920). 

Swete — Introduction  to  the  Old  Testament  in  Greek. 
Second  edition  (1914). 

LIST  OF  PTOLEMAIC  KINGS  (EGYPTIAN  CAPITAL  AT 

ALEXANDRIA) 

Ptolemy  Soter,  B.  C.  323-285. 

Ptolemy  Philadelphus,  285-247  (translation  of  the  LXX 
begun). 

Ptolemy  Euergetes  I.,  B.  C.  247-222. 

Ptolemy  Philopator,  B.  C.  222-205. 

Ptolemy  Epiphanes,  B.  C.  205-181. 

Ptolemy  Philometor,  B.  C.  181-146. 

Ptolemy  Euergetes  II.,  B.  C.  170-116  (jointly  with 
Physcon,  or  Ptolemy  Philometor,  till  B.  C.  146). 
Ptolemy  Lathyrus,  B.  C.  116-107. 

Ptolemies  Alexander  and  Cleopatra,  B.  C.  107-80. 
Ptolemy  Auletes,  B.  C.  80-51  (exiled  for  three  years). 
Ptolemies  Dionysius  and  Cleopatra,  B.  C.  51-30. 
(Death  of  Antony  and  Cleopatra.  Under  Roman 
domination.) 

LESSON  III:  IN  THE  GREEK  PERIOD  (Cont.)  : 

SELEUCID  RULE 

1.  The  Jews  under  the  Greek  (Seleucid)  Kings  of  An¬ 
tioch  (B.  C.  198-167) : 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY 


59 


Jos.,  Ant.,  Book  XII.,  ch.  iii.,  3 — ch.  iv.,  5,  10  and  11. 
Important  dates  here :  Antiochus  the  Great  was 
beaten  by  Ptolemy  Philopator  at  Raphia  (near 
Gaza)  in  B.  C.  217.  Antiochus  takes  Jerusalem 
B.  C.  203.  Scopas,  general  of  Ptolemy  Epiphanes, 
got  back  Judea  in  B.  C.  199,  but  Antiochus  the 
Great  defeated  Scopas  at  Panium  in  B.  C.  198,  and 
recovered  Jerusalem  and  Judea,  for  some  time  a 
football  between  Egypt  and  Syria.  One  hundred 
and  twenty-two  years  of  Ptolemaic  rule  are  now 
over.  The  Romans  conquered  Antiochus  the  Great 
in  B.  C.  190,  near  Magnesia  (close  to  Ephesus). 
Downfall  of  Hannibal  came  also.  Antiochus  lost  all 
of  Asia  Minor  west  of  the  Taurus  Mountains.  The 
Romans  thus  gained  a  foothold  in  Asia.  III.  Macca¬ 
bees,  of  uncertain  date,  either  first  century  A.  D.  or 
B.  C.,  is  a  rhetorical  account  of  a  visit  of  Ptolemy 
Philopator  to  Jerusalem  and  of  his  persecution  of 
the  Jews  of  Alexandria.  The  book  has  no  histo¬ 
rical  value,  but  is  worth  looking  at  as  a  story 
simply. 

2.  Wisdom  of  the  Son  of  Sirach  (Ecclesiasticus). 

Read,  besides  Prologue,  especially  chapters  1,  2,  24-26, 

38  and  39,  44-51.  Observe  teachings  as  to  women, 
physicians,  scribes,  immortality,  Messiah  (  ?).  Your 
estimate  of  the  book.  Sayings  that  strike  you. 

3.  Date  of  the  Original  and  of  the  Translation. 

(a)  Original  work  was  after  Simon  the  High  Priest, 
the  Son  of  Onias  (ch.  50:  1).  Two  men  of 
this  title,  both  sons  of  an  Onias  (Simon  I.  and 
Simon  II.).  One  of  them  died  B.  C.  287  and 
the  other  198.  The  newly-discovered  Hebrew 
text  is  fairly  good  Biblical  Hebrew,  reenforc¬ 
ing  argument  for  early  date,  if  a  genuine  orig¬ 
inal  text.  An  enormous  Ecclesiasticus  litera¬ 
ture  has  appeared  since  the  discovery  of  this 
Hebrew  text.  See  list  in  Presbyterian  and  Re- 


60  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


formed  Review  for  July,  1900,  in  article  by 
Robert  Dick  Wilson.  It  was  written  after  one 
of  these  dates  (287  or  198),  and  most  likely  the 
first  one.  How  long  after  the  first  it  was  writ¬ 
ten  is  not  known. 

(b)  Original  work  was  before  the  Maccabean  strug¬ 

gle,  B.  C.  167.  It  does  not  mention  the  Macca¬ 
bees  in  the  list  of  worthies  (chs.  44-50),  and 
stops  with  Simon;  so  between  287  and  167 
B.  C. 

(c)  Translator  into  Greek  says  in  the  Prologue  that 

he  came  to  Egypt  in  the  thirty-eighth  year  of 
Ptolemy  Euergetes.  Here  again  we  are  in 
doubt,  for  two  Ptolemies  had  this  name.  But 
only  the  second  (170-116)  reigned  that  long, 
in  conjunction  with  Philometor.  However,  it 
is  possible  that  the  translator  means  to  say  in 
his  own  thirty-eighth  year  under  (epi)  Euer¬ 
getes.  Either  is  possible.  Still  the  second 
Ptolemy  has  the  best  of  the  argument.  Cf. 
1  Macc.  13:42;  14:27,  for  similar  use  of  epi. 
If  so,  then  he  made  this  trip  132  B.  C.  He 
stayed  there  some  time  and  translated  the  book 
about  B.  C.  130.  But  it  was  originally  written 
in  Hebrew  by  his  grandfather,  Jesus.  Possibly 
the  original  work  was  written  between  B.  C. 
250  and  170.  But,  whether  written  during  the 
Ptolemaic  or  the  Seleucid  period,  it  is  a  picture 
of  Jewish  life  and  doctrine  in  Palestine. 

See  further  Schurer — History,  etc.,  Div.  II.,  Vol.  III., 
pp.  23-32. 


FURTHER  BOOKS  ON  ECCLESIASTICUS 

Cowley  and  Neubauer — -The  Original  Hebrew  of  a 
Portion  of  Ecclesiasticus. 

Genung — The  Hebrew  Literature  of  Wisdom  (1906). 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY 


61 


Hart — Ecclesiasticus  in  Greek  (1909). 

Kent — The  Wise  Men  of  Israel  and  their  Proverbs. 
Oesterley — The  Wisdom  of  Jesus  the  Son  of  Sirach  or 
Ecclesiasticus  (1912). 

Root — The  Profit  of  the  Many. 

Sanders — Messages  of  the  Sages  (1915). 

Schecter  and  Taylor — The  Wisdom  of  Ben-Sira. 

LIST  OF  THE  SELEUCID  KINGS  (SYRIAN  CAPITAL  AT 

ANTIOCH) 

Seleucus  Nicator,  312-280. 

Antiochus  Soter,  280-261. 

Antiochus  Theos,  261-246. 

Seleucus  Callinicus,  246-226. 

Seleucus  Ceraunus,  226-223. 

*  Antiochus  the  Great,  223-187.  Cf.  Hannibal  and  the 
Scipios. 

Seleucus  Philopator,  187-175. 

Antiochus  Epiphanes,  175-164. 

Antiochus  Eupator,  164-162. 

Demetrius  Soter,  162-150. 

Alexander  Balas,  150-145. 

Demetrius  Nicator,  145-138,  first  reign. 

Antiochus  Sidetes  VI.,  138-128,  Tryphon  as  guard¬ 
ian. 

Demetrius  Nicator,  128-125,  second  reign. 

Seleucus  V.  succeeded  to  the  throne,  but  was  murdered 
directly. 

Antiochus  Grypus,  125-113. 

Antiochus  Cyzicenus,  113-95. 

During  111-96  Antiochus  Grypus  wrested  part  of  Syria 
away  from  Cyzicenus. 

Antiochus  Eusebes,  95-83,  throne  not  secure. 

Tigranes,  83-69. 

*  Two  lines  of  descent,  hence  from  Antiochus’s  sons  that  are 
very  confusing. 


62  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Antiochus  Asiaticus,  69-65.  Pompey  then  makes  Syria 
a  Roman  province. 

Cf.  Bevan— The  House  of  Seleucus  (two  volumes, 
1902). 

Bouche-Leclerq — Histoire  des  Seleucidse  (1913). 
Gardner — The  Seleucid  Kings  of  Syria  (1878). 

LIST  OF  JEWISH  HIGH  PRIESTS  DURING  THE  GREEK  PERIOD 
TILL  OFFICE  PASSES  TO  THE  MACCABEES 

Onias  I.,  B.  C.  331-299. 

Simon  I.,  the  Just,  B.  C.  299-287.  Time  of  the  so- 
called  Great  Synagogue. 

Eleazar,  B.  C.  287-266.  (Reputed  translation  of  the 
LXX.  begun.) 

Manasseh,  B.  C.  266-240. 

Onias  II.,  B.  C.  240-227. 

Simon  II.,  B.  C.  226-198. 

Onias  III.,  B.  C.  198-175. 

Jason,  B.  C.  175-172. 

Menelaus,  B.  C.  172-162. 

Alcimus,  B.  C.  162-160. 

Vacant  for  seven  years,  till  153,  when  Jonathan  Macca- 
bseus  was  made  High  Priest  by  Alexander  Balas. 

See  further  on  Jewish  priesthood  and  temple  worship, 
Schurer — History,  etc.,  Div.  II.,  Vol.  I.,  pp.  207-305. 


LESSON  IV:  FIRST  LESSON  IN  THE 
MACCABEAN  PERIOD 

(Beginning  of  the  Maccabean  Revolt,  B.  C.  167-166) 

I.  Macc.,  chs.  i.,  ii. ;  II.  Macc.  chs.  iv.-vii. ;  Josephus, 
Ant.,  Book  XII.,  ch.  v.,  5.  Cf .  Dan.  viii.,  20-26 ;  and  ch. 
xi.  The  first  part  of  the  lesson  is  really  in  the  Seleucid 
era,  but  is  preparatory  to  the  uprising.  Four  lessons  on 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY 


63 


this  Period.  Josephus  and  the  two  Maccabean  books  here 
overlap  and  supplement  each  other.  Group  the  events 
around  the  following  outline.  There  were  undoubtedly 
four  expeditions  of  Antiochus  Epiphanes  against  Egypt, 
though  it  is  difficult  to  divide  accurately  the  accounts  in 
Josephus  and  I.  and  II.  Macc.  But  a  working  hypothesis 
is  presented  in  the  Outline. 

1.  Antiochus  Epiphanes  and  his  efforts  to  Hellenize  the 

Jews.  Maneuvers  of  Jason  and  Menelaus.  B.  C. 
175-172.  I.  Macc.  i.,  1-15;  II.  Macc.  iv. 

2.  Antiochus  going  against  Egypt  and  defeating  the 

Egyptians  at  Pelusium.  B.  C.  171.  I.  Macc.  i.,  16- 
18. 

3.  In  B.  C.  170  he  makes  a  second  expedition  against 

Egypt.  Outcome  and  why.  Effect  on  Jerusalem. 
I.  Macc.  i.,  19-28;  II.  Macc.  v.,  1-23.  II.  Macc.  con¬ 
fuses  to  some  extent  the  events  of  the  second  and 
fourth  expeditions. 

4.  In  B.  C.  169  Antiochus  makes  a  third  expedition 

against  Egypt.  Reason  for  failure.  Cf.  Livy  xiv., 
11 ;  Polybius  xxix.,  10  and  11.  The  Jews  in  Alex¬ 
andria  forced  Antiochus  Epiphanes  to  retire  from 
Alexandria.  They  had  heard  of  his  conduct  at  Jeru¬ 
salem  the  year  before  and  were  ready  to  help  drive 
him  away  from  Alexandria. 

5.  In  B.  C.  168  he  makes  his  fourth  expedition  against 

Egypt.  Reason  for  failure,  and  his  subsequent  con¬ 
duct  towards  Jerusalem.  I.  Macc.  i.,  29-64;  II. 
Macc.  v.,  24-26;  Dan.  viii.,  20-26,  and  ix.,  27;  xi., 
21-45  ;  cf .  Livy  xlv.,  12. 

6.  Mission  of  Athenseus  to  Jerusalem  to  carry  out  the 

decree  of  Antiochus,  and  the  way  he  was  received. 
Eleazar,  the  mother  and  her  seven  sons.  II.  Macc. 
vi.  and  vii. 

7.  Behavior  of  the  Samaritans  in  this  crisis.  Jos.,  Ant., 

Book  XII.,  ch.  v.,  5. 


HOUSE  OF  HASMONEANS  (MACCABEES) 


64  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


xU 

aM 

H 

'  X 

X 
O 


to 

M- 


u 
it q 

_  N 

^  CO 

W  vo 

rH 

w 


X 

o 

• 

X 

X 

X 

g 

o 

X 

to  ~ 

-s- 

- X 

X 

►H 

a 

w 

in 

o 

1—1 

u 

w 

K 

vo 

r*H 

1 

E/1 

< 

1-H 

a 

H 

-X- 

H 

H 

X 

§ 


u 

M 

Y“H 

VO 


in  • 
•<"d 
Q  _ 
^  w 

^  3 
« 

aJ 

u 

o 

aJ 


o« 

Svn' 

to 


>t 

s 

w 

o 

H 

Ph 


x 

w 

H 

a 

o 

U 

< 

Q 


am 

.  H 
■*£  ir> 
H  ro 


C/2 


•U 

X  . 
X  rq 

x 

-Wvo 
O  f-1 


m 

gu 
<;  • 
-upq- 

X 

K2 


a 

o 


U 

2*ri 

_|lO 
►3  to 
P — »i — i 


X 

-o 

C/2 


.  X 
o 
c/2 


w 

S 

o  . 

O' 

o  • 
X'O 
< 

X 

w 

>4 

<J 


c/i 

P> 

»3 

a,  5 

X'-' 

<  • 

•-»w 

N — ✓ 

oo 

x 

w 

q„4 

z^ 

X 

X 

w 

hJ 

< 


WU 

3  PQ 
a 

"  M  OV 
O  M- 
H 

M  rr4 

►H  “ 

< 


to  . 

PO 
X  . 
ocq 

£« 

<<rd 


X  CQ 

"g«o 

h° 

z 

<',d 


«  . 
3° 

-  *o 

K^ 

x'0 

a 

o 


X rj 
Q 

Z  W 
X 

-  X  ON 
W 

►4  . 

<-73 


gpq 

■  x 


oo 

CM 


X 
w 

t4 


H 

X 

(4 

X 

O 

w 

a 

H  . 
_x« 

w 

ffiOv 

CM 


W 

X 

§ 

X 

t-H 

X 

X 


X,  >• 

wU 

g  • 

Xn 
X 


m 

3u 

Sb 

_  o 

H 

w 

»=-*  • 
XT3 

C 


X 

X 

lo 

S« 

►4 

to 


u 

J?  . 

3« 

-  ^  *o 

l-t 

P$ 

< 


X  W 

geo 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY 


65 


8.  Behavior  of  Mattathias  and  his  five  sons,  and  the 
cleavage  between  the  Asideans  and  the  Apostates. 
B.  C.  167  and  166.  I.  Macc.  ii. ;  II.  Macc.  v.,  27. 
For  further  discussion  see  Schurer — History  of  Jew¬ 
ish  People,  Div.  I.,  Vol.  I.,  pp.  169-218;  Div.  II.,  Vol.  I., 
pp.  1-56. 


BOOKS  ON  MACCABEAN  PERIOD 

Bost — L’epoque  des  Machabees  (1862). 

Curtiss — The  Name  Maccabee  (1876). 

De  Saulcy — Histoire  des  Machabees,  ou  princes  de  la 
dynastie  asmoneenne  ( 1880) . 

Fairweather — The  Maccabees  (1903). 

Henderson — The  Age  of  the  Maccabees  (1907). 

Jost — History  of  the  Jew  from  the  Maccabees  to  th° 
Present  Day  (1848). 

Niese — Die  beiden  Makkabaer-bucher  (1901). 

Riggs— -The  Maccabean  and  Roman  Periods  (1900). 
Rossmann — Die  Makkabaische  Erhebung  (1860). 
Streane — The  Age  of  the  Maccabees  (1898). 

From  this  point  throughout  till  the  close  of  the  first 
century  A.  D.,  Schurer’s  five  volumes  on  the  History  of 
the  Jewish  People  in  the  Time  of  Jesus  Christ  can  be 
consulted  with  great  profit  for  the  history,  ideas  and  cus¬ 
toms  of  the  Jews.  See  also  the  various  books  on  Jewish 
history  and  the  handbooks  on  the  Interbiblical  Period. 


LESSON  V:  SECOND  LESSON  ON  THE 
MACCABEAN  PERIOD 

(Judas  Maccabseus  B.  C.  166-161) 

I.  Macc.  iii.,  1 — ix.,  22.  Same  subject  treated  in  II. 
Macc.  viii.-xv.,  and  Jos.,  Ant.,  Bk.  XII.,  chs.  vii.-xi.,  to 
which  reference  can  be  made  if  desired. 


66  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


SEVEN  CHIEF  CAMPAIGNS  BY  JUDAS 

1.  Against  Apollonius.  I.  Macc.  iii.,  10-12,  verses  1-9 

opening  eulogy  on  Judas.  Place  of  battle  not  known. 
B.  C.  166. 

2.  Against  Seron.  I.  Macc.  iii.,  13-37.  Battle  of  Beth- 

horon.  B.  C.  166. 

3.  Against  the  three  generals  of  Lysias,  viz.,  Ptolemy, 

Nicanor  and  Gorgias.  I.  Macc.  iii.,  38 — iv.,  25. 
Battle  of  Emmaus.  B.  C.  165. 

4.  Against  Lysias  himself.  I.  Macc.  iv.,  26-61.  Battle 

of  Bethsura.  B.  C.  164. 

5.  Against  neighboring  enemies,  viz.,  Idumeans,  Am¬ 

monites,  Galileans,  Gileadites  (numerous  battles, 
Bosor,  Raphon,  Carnain,  Ephron,  etc.),  Idumeans 
again,  Philistines,  the  tower  in  Jerusalem.  I.  Macc. 
v.,  1 — vi.,  27.  B.  C.  163.  Merely  glance  at  head¬ 
ings  in  this  section. 

6.  Against  the  young  King  Antiochus.  Defeat  of  Judas 

at  Bsethzacharias  (near  Bethsura).  I.  Macc.  vi., 
28— vii,  4.  B.  C.  162. 

7.  Against  Demetrius’  generals,  viz.,  Bacchides,  Nicanor 

and  Bacchides  again.  Battles  of  Capharsalama, 
Adora  (Bethhoron),  and  Eleasa  (near  Ashdod). 
Intrigues  of  Alcimus,  the  High  Priest.  Judas’  ap¬ 
peal  to  the  Romans.  His  death.  B.  C.  161.  I. 
Macc.  vii.,  5— ix.,  22. 

See  further  Schurer— History,  etc.,  Div.  I.,  Vol.  I., 
pp.  219-233. 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  JUDAS  MACCABEUS 

Conder— Judas  Maccabseus  and  the  Jewish  War  of  In¬ 
dependence  (1894). 

Church — Judas,  the  Hammer,  A  romance. 

Curtiss — The  Name  Maccabee  (1877). 

Longfellow — Judas  Maccabseus. 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY  67 

Ludlow — Deborah — A  Tale  of  the  Times  of  Judas  Mac¬ 
cabseus  (1900). 

Weiss — Judas  Maccabseus. 

LESSON  VI:  THIRD  LESSON  ON  THE 
MACCABEAN  PERIOD 

(Jonathan  Maccabseus,  Simon  Maccabseus,  and  John 
Hyrcanus,  B.  C.  161-106) 

1.  Jonathan  Maccabseus,  B.  C.  161-143.  I.  Macc.  ix., 

23 — xii.,  53. 

(a)  Jonathan  succeeding  to  the  rule  and  struggle  with 

Bacchides.  I.  Macc.  ix.,  23-57. 

(b)  Apostate  Hellenizers  appeal  to  Bacchides,  and  the 

truce  with  Jonathan.  I.  Macc.  ix.,  58-73. 

(c)  Overtures  to  Jonathan  by  contesting  Syrian 

Kings,  Alexander  Balas  and  Demetrius  Soter, 
and  his  policy.  Made  High  Priest.  I.  Macc. 
x.,  1-47. 

(d)  Jonathan  keeping  on  good  terms  with  Alexander 

and  then  with  young  Demetrius  Nicator,  know¬ 
ing  whose  side  to  take,  like  a  politician. 
Merely  note  this  point  in  I.  Macc.  x.,  48 — xi., 
37  without  careful  reading. 

(e)  Jonathan  again  changing  sides  from  Demetrius 

to  young  Antiochus,  useful  to  both,  and  why 
Tryphon  seizes  Jonathan.  Merely  note  this 
fact  in  I.  Macc.  xi.,  38 — xii.,  53  without  care¬ 
ful  reading. 

2.  Simon  Maccabseus,  B.  C.  143-135.  I.  Macc.,  chs.  xiii.- 

xvi. 

(a)  Simon’s  effort  to  rescue  Jonathan.  I.  Macc.  xiii., 

1-32. 

(b)  Simon  taking  sides  with  Demetrius,  and  peace  at 

last.  B.  C.  142.  Year  1  of  Jewish  Independ¬ 
ence.  I.  Macc.  xiii.,  33-42. 


68  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


(c)  Simon  at  last  takes  the  tower  in  Jerusalem.  I. 

Macc.  xiii.,  43-53. 

(d)  Demetrius’  eastern  campaign  and  rising  of  Anti- 

ochus  VI  against  him,  and  Antiochus’  insult 
to  Simon’s  offer  to  help.  Only  note  this  fact 
in  I.  Macc.  xiv.,  1 — xvi.,  10. 

(e)  Ignoble  death  of  Simon.  I.  Macc.  xvi.,  11-22. 

3.  John  Hyrcanus  (John  Hyrcanus  I.),  B.  C.  135-106. 

Jos.,  Ant.,  Book  XIII.,  chs.  viii.-x.  Chief  points : 

(a)  Ousting  Ptolemy  from  Dagon,  near  Jericho.  Jos. 

•  •  •  -f 

Vlll.,  1. 

(b)  Hyrcanus  besieged  in  Jerusalem  and  outcome. 

Jos.  viii.,  2  and  3. 

(c)  Conduct  of  Hyrcanus  in  Jerusalem  and  towards 

the  Parthians.  Jos.  viii.,  4. 

(d)  Hyrcanus  attacking  Samaritans  (destroying  their 

temple)  and  Idumeans.  Jos.  ix.,  1  and  2. 

(e)  Taking  advantage  of  Syrian  troubles,  and  Jews 

growing  rich.  Merely  note  this  fact  in  Jos.  ix., 
3 — x.,  4. 

(f)  Hyrcanus  deserting  the  Pharisees  for  the  Sad- 

ducees.  Jos.  x.,  5-7. 

Cf.  Werner- — Johann  Hyrkan  (1877),  and  see  further 
Schurer — History,  etc.,  Div.  I.,  Vol.  I.,  pp.  234-290. 

LESSON  VII:  FOURTH  LESSON  ON  THE 
MACCABEAN  PERIOD 

(Decline  of  the  Maccabean  Dynasty  and  Beginning  of 
Roman  Period,  B.  C.  106-47) 

Jos.,  Ant.,  Book  XIII.,  ch.  xi.,  1— Book  XIV.,  ch. 
viii.,  5. 

1.  John  Hyrcanus’  two  sons  (Aristobulus  and  Alexander 
lannseus)  and  their  wife  (Salome  Alexandra).  B. 
C.  106-69. 

(a)  Aristobulus’  brief  and  revolutionary  reign  (calls 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY  69 

himself  King),  B.  C.  106.  Jos.,  Book  XIII., 
ch.  xi. 

(b)  Alexander  Jannaeus  succeeds  to  rule  and  wife  of 

his  brother,  and  extends  rule  widely.  Dealing 
with  Pharisees  and  general  character.  B.  C. 
105-78.  Merely  note  these  facts  in  Jos.,  Book 

XIII. ,  chs.  xii.-xv. 

(c)  Reign  of  Salome  Alexandra  and  her  alliance  with 

the  Pharisees,  B.  C.  78-69.  Merely  note  this 
fact  in  Josephus,  Book  XIII.,  ch.  xvi. 

2.  Alexander  Jannaeus’  two  sons,  Hyrcanus  (John  Hyr- 

canus  II.)  and  Aristobulus  (Aristobulus  II.)  B. 
C.  69-63. 

.(a)  Character  of  the  two  sons  and  their  compromise. 
Jos.,  Book  XIII.,  ch.  xvi.,  1-2;  Book  XIV., 
ch.  i.,  1-2. 

'(b)  Antipater  on  the  scene,  and  his  schemes.  Jos., 
Book  XIV.,  ch.  i.,  3 — ch.  ii.,  2. 

(c)  Pompey  steps  in  and  captures  Jerusalem  and  set¬ 
tles  things.  Josephus,  Book  XIV.,  ch.  ii.,  3 — 
ch.  iv.,  5. 

3.  Under  the  Romans.  What  Gabinius,  Crassus  and 

Caesar  did  to  the  Jews,  B.  C.  63-47.  The  First  Tri¬ 
umvirate  (Pompey,  Caesar,  Crassus). 

(a)  Gabinius  making  a  sort  of  aristocratic  rule  for 

the  Jews,  and  Antipater  watching  his  chances, 
B.  C.  57.  Merely  note  this  fact  in  Jos.,  Book 

XIV. ,  chs.  v.  and  vi. 

(b)  Crassus  plundering  Jerusalem,  B.  C.  54.  Tos., 

Book  XIV.,  ch.  vii. 

(c)  Caesar  siding  against  Hyrcanus,  and  Antipater, 

gaining  Caesar’s  favor  in  Egypt,  saves  the  day 
for  Hyrcanus.  Antipater  given  office  under 
Hyrcanus,  sort  of  Prime  Minister  (Procura¬ 
tor),  who  was  called  Ethnarch  as  well  as  High 
Priest,  B.  C.  47.  Battle  of  Pharsalia,  B.  C.  48. 
Jos.,  Book  XIV.,  ch.  viii. 


70  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


See  further,  Schurer — History,  etc.,  Div.  I.,  Vol.  I., 
pp.  291-382. 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  ROMAN  PERIOD 

Arnold — History  of  the  Later  Roman  Commonwealth. 

New  edition  (1906). 

Botsford — History  of  Rome. 

Bury — -Student’s  Roman  Empire. 

Capes — The  Early  Empire  (1877). 

Champagny — Rome  et  la  Judee.  2  vols.  (1862). 
Ferrero — Greatness  and  Decline  of  Rome.  Five  volumes 
(1907). 

Ferrero — Characters  and  Events  of  Roman  History 
(1908). 

Ferrero — The  Women  of  the  Caesars. 

Firth — Augustus  Caesar  (1903). 

Fowler — Julius  Caesar. 

Gardthausen — Augustus  und  seine  Zeit  (1904). 

Jones — The  Story  of  the  Roman  Empire  (1908). 

Long — Decline  of  the  Roman  Republic  (1874). 
Mahaffy — The  Greek  World  Under  Roman  Sway. 
Merivale — The  Fall  of  the  Roman  Republic  (1853). 
Merivale — The  Roman  Triumvirates  (1878). 

Milne — The  History  of  Egypt  Under  Roman  Rule 
(1898). 

Morrison — The  Jews  Under  Roman  Rule  (1890). 
Ottley — Short  History  of  the  Hebrews  in  the  Roman 
Period  (1900). 

Scott — Portraitures  of  Julius  Caesar  (1903). 

SCHNECKENBURGER - Augustus  (  1903  )  . 

Seech — Kaiser  Augustus  (1902). 

LESSON  VIII :  IN  THE  ROMAN  PERIOD 

Three  lessons  on  Herod ;  born  B.  C.  74  and  died  B.  C.  4. 
Son  of  Antipater,  the  Idumean.  First  lesson,  The  Early 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY  71 

Years  of  Herod,  B.  C.  47-37.  Jos.,  Ant.,  Bk.  XIV.,  chs. 
ix.,  xi., — xvi.  (skipping  x.). 

1.  Herod  as  governor  of  Galilee.  Jos.  XIV.,  ix. 

2.  Antipater  helping  Caesar,  whose  death  (B.  C.  44)  puts 

Herod  on  Cassius’  side  against  the  Second  Trium¬ 
virate  (Octavius,  Antonius,  Lepidus).  Merely  note 
this  fact  in  Jos.  XIV.,  xi. 

3.  Herod  driving  out  Antigonus  and  betrothing  Mari- 

amne.  Jos.  XIV.,  xii.,  1. 

4.  After  battle  of  Philippi  (B.  C.  42)  Antony  gets  the 

East,  whereupon  Herod  gets  his  favor  and  takes 
the  rule  away  from  Hyrcanus.  Herod  Tetrarch 
and  Judea  now  a  Roman  Province.  B.  C.  41.  Jos. 
XIV.,  xii.,  2  and  xiii.,  1  and  2. 

5.  Parthians  come  and  establish  Antigonus,  and  Herod’s 

flight.  Jos.  XIV.,  xiii.,  3-10. 

6.  Herod’s  effort  to  regain  his  rule  and  surprising  success 

in  Rome.  Even  appointed  King  in  B.  C.  40.  Jos. 
XIV.,  xiv. 

7.  Winning  his  crown  by  B.  C.  37.  Merely  note  this  fact 

in  Jos.  XIV.,  xv.  and  xvi.  Final  downfall  of  the 
Hasmonean  House. 

Look  over  the  Book  of  Wisdom  of  Solomon  as  prepara¬ 
tion  for  lectures  on  Jewish  Alexandrian  Philosophy. 

See  further  on  Herod,  Schurer — History,  etc.,  Div.  I., 
Vol.  I.,  pp.  383-399. 


SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  HEROD 

Amelie  Rives — Herod  and  Mariamne  (Lippincott,  Sept., 
1888). 

Farrar — The  Herods  (1900). 

Ferguson — The  Family  of  the  Herods  (1902). 

Stephen  Phillips — Herod  (1900). 

Vickers — The  History  of  Herod  (1885). 


72  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


JEWISH  LITERATURE  OF  THE  INTERBIBLICAL  AND  NEW 

TESTAMENT  TIMES 

(Outside  of  the  New  Testament) 

Two  centuries  of  literary  activity,  Jerusalem  and  Alex¬ 
andria.  In  two  languages,  Hebrew  (or  Aramaic)  and 
Greek.  Some  has  doubtless  perished,  much  that  remains 
is  insipid,  marking  a  distinct  decline  from  the  great 
prophetical  times  closing  with  Malachi. 

See  chart  for  probable  or  possible  dates  of  these  books, 
a  very  uncertain  matter  in  most  cases. 

1.  Histories:  I.,  II.  and  III.  Maccabees  belong  to  this 

time.  I.  Macc.  is  a  noble  book.  II.  and  III.  Macc. 
are  florid  and  fanciful.  Josephus  comes  at  the  close 
of  the  New  Testament  times. 

2.  Romances:  Tobit  and  Judith. 

Apocryphal  additions  to  the  Old  Testament:  To 
Esther  in  the  Septuagint,  not  in  Hebrew.  To 
Daniel  there  are  added  in  the  Septuagint  the  Prayer 
of  Azarias  and  the  Song  of  the  Three  Children, 
Susannah,  Bel  and  the  Dragon.  The  Septuagint 
gives  the  Prayer  of  Manassas  and  the  Epistle  of 
Jeremias  as  genuine  works,  but  both  are  doubtless 
spurious.  I.  Esdras,  though  used  by  Josephus  as 
a  genuine  work,  cannot  be  so  maintained.  It  is  a 
reworking  of  Ezra  and  II.  Chron.  before  the  time 
of  Christ. 

3.  Philosophical  works :  Wisdom  of  the  son  of  Sirach, 

Aristobulus,  Wisdom  of  Solomon,  IV.  Maccabees, 
Philo. 

4.  Apocalyptic  writings :  Book  of  Enoch  (parts  of,  cer¬ 

tainly),  Book  of  the  Secrets  of  Enoch,  Sybilline 
Oracles,  Apocalypse  of  Baruch,  Assumption  of 
Moses,  Ascension  of  Isaiah,  Psalter  of  Solomon, 
Book  of  Jubilees,  II.  Esdras,  Testament  of  the 
Twelve  Patriarchs  (parts  of,  certainly).  These  last 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY 


73 


and  some  of  the  others  are  called  pseudepigraphic 
works,  written  under  the  name  of  some  worthy  of 
older  times. 

See  previous  bibliography  for  the  Old  Testament 
Apocrypha  and  Pseudepigrapha.  In  particular,  for 
Palestinian  Jewish  Literature  see  Schurer — History, 
etc.,  Div.  II.,  Vol.  III.,  pp.  1-155,  and  for  Grseco-Jewish 
Literature  pp.  157-320. 


LESSON  IX:  IN  THE  ROMAN  PERIOD 

( Continued ) 

Second  lesson,  Herod’s  Prosperous  Reign  B.  C.  37- 
19.  Jos.,  Ant.,  Book  XV. 

1.  Herod’s  dealing  with  the  Sanhedrin.  Ch.  i. 

2.  Fate  of  Antigonus  and  Hyrcanus.  Ch.  i.,  2 — ii.,  4. 

3.  Herod  and  his  mother-in-law,  Alexandra,  struggle 

against  each  other  for  the  favor  of  Cleopatra  and 
Antony.  Death  of  Mariamne’s  brother,  Aristobulus. 
Plots  and  counterplots.  Joseph’s  charge  and  jeal¬ 
ousies  and  hatred  (Salome  and  Cyprus,  Alexandra 
and  Mariamne).  Merely  sketch  ch.  ii.,  5 — iii.,  9. 

4.  Cleopatra’s  influence  over  Antony  and  Herod.  Merely 

note  this  point  in  ch.  iv. 

5.  Issue  between  Antony  and  Octavius,  and  battle  of 

Actium,  B.  C.  31 ;  Herod  not  allowed  to  help  An¬ 
tony.  Merely  note  this  point  in  ch.  v. 

6.  Winning  Octavius’  favor  and  losing  Mariamne’s  love. 

Death  of  Hyrcanus,  Mariamne,  Alexandra  and  sons 
of  Baba.  Merely  sketch  chs.  vi.  and  vii. 

7.  Herod  as  a  builder  of  cities,  and  theaters  even  in  Jeru¬ 

salem.  Trophies  to  Augustus  (cf.  Antiochus 
Epiphanes).  The  Hellenizing  influence  of  Herod. 
Simply  note  this  point  in  chs.  viii.  and  ix. 

8.  Herod  educating  his  sons  by  Mariamne  (Alexander 

and  Aristobulus)  in  Rome.  Currying  favor  of 


HERODIAN  FAMILY  (Only  through  N.  T.  Times) 

Antipas. 


74  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


03 

& 

Pi 

Ph 

u 


a 

w 

H 

< 

Cl, 

k-H 

H 

& 

< 


u 

m 

rt- 

ro 


*0 

O 

<U 


.U.2 

a  .  u 
pmM  3 
w  3 

C/2  00 

*5  S' 

C/3 

O 


jU 
w  . 
<  03 

03  ^ 


M 


03,  i 

<U 
«  . 
O  03 
«  M 

“S- 

PH-d 


w 

S 

o 

-  G 

c 

C/2 


oi 

u 

> 


03 

15 


G 

G 

4-k 

ll 

O 

a 

S 


02 

O 

5 

02 

> 

•  H 

P 


;B 

43 


CM 


u 


rj-r5 

^  G 
•  £ 
°2 
m3 
•  I  °- 
$Ji 

W  ■*-“ 
Pi  <4_, 

O  o 

w  h 
w  u 

H  <u 

T3 
Q  Vh 

2  3 

W 


03 

U 

nd 

<L> 

*£3 

Ph  . 

c n 

~  <D 

in  <j 

03  <D 

13  ^ 

Ph  o 

CL>  £ 

U  +-» 

a; 


<  3 

-  eu  g 
H  <y 

o 


3  co 

^  -2 

O  aJ-5 

•  rt  42  G 

PM  u  M  J 

“3H  GM 

»-H  k  -4->  . 

hj  ^  w 
Ph  °’G)  • 

a 


C3 


aJ 

<L> 

H 


tj- 

co 


•  S3 
W  a3 
CJ  -M 

<  *s 

W  rt- 
H  g 

a} 


< 


o 

^  Jh 
QJ 


m 


S3 

o 

»! 

aco 

Sm-, 

-  <  o 

M  - 

<  £ 

bo 

G 

G 

P 


<M 


>+-i 

.  O 

Ph 

J  p,  , 

2  CP  02 
K^O  03  •• 
CU  03l~2O 

r  °2i| 
“  S  GP  u  •£ 

2  -i-> .  2  G 

S  SSffig 
ffip 


tfi 

G  . 
-§«* 
h-i 


03  • 

S  m  .  -M 
gj  '.-Pi  t“<  ■*-"> 

Ph  O  ••  9- 

Vh'O^ 
03  ■‘G  12  W 

G  J3  2 

G  V  ^  - 

"2'H’GhG 
rt  3  c  ° 
PO  _g  P3K 

2  1,3 

«  M-H  3 

W  °G 

WjOhhH^  W 

|g  ^ 

es^G 

4H  D|_]H 

an  C/2  ^ 

H  w 

rt 

_r  <u 

<u  £ 

.'G  a 
«  Ga^j 

G  •“'H  pq 

5  1+4  T3  '  " 
w  0 

”  G  ^  G  4_) 
u  o 

b 

<  S 

-G 


03  G 

5^ 


,  £ 
W.G 
c/2 


u 

M 

02  P 

CM  a; 
<D 

T3*9 

I  s 

-W  9' 

< 

HH 

Pi 

< 


Pi  r  ; 

w  U 
o 

-§PH 

s> 

G  . 
•etJ-O 


; 


. 

1)  G 

u 

>  m 

<g.2 

# 

M 

m3 

in 

h-( 

0 

42  (jJ 

G5 

« 

O 

t*H 

4-> 

0 

P 

■5 

4) 

hG 

H 

_5« 

CM 

‘-M  T*‘ 

G  . 

<*'<3 


«5^ 

C^* 

w  •  • ' 

Q  20 
'  O 
PiM 
W  u 


w 

a 

-  o 

G 

< 

w 


02 
G 
J 
G 
pq 
O 
-  H 

03 

HH 

PP 

< 


<u 

£ 

cd 


<-:  o 
9°  lh 

hh  :  <L> 

_  O  u 
■*£  tj‘>2* 
9  ’2- 

«^,H 

w 


.2 

o 

rt 

G 

£CJ 

-«  O 

w  0 

W  bo 

G 


ffi 


CM 

r— t 

C/5 

•*-> 

O 

< 


w 

a 

■  < 
HH 

Pi 

< 


W' 

z> 

w 

Pi 

p 


X 


M 


G 

[S  ^ 

PM  CM 

-»a 

< 

G  “ 
tn  01 
02  <* 
G 
Pi 

P 


CO 
U  •• 

hh  irj 

-£<M 

w  i2 
Mo 
< 


<n 

fc1-* 

P< 

t~t  •• 

tf 

O  CM 
■<  03 

O  o 

s< 

w 

w 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY  75 

Augustus  and  next  to  Agrippa.  Temple  at  Panium. 
Merely  sketch  ch.  x. 

9.  Herod  repairing  the  temple  at  Jerusalem.  Begun  B. 
C.  19  and  finished  A.  D.  65.  Ch.  xi.  Begun  in  18th 
year  of  Herod’s  reign.  Herod  began  to  reign  B.  C. 
37.  Jos.  correct  here  and  wrong  in  War  I.,  xxi.,  1, 
when  he  says  it  was  begun  in  15th  year  of  reign. 
Schurer  points  out  that  it  was  in  same  year  as  the 
visit  of  the  Emperor  to  Syria,  which  was  B.  C.  20 
or  19,  according  to  Dion  Cassius,  liv.,  7.  Herod  has 
been  reigning  seventeen  years  when  this  visit  was 
made  by  Caesar.  (Jos.,  Ant.,  XV.,  x.,  3.)  See  note 
in  Robertson’s  Harmony  of  the  Gospels  (p.  265). 
Look  over  IV.  Maccabees  as  preparation  for  lecture  on 
Jewish  Alexandrian  Philosophy. 

See  further  on  Herod,  Schurer — History,  etc.,  Div.  I.f 
Vol.  I.,  pp.  392-439. 

On  IV.  Maccabees  see  further,  Schurer — History,  etc., 
Div.  II.,  Vol.  III.,  pp.  244-8. 

See  also  Cross — Socrates :  The  Man  and  His  Message 
(1918). 

Davidson — The  Stoic  Creed  (1907). 

Forbes — Socrates  (1905). 

Hyde — From  Epicurus  to  Christ  (1906). 

Leonard — Socrates:  Master  of  Life  (1916). 

Murray — The  Stoic  Philosophy  (1915). 


LESSON  X:  IN  THE  ROMAN  PERIOD 

( Continued ) 

Third  lesson,  Herod’s  Decline  and  Death.  B.  C. 
19-4.  Jos.,  Ant.,  Book  XVI.  and  Book  XVII.,  i. — viii. 
Broadus’  Comm,  on  Matt.,  ii.,  1. 

1.  Herod’s  law  against  housebreakers.  XVI.,  i.,  1. 

2.  Troubles  with  Mariamne’s  sons,  and  Salome  and 

Antipater.  XVI.,  i.,  2  and  iii.  and  iv. 


76  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


3.  Herod  having  trouble  with  the  Jews.  XVI.,  v.  and 

vii.,  1. 

4.  Fresh  domestic  troubles  stirred  up  by  the  women 

and  Antipater  and  Pheroras.  Merely  sketch  XVI., 
vii.  and  viii. 

5.  Herod  Getting  into  Trouble  at  Rome.  Merely 

see  this  point  in  XVI.,  ix.  and  x. 

6.  The  Trial  of  Herod’s  sons,  Alexander  and  Aris- 

tobulus.  XVI.,  xi. 

7.  Antipater’s  ambitious  schemes  and  their  outcome. 

Merely  see  this  point  in  XVII.,  i.-v. 

8.  Herod  now  makes  Antipas  his  successor  and  tries  to 

regain  his  health  amid  many  troubles.  Death  of 
Antipater.  XVII.,  vi.  and  vii. 

9.  Herod  alters  his  will  again,  and  finally  dies  in  B.  C. 

4.  Funeral.  XVII.,  viii. 

10.  General  character  of  Herod.  See  Broadus’  Comm, 
on  Matt.,  ii.,  1. 

For  literature  on  Philo,  see  previous  list  of  books.  In 
particular  note  Schurer — History,  etc.,  Div.  II.,  Vol. 
III.,  pp.  321-381. 

For  closing  years  of  Herod,  see  further  Schurer— 
History,  etc.,  Div.  I.,  Vol.  I.,  pp.  440-467. 

Lecture  on  Philo,  concluding  the  course  on  Jewish 
Alexandrian  Philosophy. 

LESSON  XI:  THE  JEWISH  PARTIES 

PHARISEES,  SADDUCEES,  SCRIBES,  ESSENES,  HERODIANS, 

ZEALOTS 

1.  Pharisees  and  Sadducees — See  Broadus  on  Matt.,  iii., 

7. 

2.  Essenes — Broadus  on  Matt.,  p.  46a. 

3.  Mishna,  the  two  Gemaras,  the  two  Talmuds — Broadus 

on  Matt.,  p.  45a,  and  footnote. 

4.  Scribes — Broadus  on  Matt.,  ii.,  4. 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY 


77 


5.  Sanhedrin — Broadus  on  Matt.,  xxvi.,  59. 

6.  Herodians — Broadus  on  Matt.,  p.  451. 

7.  Zealots — Broadus  on  Matt.,  p.  31a  and  page  217a. 

In  each  case  read  the  portions  of  Josephus  referred  to 
in  the  Commentary.  Lecture  on  Talmud  or  Jewish  Rab¬ 
binical  Theology. 

See  further  on  Pharisees  and  Sadducees,  Robertson, 
Pharisees  and  Jesus,  ch.  i. ;  Schurer — History,  etc., 
Div.  II.,  Vol.  II.,  pp.  10-43 ;  on  the  Essenes,  see  Schurer 
— History,  etc.,  Div.  II.,  Vol.  II.,  pp.  188-218;  on  the 
Mishna,  Gemara,  Talmud,  Midrash,  see  Schurer — His¬ 
tory,  etc.,  Div.  I.,  Vol.  I.,  pp.  117-166;  on  the  scribes, 
scribism,  school  and  synagogue,  life  under  law,  see 
Schurer — History,  etc.,  Div.  II.,  Vol.  I.,  pp.  306-379, 
Div.  II.,  Vol.  II.,  pp.  44-125 ;  on  the  Sanhedrin,  see 
Schurer — History,  etc.,  Div.  II.,  Vol.  I.,  pp.  163-195 ; 
on  the  Zealots,  see  Schurer — History,  etc.,  Div.  II., 
Vol.  II.,  pp.  80f. 


SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  JEWISH  PARTIES 

(See  previous  list  on  Talmud  and  Targums,  and  the 
histories,  periodicals,  cyclopaedias  and  dictionaries.) 
Abrahams — Studies  in  Pharisaism  and  the  Gospels 
(1917). 

Baker — Christ  and  the  Pharisees  (1919). 

Bamberger — Sadducaer  (1917). 

Bischoff — Jesus  und  die  Rabbinen  (1905). 

Cohen — Les  Phariseens.  2  vols.  (1877.) 

Davaine — La  Sadducaisme  (1888). 

Delitzsch — Hillel  und  Jesus  (1867). 

Elbogen — Die  Religionanschauungen  der  Pharisaer 
(1904). 

Friedlander — Rabbinic  Philosophy  and  Ethics  (1912). 
Geiger — Sadducaer  und  Pharisaer  (1863). 

Herford — Pharisaism  (1912). 

Holscher — Sadduzaismus  (1906). 


78  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Jost — Geschichte  des  Judenthums  und  seine  secte. 
Lauterbach — The  Sadducees  and  Pharisees  (1913). 
Leszynsky — Die  Sadduzaer  (1912). 

Lightley — Les  Scribes  (1905). 

Lucius — Der  Essenismus  in  seiner  Verhaltniss  zum 
Judenthum  (1881). 

Montet — Essai  sur  les  origines  des  partis  sadduceen  et 
phariseen  et  leur  histoire  jusq’  a  naissance  de  Jesus- 
Christ^  (1883). 

Narbel — Etude  sur  le  parti  phariseen  (1890). 
Oesterley — Religion  and  Worship  of  the  Synagogue 
(1907). 

Regeffe — La  Secte  des  Essenes. 

Robertson,  A.  T. — The  Pharisees  and  Jesus  (1920). 
Schechter — Die  Chassidim  (1904). 

Schnedermann — Das  Judentum  und  die  christliche 
Verkiindigung  in  den  Evangelien  (1884). 
Wellhausen — Die  Pharisaer  und  Sadducaer  (1874). 
Wicks — Doctrine  of  God  in  the  Jewish  Apocryphal  and 
Apocalyptical  Literature  (1915). 

LESSON  XII :  THE  JEWISH  EXPECTATIONS 
CONCERNING  THE  MESSIAH 

Read  as  preparatory  for  this  lecture  II.  Esdras,  chs. 
iii.-xiv.  The  other  chapters  and  “Jesus”  in  vii.,  28,  are 
doubtless  Christian  additions.  Lecture  on  the  Jewish 
Picture  of  the  Messiah. 

See  further  on  the  Messianic  Hope,  Schurer — His¬ 
tory,  etc.,  Div.  II.,  Vol.  II.,  pp.  126-187. 

For  literature  on  Jewish  apocalypses,  see  previous  list. 

BOOKS  ON  THE  MESSIANIC  HOPE  OF  THE  JEWS  AND 

ESCHATOLOGY 

Adeney — The  Hebrew  Utopia  (1879). 

Alexander — The  Witness  of  the  Psalms  to  Christ. 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY 


79 


Andrews — God’s  Revelations  of  Himself  to  Men  (1886). 

Anger — Vorlesungen  fiber  die  Geschichte  der  Messianis- 
chen  Idee  (1873). 

Baldensperger — Die  Messianisch-apokalyptischen  Hoff- 
nungen  des  Judentums  (1903).  3  Aufl. 

Bousset — Der  Antichrist  in  der  fiberlieferung  des  Juden¬ 
tums,  des  Neuen  Testament,  und  der  alten  Kirche 
(1895). 

Bousset — Die  jiidische  Apokalyptik  (1903). 

Bousset — Kurios  Christos  (1913). 

Box — The  Christian  Messiah  in  the  Light  of  Judaism 
(Journal  of  Th.  Studies  for  1912). 

Briggs — Messianic  Prophecy. 

Burkitt — Jewish  and  Christian  Apocalypses  (1913). 

Buttweiser — Outline  of  the  Neo-Hebraic  Apocalyptic 
Literature  (1901). 

Case — The  Messianic  Hope  (1917). 

Charles — A  Critical  History  of  the  Doctrine  of  a  Future 
Life  in  Israel,  in  Judaism,  and  in  Christianity 
(1899). 

Charles — Religious  Development  between  the  Old  and 
the  New  Testaments  (1914). 

Colani — Jesus-Christ  et  les  croyances  messianiques  de 
son  temps.  Second  edition  (1864). 

Cumine — The  Messiah  (1915). 

Delitzsch — Old  Testament  History  of  Redemption. 

Delitzsch — Messianic  Prophecies  (1880). 

Delitzsch — Messianic  Prophecies  in  Historical  Succes¬ 
sion  (1891). 

Dewick — Primitive  Christian  Eschatology  (1912). 

Drummond — The  Jewish  Messiah  (1877). 

Edersheim — Prophecy  and  History  in  Relation  to  the 
Messiah  (1884). 

Edersheim — The  Witness  of  Israel  to  the  Messiah. 

Emmet — The  Eschatological  Question  in  the  Gospels 
(1916). 

Flugel — Messiah-Ideal. 


80  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Gloag — Messianic  Prophecy. 

Goodspeed — Israel’s  Messianic  Hope  (1900). 

Greenhouse — The  Messiah  in  Jewish  History  (1906). 

Hart — The  Hope  of  Catholic  Judaism  (1910). 

Henstenberg — Christology  of  the  Old  Testament. 

Higginson — Ecce  Messias. 

Hilgenfeld — Die  jiidische  Apokalyptik  in  ihrer  ges- 
chichtlichen  Entwickelung  (1857). 

Hilgenfeld — The  Messiah  of  the  Jews. 

Huhn — Die  Messianischen  Weissagungen  des  israeli- 
tisch-jiidischen  Volkes  (1890). 

King — The  Messiah  in  the  Psalms  (1899). 

Klausner — Die  Messianischen  Vorstellungen  des  jiidi- 
schen  Volkes  im  Zeitalter  der  Tannaiten  (1904). 

Lagrange — ~Le  Messianisme  chez  les  juifs  (1908). 

Leathes — Witness  of  the  Old  Testament  to  Christ 
(1868). 

Leman — Histoire  complete  de  l’idee  messianique  chez  le 
peuple  dTsrael  (1909). 

Mackintosh — The  Doctrine  of  the  Person  of  Jesus 
Christ  (1912). 

Oesterley — The  Evolution  of  the  Messianic  Idea 
(1908). 

Orelli — The  Old  Testament  Prophecy  of  the  Consum¬ 
mation  of  God’s  Kingdom  Traced  in  Its  Historical 
Development  (1889). 

Porter — Messages  of  the  Apocalyptical  Writers. 

Riehm — Messianic  Prophecy.  Second  edition  (1891). 

Sanday — Christologies  Ancient  and  Modern  (1910). 

Schonefeld — Ueber  die  Messianische  Hoffnung  von  200 
vor  Christo  bis  gegen  50  nach  Christo  (1874). 

Stanton — The  Jewish  and  the  Christian  Messiah. 

Volz — Tiidische  Eschatologie  von  Daniel  bis  Akiba 
(1903). 

Windisch — Der  Messianische  Krieg  und  das  Urchris- 
tentum  (1909). 

Woods — The  Hope  of  Israel  (1896). 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY 


81 


LESSON  XIII:  A  GLIMPSE  OF  THE  WORLD 
INTO  WHICH  JESUS  WAS  BORN 

A  Lecture 

On  the  state  of  culture  in  general,  see  Schurer — His¬ 
tory,  etc.,  Div.  II.,  Vol.  I.,  pp.  1-163,  and  on  Judaism  in 
the  Dispersion,  see  Schurer — History,  etc.,  Div.  II.,  Vol. 
II.,  pp.  219-327. 

Literature  Useful  for  the  Purpose 

Besides  the  various  books  in  many  lines  already  men¬ 
tioned  that  interpret  the  historical  conditions  of  the  great 
era  B.  C.  5,  one  may  note  further: 

1.  The  Greek  and  Roman  writers  of  the  general  period 

like  Appian,  Arrian,  Caesar,  Cicero,  Dio  Cassius, 
Epictetus,  Horace,  Juvenal,  Livy,  Ovid,  Plutarch, 
Seneca,  Strabo,  Seutonius,  Tacitus.  These  throw  a 
lurid  light  on  the  times. 

2.  The  Papyri,  Ostraca,  and  Inscriptions  reflect  in  vivid 

fashion  the  life  of  the  people.  See 

Crum — Coptic  Ostraca  (1902). 

Deissmann — Bible  Studies  (1901). 

Deissmann — Light  from  the  Ancient  East  (1910). 
Deissmann — St.  Paul  in  the  Light  of  Social  and  Re¬ 
ligious  History  (1912). 

Hill  and  Hicks — A  Manual  of  Greek  Historical  Inscrip¬ 
tions  (1901). 

Kennedy — Sources  of  New  Testament  Greek  (1895). 
Milligan — Greek  Papyri  (1910). 

Milligan — Here  and  There  among  the  Papyri  (1922). 
Moulton,  J.  H. — From  Egyptian  Rubbish  Heaps  (1916). 
Robertson — A  Grammar  of  the  Greek  N.  T.  in  the  Light 
of  Historical  Research.  Fourth  edition  (1923). 

See  also  cyclopaedias  and  Bible  dictionaries. 


82  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 
3.  Summary  Outlines  of  the  Period : 

Abbott — -Society  and  Politics  in  Ancient  Rome  (1909). 
Angus — The  Environment  of  Early  Christianity  (1915). 
Anrich — Das  antike  Mysterienwesen  in  seinen  Einfluss 
auf  das  Christentum  (1894). 

Bauer — Christus  und  die  Caisaren.  2  Aufl.  (1879). 
Beckbr — Gallus. 

Benson — Christ  and  His  Times  (1889). 

Beurlier — Le  cult  rendu  aux  empereurs  romains  (1891). 
Boissier — La  religion  romain  d’ Auguste  aux  Antonins. 

Two  volumes  (1874). 

Botsford — Hellenic  Civilization  (1915). 

Breed — Preparation  of  the  World  for  Christ.  Second 
edition  (1893). 

Carter — The  Religious  Life  of  Ancient  Rome. 

Case — The  Evolution  of  Early  Christianity  (1914). 
Church — Pictures  of  Roman  Life  and  Story  (1892). 
Cumont — Mysteries  of  Mithra  (1903). 

Cu mont— Religions  orient,  dans  le  paganisme  romain 
(1906). 

Davis — The  Influence  of  Wealth  in  Imperial  Rome 
(1910). 

Doellinger — Gentile  and  Jew.  Two  volumes  (1906). 
Edersheim— Life  and  Times  of  Jesus  the  Messiah.  Vol. 

I.,  Book  I.  The  Preparation  for  the  Gospel. 
Farrar — Early  Days  of  Christianity.  Book  I.  The 
World. 

Farrer — Paganism  and  Christianity  (1891). 

Ferrero — The  Ruin  of  the  Ancient  Civilization  and  the 
Triumph  of  Christianity  (1921). 

Fisher — The  Beginnings  of  Christianity  (1877).  Chs. 
I.- VII. 

Fowler — Religious  Experience  of  the  Roman  People 

(1911). 

Fowler — Roman  Ideas  of  Deity  in  the  Last  Century  be¬ 
fore  the  Christian  Era  (1914). 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY  85 

Friedlander — Roman  Life  and  Manners  under  the 
Early  Empire.  Three  volumes  (1909-10). 

Friedlander — Geschichte  der  jiidischen  Apologetik  als 
Vorgeschichte  des  Christentums  (1903). 

Geike — Life  of  Christ  (1877).  Chs.  I. -VI. 

Glover — Conflict  of  Religions  in  the  Early  Roman  Em¬ 
pire  (1909). 

Glover — Progress  in  Religion  to  the  Christian  Era 
(1922). 

Halliday — Lectures  on  the  History  of  Roman  Religion 
(1923). 

Houston — Anno  Domini:  A  Glimpse  of  the  World  into 
which  Messias  Was  Born  (1885). 

Hyde — From  Epicurus  to  Christ  (1904). 

Keim — Rome  und  das  Christentum  (1881). 

Lanciani — Ancient  Rome  (1897). 

Laurie — Historical  Survey  of  Pre-Christian  Education 
(1895). 

Legge — Forerunners  and  Rivals  of  Christianity.  Two 
volumes  (1915). 

Livingston — The  Legacy  of  Greece  (1922). 

Livingston — The  Greek  Genius  and  Its  Meaning  to  Us 
(1912). 

Lord — The  Old  Roman  World  (1868). 

Mahaffy — Survey  of  Greek  Civilization  (1896). 

Moore — Religious  Thought  of  Greeks  and  the  Romans 
from  Homer  to  the  Triumph  of  Christianity 
(1916).' 

Muirhead — The  Times  of  Christ  (1904). 

Patterson — Mithraism  and  Christianity  (1921). 

Petrie — Personal  Religion  in  Egypt  before  Christianity 
(1909). 

Pressense — Jesus  Christ:  His  Times,  Life,  and  Work 
(1866).  Book  I.  Preliminary  Questions. 

Ramsay — The  Church  in  the  Roman  Empire  (1897). 

Reitzenstein — Die  hellenistischen  Mysterien-religionen 
(1910). 


84  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Robertson — Studies  in  the  New  Testament  (1915). 
Part  I.  The  Background. 

Schmitz — Die  Opferanschauung  des  spateren  Judentums 
und  die  Opferanschauung  des  Neuen  Testaments 
(1910). 

Seidel — In  the  Time  of  Jesus  (1885). 

Sihler — Testimonium  Animas;  or  Greek  and  Roman  be¬ 
fore  Christ. 

Stapfer — Palestine  in  the  Time  of  Christ  (1885). 

Stobart — The  Glory  That  Was  Greece  (1911). 

Stobart — The  Grandeur  That  Was  Rome  (1912). 

Sweet,  L.  M. — Roman  Emperor  Worship  (1919). 

Tucker — Life  in  the  Roman  World  of  Nero  and  St. 
Paul  (1910). 

Tuting — The  Coming  of  the  Kingdom  of  Christ  to  the 
Roman  Empire  (1915). 

Uhlhorn — Conflict  of  Christianity  with  Heathenism 
(1879). 

Wendland — Die  hellenistisch-romische  Kultur  in  ihren 
Beziehungen  zu  Judentum  und  Christentum.  3  Aufl. 
(1912). 

Wenley — The  Preparation  for  Christianity  in  the  An¬ 
cient  World  (1898). 

Wissowa — Die  Religion  und  Mythologie  der  Romer.  2 
Aufl.  (1912). 

4.  Novels  Dealing  with  the  Period: 

Brooks — A  Son  of  Issachar.  A  Romance  of  the  Days  of 
Messias  (1890). 

Bulwer — Days  of  Pompeii. 

Croly — Tarry  Thou  Till  I  Come.  New  Edition  (1901). 

Farrar — Darkness  and  Dawn;  or  Days  of  Nero  (1893). 

Gardenhire — Lux  Crucis  (1904). 

Miller — Saul  of  Tarsus.  A  Story  of  Paul’s  Time 
(1906). 


THE  INTERBIBLICAL  HISTORY  85 

Rhone — In  the  Days  of  the  Son  of  Man  (1903). 
Sienkewicz — Quo  Vadis.  A  Story  of  the  Days  of  Nero 
(1893). 

Stearns — A  Friend  of  Caesar  (1901). 


I 


PART  II:  THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 
(B.  C.  6  or  5  to  A.  D.  29  or  30) 


PART  II:  THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 

(B.  C.  6  or  5  to  A.  D.  29  or  30) 

The  text-books  used  in  connection  with  this  part  of 
the  Syllabus  are  Robertson’s  Harmony  of  the  Gospels, 
Broadus’  Commentary  on  Matthew,  Josephus,  Robert¬ 
son’s  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Jesus,  and  The  Student’s 
Chronological  New  Testament.  Use  of  other  books  is 
strongly  encouraged  with  specific  references  and  with 
abundant  reference  to  maps.  The  lectures  with  each 
lesson  aim  to  unfold  the  history  from  an  inner  point  of 
view  and  to  be  exegetical  and  spiritual.  The  Scripture 
text  itself  is  the  basis  of  study,  question,  and  lecture. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  IMPORTANT  WORKS  ON 
THE  GOSPELS  AND  THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 

I.  THE  GOSPELS 

1.  Introduction  to  the  Four  Gospels. 

Abbott,  E.  A. — The  Fourfold  Gospel.  Introduction. 
Section  I.  (1913),  Section  II.  (1914),  Section  III. 
(1915),  Section  IV.  (1916),  Section  V.  (1917). 
Abbott — Miscellanea  Evangelica  (1914). 

Abbott — Indices  (1907). 

Abbott — Clue :  A  Guide  Through  Greek  and  Hebrew. 
Abbott — The  Corrections  of  Mark. 

Abbott — From  Tithe  and  Spirit. 

Abbott — Paradosis. 

Abbott — Silanus  the  Christian  (1906). 

Abbott — Notes  on  New  Testament  Criticism  (1907). 
Alexander — Leading  Ideas  of  the  Gospels  (1898). 
Badham — Formation  of  the  Four  Gospels. 

89 


90  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Barrows — The  Gospels  True  Histories. 

Battifol — Six  Lecons  sur  les  evangiles  (1897). 

Bennett — The  Four  Gospels  from  a  Lawyer’s  Stand- 
point. 

Blass — Philology  of  the  Gospels  (1898). 

Burton — A  Short  Introduction  to  the  Gospels  (1904). 

Chase — The  Gospels  in  the  Light  of  Historical  Criticism 
(1914). 

Cladder — Unsere  Evangelien  (1919). 

Cone — Gospel  Criticism  and  Historical  Christianity 
(1891). 

Da  Costa — The  Four  Witnesses  (1851). 

Dale — The  Living  Christ  and  the  Four  Gospels  (1890). 

Dalman — The  Words  of  Jesus  (1902). 

Godet — Biblical  Studies. 

Godet — The  Collection  of  the  Four  Gospels,  and  the 
Gospel  of  St.  Matthew  (1899). 

Gregory,  D.  S. — Why  Four  Gospels  (1876). 

Hausleiter — Die  Vier  Evangelien  (1906). 

Lardner — Credibility  of  the  Gospels.  Seven  volumes 
(1857). 

Levesque — Nos  quatre  evangiles.  Leur  composition  et 
leur  position  respective  (1917). 

Luckock — The  Special  Characteristics  of  the  Four 
Gospels  (1900). 

Marvin — Authorship  of  the  Four  Gospels  (1886). 

McVery — Did  Jesus  Write  His  Own  Gospel?  (1912). 

Mill — On  the  Mythical  Interpretation  of  the  Gospels. 
Reply  to  Strauss  (1861). 

Moffatt — Theology  of  the  Gospels  (1912). 

Morehead — Studies  in  the  Four  Gospels. 

Norton — Genuineness  of  the  Gospels  (1848). 

Patton — The  Sources  of  the  Synoptic  Gospels  (1915). 

Pullan — The  Gospels  (1912). 

Resch- — Aussercanonische  Parallel-texte  zu  den  Evan¬ 
gelien  (1893). 

Roberts — Discussion  on  the  Gospels  (1864). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


91 


Robinson— The  Study  of  the  Gospels  (1898). 

Salmon — The  Human  Element  in  the  Gospels  (1907). 

Sanday — The  Gospels  in  the  Second  Century  (1876). 

Scott — The  Making  of  the  Gospels  (1905). 

Sparrow— The  Gospels  in  Art. 

Stanton— The  Gospels  as  Historical  Documents.  Part 
I.  The  Early  Use  of  the  Gospels  (1903). 

Stokoe — Manual  of  the  Four  Gospels  (1901). 

Tischendorf— Origin  of  the  Four  Gospels  (1867). 

Thorburn- — The  Mythical  Interpretation  of  the  Gospels 
(1916). 

Torre y,  C.  C. — The  Translations  Made  from  the  Origi¬ 
nal  Aramaic  Gospels  (1913). 

Wernle — The  Sources  of  Our  Knowledge  of  the  Life  of 
Jesus  (1907). 

Westcott — Introduction  to  the  Four  Gospels  (1875). 

Westcott — Elements  of  the  Gospel  Harmony  (1851). 

Williamson — Four  Lectures  on  the  Early  History  of  the 
Gospels. 

Wright — A  Synopsis  of  the  Gospels  in  Greek  (1903). 

Zimmern — Der  historische  Werth  der  altesten  Ueberlief- 
erung. 

See  also  the  Bible  dictionaries,  the  New  Testament  in¬ 
troductions,  and  the  commentaries  on  the  Gospels. 

2.  The  Synoptic  Problem. 

Besides  the  preceding,  note  the  following: 

Abbott  and  Ruspiebrooke — The  Common  Tradition  of 
the  Synoptic  Gospels  in  the  Text  of  the  Revised 
Version  (1884). 

Albertz — Die  synoptischen  Streitgesprache  (1921). 

Bacon — The  Beginnings  of  Gospel  Story  (1909). 

Bacon — Is  Mark  a  Roman  Gospel?  (1919). 

Badham — St.  Mark’s  Indebtedness  to  St.  Matthew 
(1897). 

Bertram — Die  Leidengeschichte  Jesu  (1922). 


92  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Bleek — Synoptische  Erklarung  der  drei  ersten  Evange- 
lien  (1862). 

Bosanquet — Outlines  of  the  Synoptic  Record  (1904). 

Buckley — Introduction  to  the  Synoptic  Problem  (1912). 

Burkitt— Two  Lectures  on  the  Gospels. 

Burkitt — The  Gospel  History  and  Its  Transmission. 
Second  edition  (1907). 

Burkitt — The  Earliest  Sources  for  the  Life  of  Jesus 

(191°). 

Burton — Some  Principles  of  Literary  Criticism  and 
Their  Application  to  the  Synoptic  Problem  (1904). 

Cadbury — The  Style  and  Literary  Method  of  Luke 
(1920). 

Campbell — The  First  Three  Gospels. 

Carpenter — The  First  Three  Gospels.  Third  edition 
(1904). 

Carpenter,  S.  C. — Christianity  According  to  St.  Luke 
(1919). 

Carus — The  Synoptic  Gospels  (1910). 

Cary — The  Synoptic  Gospels. 

Chase — The  Gospels  in  the  Light  of  Historical  Criticism 
(1914). 

Cone — Gospel  Criticism  and  Historical  Christianity 
(1911). 

Flinders-Petrie — The  Growth  of  the  Gospels  as  Shown 
by  Structural  Criticism  (1910). 

Fullignet — Les  sources  des  evangiles  (1911). 

Gloag — Introduction  to  the  Synoptic  Gospels  (1895). 

Goguel—  L’evangile  de  Marc  et  ses  rapports  avec  ceux 
de  Matthieu  et  de  Luc  (1909). 

Harnack — Luke  the  Physician  (1907). 

Harnack— The  Sayings  of  Jesus:  the  Second  Source  of 
St.  Matthew  and  St.  Luke  (1908). 

Harnack — The  Date  of  the  Acts  and  the  Synoptic  Gos¬ 
pels  (1911). 

Hayes — The  Most  Beautiful  Book  in  the  World  (1913). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  93 

Hayes — The  Synoptic  Gospels  and  the  Book  of  Acts 
(1919). 

Hawkins — Horae  Synopticse.  Second  edition  (1909). 

Hobson — Diatessaron  of  Tatian  and  the  Synoptic  Prob¬ 
lem  (1904). 

Hoffmann — Das  Marcus  evangelium  und  seine  Quellen 
(1904). 

Holdsworth — Gospel  Origins  (1913). 

Holtz mann — Die  synoptische  Evangelien,  ihr  Ursprung 
und  geschichtlicher  charakter  (1863). 

Koch — Die  Abfassungszeit  des  lukanischen  Geschichts- 
werkes  (1910). 

Jameson — The  Origin  of  the  Synoptic  Gospels  (1922). 

Jolley — Synoptic  Problem  for  English  Readers  (1893). 

Julicher — Neue  Linien  in  der  Kritik  der  evangelischen 
Ueberlieferung  (1906). 

Loisy — Les  evangiles  synoptique  (1907). 

Lummis — How  Luke  Was  Written  (1913). 

Mackinlay — Recent  Discoveries  in  St.  Luke’s  Writings 
(1921). 

Machlachlan — St.  Luke,  Evangelist  and  Historian 
(1912). 

Machlachlan — St.  Luke:  The  Man  and  His  Work 
(1920). 

Mangenot — Les  evangiles  synoptiques  (1911). 

Montefiore — The  Synoptic  Gospels  (1909). 

Muller — Zur  Synopse:  Untersuchung  fiber  die  Arbeits- 
weise  des  Lukas  und  Matthaus  und  ihre  Quellen 
(1908). 

Nicolardot — Les  procedes  de  redaction  des  trois  pre¬ 
miers  Evangelistes  (1908). 

Palmer — Gospel  Problems  and  Their  Solution  (1908). 

Patton — Sources  of  the  Synoptic  Gospels  (1915). 

Pasquier — La  solution  du  probleme  synoptique  (1911). 

Paul — Die  Abfassungszeit  der  synoptischen  Evangelien 
(1887). 


94  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Perry — The  Sources  of  Luke’s  Passion  Narrative 
(1920). 

Purchas — Johannine  Problems  and  Modern  Needs 
(1901). 

Ramsay— Luke  the  Physician  (1908). 

Ramsay — Was  Christ  Born  at  Bethlehem?  (1899). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — Studies  in  Mark’s  Gospel  (1919). 

Robertson— A.  T. — Luke  the  Historian  in  the  Light  of 
Research  (1920). 

Rohrich — La  composition  des  evangiles  (1898). 

Rushebrooke — Synopticon:  An  Exposition  of  the  Com¬ 
mon  Matter  of  the  Synoptic  Gospels  (1880). 

Salmon — The  Human  Element  in  the  Gospels  (1907). 

Sanday  et  alii— Studies  in  the  Synoptic  Problem 
(1911). 

Scott — The  Making  of  the  Gospels.  New  edition  (1908). 

Smith,  R. — The  Solution  of  the  Synoptic  Problem 
(1922). 

Soiron — Die  Logia  Jesu  (1916). 

Spitta — Die  synoptische  Grundschaft  (1912). 

Stanton — The  Synoptic  Gospels  (1909).  Part  II.  of 
the  Gospels  as  Historical  Documents. 

Weiss,  B. — Das  Marcusevangelium  und  seine  synop- 
tischen  Parallelen  (1872). 

Weiss,  B. — Das  Matthausevangelium  und  seine  Lucas 
parallelen  (1876). 

Weiss,  B. — Die  geschichtlichkeit  des  Markusevangeliums 
(1905). 

Weiss,  B. — Quellen  des  Lukasevangeliums  (1907). 

Weiss,  B. — Die  Quellen  der  synoptischen  Ueberlieferung 
(1908). 

Weizsacker — Untersuchungen  fiber  die  evangelische 
Geschichte,  ihre  Quellen  und  die  Gang  ihrer  Ent- 
wickelung.  2  Aufl.  (1901). 

Wellhausen — Einleitung  in  die  drei  ersten  Evangelien 
(1905). 

Wendling — Ur-Markus  (1905). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  95 

Wendling — Die  Entstehung  des  Markusevangeliums 
(1908). 

Wendt — Die  Lehre  Jesu.  Band  I.  Die  evangelischen 
Quellenberichte  fiber  die  Lehre  Jesu  (1886).  The 
Teaching  of  Jesus.  Vol.  I.  (1892). 

Weston — Matthew  the  Genesis  of  the  New  Testament 
(1900). 

Wernle — Die  synoptische  Frage  (1899). 

Wernle — The  Sources  of  our  Knowledge  of  the  Life  of 
Jesus  (1907). 

Wetzel — Die  synoptischen  Evangelien  (1883). 

Wright — The  Composition  of  the  Four  Gospels 
(1890). 

Wright-— The  Gospel  According  to  St.  Luke  in  Greek 
(1900). 

See  Bible  dictionaries,  introductions  and  commentaries. 

3.  The  Authorship  and  Character  of  the  Fourth  Gospel. 

Abbott,  Peabody  and  Lightfoot — The  Fourth  Gospel : 
Evidences  External  and  Internal  for  its  Johannine 
Authorship  (1891). 

Abbott,  Ezra — On  the  Authorship  of  the  Fourth  Gospel 
(1880). 

Abbott,  E.  A. — Johannine  Vocabulary  (1905). 

Abbott,  E.  A. — Johannine  Grammar  (1906). 

Appel — Die  Echheit  des  Johannesevangeliums  (1915). 

Askwith — The  Historical  Value  of  the  Fourth  Gospel 
(1910). 

Bacon — The  Fourth  Gospel  in  Research  and  Debate 
(1910). 

Baldensperger — Der  Prolog  des  vierten  Evangeliums 
(1898). 

Barth — The  Gospel  of  John  and  the  Synoptic  Gospels 
(1907). 

Benham — St.  John  and  His  Work  (1902). 

Beyschlag — Zur  Johanneischen  Frage  (1872). 


96  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Burney — The  Aramaic  Origin  of  the  Fourth  Gospel 
(1922). 

Chapman — John  the  Presbyter  and  the  Fourth  Gospel 
(1911). 

Clemen— Die  Entstehung  des  Johannesevangeliums 
(1912). 

D’Alma — La  Controverse  du  quatrieme  evangile  (1908). 

D’Alma — Philo  et  la  quatrieme  evangile  (1911). 

Dausch — Das  Johannesevangelium  (1909). 

Delff — Das  vierte  Evangelium  wiederhergestellt  (1890). 

Delff — Neue  Beitrage  zur  Kritik  und  Erklarung  des 
vierten  Evangeliums  (1890). 

Drummond — An  Inquiry  into  the  Character  and  Au¬ 
thorship  of  the  Fourth  Gospel  (1904). 

Evans — St.  John  the  Author  of  the  Fourth  Gospel 
(1888). 

Ewald — Das  Hauptproblem  der  Evangelienfrage  und  der 
Weg  zu  seiner  Losung  (1890). 

Fouard,  S. — Jean  et  la  fin  de  l’age  apostolique  (1904). 

Gardner,  P. — The  Ephesian  Gospel  (1915). 

Garvie — The  Beloved  Disciple:  Studies  in  the  Fourth 
Gospel  (1922). 

Gobel — Die  Reden  des  Herrn  nach  Johannes  (1906). 

Goguel — Les  sources  du  recit  Tohannique  de  la  Passion 
(1910). 

Gordon,  S.  D. — Quiet  Talks  on  St.  John’s  Gospel. 

Gregory,  C.  R. — Wellhausen  und  Johannes  (1910). 

Green — The  Ephesian  Canonical  Writings  (1910). 

Grill — Untersuchungen  uber  die  Entstehung  des  vierten 
Evangeliums  (1902). 

Gumbel — Das  Johannesevangelium  Eine  Erganzung  des 
Lukasev.  (1911). 

Harris,  J.  R. — The  Origin  of  the  Prologue  to  St.  John’s 
Gospel  (1917). 

Hayes — John  and  His  Writings  (1917). 

Heitmuller— Das  Johannesevangelium  (1908). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  97 

Holland — The  Philosophy  of  Faith  and  the  Fourth 
Gospel  (1920). 

Holtz mann,  H.  J. — Evangelium,  Brief e,  und  Offen- 
barung  des  Johannes.  3  Aufl.  (1908). 

Jackson — The  Fourth  Gospel  and  Some  Recent  German 
Criticisms  (1906). 

Jackson — The  Problem  of  the  Fourth  Gospel  (1918). 

Johnston — The  Philosophy  of  the  Fourth  Gospel 
(1909). 

Keisker  —  Inner  Witness  of  the  Fourth  Gospel 
(1922). 

Kreyenbuhl — Neue  Losung  der  Johanneischen  Frage 
(1905). 

Larfield — Die  beide  Johannes  von  Ephesus  (1914). 

Lepin — L’Origine  du  Quatrieme  evangile  (1907). 

Lepin — La  valeur  historique  du  quatrieme  evangile 
(1910). 

Lewis — Disarrangements  in  the  Fourth  Gospel  (1910). 

Lewis,  F.  G. — The  Irenseus  Testimony  to  the  Fourth 
Gospel :  Its  Extent,  Meaning,  and  Value  (1908). 

Lias — Doctrinal  System  of  John  (1875). 

Lightfoot — Essays  on  the  Work  entitled  Supernatural 
Religion  (1889). 

Lightfoot — Biblical  Essays  (1893). 

Loisy — Le  quatrieme  evangile  (1903). 

Lowrie — The  Doctrine  of  John  (1895). 

Luthardt — St.  John  the  Author  of  the  Fourth  Gospel 
(1875). 

Monse — Johannes  und  Paulus  (1915). 

Overbecic — Das  Johannesevangelium  (1911). 

Peyton — The  Memorabilia  of  Jesus. 

Richmond — The  Gospel  of  the  Rejection  (1906). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — The  Divinity  of  Christ  in  the  Fourth 
Gospel  (1916). 

Robinson — Historical  Character  of  St.  John’s  Gospel 
(1908). 


98  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Sanday — Authorship  and  Historical  Character  of  the 
Fourth  Gospel  (1872). 

Sanday — Criticism  of  the  Fourth  Gospel  (1905). 

Schlatter — Die  Sprache  und  Heimat  des  vierten  Evan- 
gelisten  (1903). 

Schmiedel — The  Johannine  Writings  (1908). 

Schniewind — Die  Parallelperikopen  bei  Lukas  und 
Johannes  (1914). 

Scott,  E.  F.- — The  Historical  and  Religious  Value  of  the 
Fourth  Gospel  (1909). 

Scott,  E.  F.— The  Fourth  Gospel:  Its  Purpose  and  The- 
ology  (1906). 

Scott-Holland — The  Philosophy  of  the  Fourth  Gospel 
(1919). 

Sears — The  Fourth  Gospel,  the  Heart  of  Christ  (1872). 

Sense — A  Free  Inquiry  into  the  Authorship  of  the  Fourth 
Gospel. 

Smith,  J.  R. — The  Teaching  of  the  Fourth  Gospel 
(1903). 

Speer — The  Greatest  Book  in  the  World  (1915). 

Spitta — Das  Johannesevangelium  als  Quelle  der  Gesch- 
ichte  Jesu  ( 1909) . 

Stange — Die  Eigenart  des  Johanneischen  Produktion 
(1914). 

Stanton — The  Fourth  Gospel  (Part  III  of  The  Gospels 
as  Historical  Documents,  1921). 

Stevens — Johannine  Theology  (1894). 

Strachan,  R.  PI. — The  Fourth  Gospel :  Its  Significance 
and  Environment  (1917). 

Vedder — The  Johannine  Writings  and  the  Johannine 
Problems  (1917). 

Watkins — Modern  Criticism  Considered  in  its  Relation 
to  the  Fourth  Gospel  (1890). 

Watson — Mysticism  of  St.  John’s  Gospel  (1916). 

Wearing — The  World  View  of  the  Fourth  Gospel 
(1918). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  99 

Weiss,  B. — Das  Johannesevangelium  als  einheitliches 
Werk  (1911). 

Wellhausen — Das  Evangelium  Johannes  (1908). 

Wendt — The  Gospel  According  to  St.  John:  An  Inquiry 
into  its  Genesis  and  Historical  Value  (1902). 

Wendt — Die  Schichten  im  vierten  Evangelium  (1911). 

Worsley — The  Fourth  Gospel  and  the  Synoptists  (1909). 

Wrede — Charakter  und  Tendenz  des  Johannesevange- 
liums  (1903). 

Zahn — Das  Evangelium  des  Johannes  (1908). 

II.  COMMENTARIES  ON  THE  GOSPELS 

1.  Series  on  Entire  New  Testament. 

(a)  For  English  Readers : 

American  Commentary,  An — Edited  by  Alvah  Hovey. 
By  various  authors  (1880-90). 

Bengel — Gnomon  of  the  New  Testament.  Translated  by 
Blackley  and  Hawes.  Three  volumes  (1867). 

Bible  Commentary  (Speaker’s  Commentary).  Edited 
by  Cook.  By  various  British  authors.  New  edition 
(1898). 

Bible  for  Home  and  School.  Edited  by  Shailer 
Mathews.  By  various  American  authors  (1908 — ). 

Buckland’s  Devotional  Commentary.  Various 
writers. 

Cambridge  Bible  for  Schools  and  Colleges.  Various 
British  authors.  Nineteen  volumes  on  New  Testa¬ 
ment.  (1877-96). 

Carroll,  B.  H. — Interpretation  of  the  English  Bible 
(1912-18). 

Century  (New)  Bible.  Edited  by  W.  F.  Adeney.  By 
various  authors.  Thirteen  volumes  on  New  Testa¬ 
ment.  (1899-1904). 

Clark,  G.  W. — People’s  Commentary  (1873-1905). 


100  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 

Clark,  T.  and  T. — Handbooks  for  Bible  Classes. 

Devotional  Commentary 

Dummelow — A  Commentary  on  the  Bible  in  One  Vol¬ 
ume.  By  various  British  authors  (1909). 

Ellicott — New  Testament  for  English  Readers.  Three 
volumes.  1878  ff.  By  various  British  authors. 

Expositor’s  Bible.  Edited  by  Sir  W.  Robertson  Nicoll. 
By  various  British  authors.  Twenty-one  volumes  on 
New  Testament  and  one  index  volume  (1889-94). 

Gray — Christian  Workers’  Comm,  on  the  Whole  Bible 
(1915). 

Humphrey — Commentary  on  the  Revised  Version  of  the 
New  Testament  (1882). 

Indian  Commentary.  Various  writers. 

Parker — People’s  Bible. 

Peake — One  Volume  Commentary  on  the  Bible  (1919). 

Maclaren — Expositions  of  Holy  Scripture.  Volumes  on 
New  Testament  (1895-1908). 

Van  Ness — Convention  (Southern  Baptist)  Commen¬ 
taries.  Various  Baptist  authors  (1912—). 

Walker  and  Warman — The  Reader’s  Commentary 
(1910—). 

Weiss — A  Commentary  on  the  New  Testament.  Trans¬ 
lated  by  Schodde  and  Wilson.  Four  volumes  (1906). 

Westminster  New  Testament.  By  various  British 
authors. 

Westminster  Commentaries.  Edited  by  Walter  Lock 
(1901—). 

(b)  For  Greek  Students : 

Alford — Greek  Testament.  Four  volumes.  Sixth  edi¬ 
tion  (1874). 

Bengel — Gnomon  Novi  Testamenti.  Third  edition 
(1855). 

Briggs,  Driver  and  Plummer  (editors) — The  inter- 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


101 


national  Critical  Commentary.  By  various  American 
and  British  authors.  Will  be  about  eighteen  volumes 
on  N.  T.  (1895- — ). 

Calvin — Commentaries  on  the  N.  T.  English  translation 
(1847).  Tholuck’s  edition  in  Latin  is  in  five  volumes 
and  cheap.  Covers  most  of  the  N.  T. 

Holtzmann,  H.  J.  (editor) — Der  Commentar  zum 
Neuen  Testament.  By  various  German  authors. 
Four  volumes  (1890). 

Lietzmann  (editor) — Handbuch  zum  Neuen  Testa¬ 
ment.  By  various  German  writers  (1906 — ). 

Meyer — Commentary  on  the  N.  T.  from  Thess.  to  Rev. 
by  Lfinemann,  Huther  and  Dfisterdieck.  Transla¬ 
tion.  Eleven  volumes  (1885-1887). 

Meyer  (edited  and  thoroughly  revised  by  various  Ger¬ 
man  authors) — Kritisch-exegetischer  Kommentar 
fiber  das  Neue  Testament.  Sixteen  volumes  (1897- 
1910). 

Nicoll  (editor) — The  Expositor’s  Greek  Testament. 
By  various  British  authors.  Five  volumes  (1897- 
1910). 

Perowne  and  Robinson  (editors) — Cambridge  Greek 
Testament  for  Schools  and  Colleges.  Nineteen  vol¬ 
umes  on  N.  T.  (1887-1915). 

Vincent — Word  Studies  in  the  N.  T.  Two  volumes 
(1889). 

Weiss,  B. — Das  Neue  Testament  im  berichtigten  Text, 
mit  Kurzer  Erlauterung.  2  Aufl.  Three  volumes 
(1902-5). 

Weiss,  J.  (editor) — Die  Schriften  des  Neuen  Testa¬ 
ments.  Neu  fibersetzt  und  ffir  die  Gegenwart  erklart. 
By  various  German  authors.  3  Aufl.  Two  volumes 
(1917-18). 

Zahn  (editor) — Der  Kommentar  zum  Neuen  Testa¬ 
ment.  By  various  German  authors  (1905 — ). 


102  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


2.  Commentaries  on  Matthew. 

(a)  For  English  students : 

Besides  those  by  Bengel,  Carroll,  Clarke,  Ellicott, 
Humphreys,  Maclaren,  Parker,  B.  Weiss,  cov¬ 
ering  all  the  New  Testament,  the  following 
books  by  separate  authors  are  to  be  noted : 

Anderson — The  Gospel  according  to  St.  Matthew 
(1909). 

Broadus— -Commentary  on  the  Gospel  of  Matthew. 
American  Commentary  (1887). 

Carr — Cambridge  Bible  for  Schools  and  Colleges. 

Erdman,  C.  R. — The  Gospel  according  to  Matthew 
(1920). 

Gibson— -The  Gospel  of  Matthew.  Expositor’s  Bible 
(1890). 

HoRTON—The  Gospel  according  to  St.  Matthew  (1909). 

Micklem — The  Gospel  according  to  St.  Matthew  (1917). 

Morrison — Practical  Commentary  on  the  Gospel  accord¬ 
ing  to  St.  Matthew.  Ninth  edition  (1895). 

Robertson — Commentary  on  the  Gospel  according  to 
Matthew.  Bible  for  Home  and  School  (1911). 

Slater — St.  Matthew.  The  New-Century  Bible  (1901). 

Smith,  D. — The  Gospel  of  St.  Matthew.  The  West¬ 
minster  New  Testament  (1909). 

Williams — The  Hebrew  Christian  Messiah  (1916).  Ex¬ 
position  of  Matthew. 

(b)  For  Greek  students: 

Besides  Alford,  Bengel,  Calvin,  Meyer,  Vincent 
and  B.  Weiss  on  the  whole  New  Testament,  one 
may  note  the  following  separate  writers : 

Allen- — A  Critical  and  Exegetical  Commentary  on  the 
Gospel  according  to  St.  Matthew.  Int.  Crit.  Comm. 
(1907). 

Baljon — Commentaar  op  het  Evangelie  van  Mt.  (1900). 

Blass — Evangelium  secundum  Matthseum  (1901). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


103 


Bruce — The  Synoptic  Gospels.  Exp.  Gk.  Test.  (1897). 

Carr — Matthew  in  the  Cambridge  Greek  Testament 
(1894). 

Cereselo — Authenticita  eta  e  storica  autorita  del  Vangelo 
di  S.  Matteo  (1909). 

Chrysostom— -Homiletical  discourses. 

Dimmler — Das  Evangelium  nach  Matthaus  (1909). 

Holtzmann — Die  Synoptiker.  Hand-Commentar.  3 
Aufl.  (1901). 

Klostermann  und  Gressmann — Matthaus  (1909). 

Loisy — Les  evangiles  synoptiques.  Two  volumes 
(1907-8). 

McNeile — The  Gospel  according  to  St.  Matthew  (1915). 

Niglutsch — Brevis  Commentarius  in  Evangelium  S. 
Matthaei  (1913). 

Nosgen — Das  Evangelium  des  Matthaus  (1897). 

Plummer — An  Exegetical  Commentary  on  the  Gospel  ac¬ 
cording  to  St.  Matthew  (1909). 

Weiss,  B. — Das  Matthaus-Evangelium.  Meyer  Kom- 
mentar.  9  Aufl.  (1898). 

Weiss — Die  drei  alteren  Evangelien.  Schriften  des  Neuen 
Testaments.  (1907). 

Wellhausen — Das  Evangelium  Matthsei  (1904). 

Zahn — Das  Evangelium  des  Matthaus.  Zahn  Kommen- 
tar.  2  Aufl.  (1905). 

3.  Commentaries  on  Mark 

(a)  For  English  students: 

Besides  those  on  the  whole  New  Testament. 

Alexander — Gospel  of  Mark  (1863). 

Bacon — The  Beginnings  of  Gospel  Story :  A  Historico- 
Critical  Inquiry  into  the  Sources  of  and  Structure  of 
the  Gospel  according  to  Mark  (1909). 

Bennett — Life  of  Christ  according  to  St.  Mark  (1907). 

Broadus — Gospel  according  to  Mark. 

Chadwick — The  Gospel  of  Mark.  Exp.  Bible  (1887). 


104  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Clarke— Gospel  of  Mark.  Am.  Comm.  (1881). 

Dean— The  Gospel  according  to  St.  Mark  (1916). 

Erdman— The  Gospel  of  Mark  (1917). 

Hunter — John  Mark;  or  the  Making  of  a  Saint  (1917). 

Jacobus— The  Gospel  according  to  Mark.  Bible  for 
Home  and  School  (1915). 

Jones,  J.  D.— Commentary  on  St.  Mark.  Four  volumes 
(1919). 

Lindsay— The  Gospel  according  to  St.  Mark. 

Luckock— Footprints  of  the  Son  of  Man  as  Traced  by 
St.  Mark  (1889). 

Maclear — Gospel  of  St.  Mark.  Cambridge  Bible  for 
Schools  and  Colleges. 

Menzies — The  Earliest  Gospel :  A  Historical  Study  of 
the  Gospel  according  to  Mark  (1901). 

Morison— Practical  Commentary  on  the  Gospel  accord¬ 
ing  to  St.  Mark.  Seventh  edition  (1894). 

Plummer — Cambridge  Bible  for  Schools. 

Robinson— St.  Mark’s  Life  of  Jesus  (1922). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — Making  Good  in  the  Ministry:  A 
Sketch  of  John  Mark  (1918). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — Studies  in  Mark’s  Gospel  (1919). 

Salmond- — The  Gospel  according  to  St.  Mark.  New- 
Century  Bible. 

Taylor,  J.  J.— Gospel  according  to  Mark.  S.  B.  Conven¬ 
tion  Series. 

(b)  For  Greek  students : 

Besides  the  general  books. 

Allen — The  Gospel  according  to  Mark  (1915). 

Du  Boisson— The  Origin  and  Characteristics  of  Mark 
(1906). 

Bruce — Exp.  Gk.  Test.  (1897). 

Goguel— L’Evangile  de  Marc  et  ses  rapports  avec  ceux 
de  Matthieu  et  de  Luc  (1909). 

Gould — The  Gospel  according  to  St.  Mark.  Int.  Crit. 
Ser.  1896. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


105 


Green,  W. — The  Gospel  according  to  St.  Mark  (1909). 
Holtzmann — Die  Synoptiker.  Hand-Comm.  (1901). 
Klostermann-Gressm ann— -Markus  ( 1907) . 
Lagrange— Evangile  selon  St.  Marc  (1911). 

Loisy — L’Evangile  selon  Marc  (1912). 

Maclear — Camb.  Gk.  Test.  (1893). 

Merx — Das  Evangelium  Markus  (1905). 

Plummer — Camb.  Gk.  Test.  (1915). 

Rohr — Die  Glaubwiirdigkeit  des  Markusevangeliums 
(1913). 

Swete — The  Gospel  according  to  St.  Mark.  Second  edi¬ 
tion  (1902). 

Weiss,  B. — Meyer  Komm.  (1901). 

Weiss,  J. — Das  alteste  Evangelium  (1903). 

Weiss,  J. — Das  Markus  Evangelium  (1906).  Die  Schrif- 
ten  des  Neuen  Testaments. 

Wellhausen — Das  Evangelium  Marci.  2  Aufl.  (1909). 
Wohlenberg — Das  Evangelium  des  Markus.  Zahn 
Komm.  (1910). 

4.  Commentaries  on  Luke 

(a)  For  English  students: 

Not  on  entire  New  Testament. 

Adeney — New-Century  Bible. 

Bliss — In  Am.  Comm.  (1881). 

Burton — Exp.  Bible  (1890). 

Farrar — In  Cambridge  Bible  for  Schools  and  Colleges. 
Hayes — The  Most  Beautiful  Book  in  the  World. 

Lindsay — Gospel  according  to  St.  Luke. 

McLaughlin — Commentary  on  the  Gospel  according  to 
St.  Luke  (1912). 

Ragg — The  Gospel  according  to  St.  Luke  (1922). 
Sadler — Gospel  according  to  St.  Luke  (1886). 
Stevenson — Handbook  to  Luke  (1901). 

(b)  For  Greek  students: 

Not  on  entire  New  Testament. 


106  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Blass — Evangelium  secundum  Lucam  (1897). 

Bruce — Synoptic  Gospels  in  Exp.  Gk.  T.  (1897). 
Burnside — Camb.  Gk.  Test.  (1915). 

Cadbury — Critical  Studies  in  the  Gospel  of  Luke  and  the 
Book  of  Acts  (1916-18). 

Farrar — Camb.  Gk.  Test.  (1884). 

Godet — Commentary  on  the  Gospel  of  St.  Luke  (1887). 
Harnack — Luke  the  Physician  (1907). 

Holtzmann — Die  Synoptiker.  Hand-Komm.  (1901). 
Klosterman — Lukas.  Handbuch  zum  N.  T.  (1919). 
Koch — Die  Abfassungszeit  des  lukanischen  geschichts- 
werkes  (1911). 

Loisy — Les  evangiles  synoptiques  (1908). 

Plummer — The  Gospel  according  to  St.  Luke.  Int.  Crit. 

Comm.  Fourth  edition  (1909). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — A  Translation  of  Luke’s  Gospel  with 
Grammatical  Notes  (1923). 

Rose — L’evangile  selon  S.  Luc  (1904). 

Weiss,  B. — Meyer  Komm.  9  Aufl.  (1901). 

Weiss,  J.— -Das  Lukas  Evangelium  (1906).  Schriften  d. 
N.  T. 

Wellhausen — Das  Evangelium  Lucae  (1904). 

Zahn— Das  Evangelium  des  Lukas  (1914).  4  Aufl. 

(1920). 

5.  Commentaries  on  John 

(a)  For  English  students  : 

Not  on  entire  New  Testament. 

Candler — Practical  Studies  in  the  Gospel  of  John. 
Three  volumes  (1912-15). 

Dods— The  Gospel  of  John.  Exp.  Bible.  Two  volumes 
(1891). 

Gore — Exposition  of  the  Gospel  of  John  (1920). 

Hovey — In  Am.  Comm.  (1885). 

Maurice — The  Gospel  of  St.  John  (1906). 

McClymont- — New-Century  Bible  (1901). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


107 


Milligan  and  Moulton — In  Schaff’s  Comm.  (1895). 
Plummer — Camb.  Bible  for  Schools  and  Colleges. 

Reith — St.  John. 

Reynolds — The  Gospel  of  St.  John.  The  Pulpit  Comm. 
Two  volumes  (1887-8). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — Divinity  of  Christ  in  the  Gospel  of 
John  (1916). 

Selbie — Belief  and  Life.  Studies  in  the  Thought  of  the 
Fourth  Gospel  (1916). 

Watkins — In  Ellicott’s  Comm.  (1879). 

Whitelaw — The  Gospel  of  John  (1888). 

(b)  For  Greek  students: 

Not  on  entire  New  Testament. 

Bert — Das  Evangelium  des  Johannes  (1922). 

Belzer — Das  Evangelium  des  heiligen  Johannes  (1905). 
Blass — Evangelium  secundum  Johannem  (1902). 
Calmes — L’evangile  selon  S.  Jean  (1904). 

Carr — Gospel  of  St.  John  (1904). 

Dods — Expositor’s  Greek  Testament  (1897). 

Godet — Comm,  on  the  Gospel  of  St.  John.  Two  volumes 
(1886-90). 

Goebel — Die  Reden  unseres  Herrn  nach  Johannem.  Two 
volumes  (1906-10). 

Heitmuller — Das  Tohannes-Evangelium.  Schr.  d.  N.  T. 
(1907). 

Holtzmann — Hand-Comm.  3  Aufl.  von  Bauer  (1908). 
Loisy — Le  Quatrieme  Evangile.  Second  edition  (1921). 
Plummer — Camb.  Gk.  Test.  (1913). 

Weiss,  B. — Meyer-Komm.  9  Aufl.  (1902). 

Wellhausen — Das  Evangelium  Johannis  (1908). 
Westcott — Commentary  on  the  Gospel  of  St.  John.  Two 
volumes  (1908). 

Zahn — Das  Evangelium  Johannes.  Zahn  Komm.  (1909). 
6  Aufl.  (1921). 


108  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


III.  HARMONIES  OF  THE  GOSPELS 

Augustine — Harmony  of  the  Evangelists. 

Brassac — Nova  Evangeliorum  Synopsis  (1913). 

Burton  and  Goodspeed — A  Harmony  of  the  Synoptic 
Gospels  (1917). 

Burton  and  Goodspeed — A  Harmony  of  the  Synoptic 
Gospels  in  Greek  (1920). 

Broadus — A  Harmony  of  the  Gospels  in  the  Revised 
Version  with  New  Helps  for  Historical  Study. 
Critical  Notes  by  Robertson.  Twelfth  edition 
(1921). 

Cadman — Christ  in  the  Gospels.  Four  Gospels  com¬ 
bined  into  one. 

Camerlynck  et  Coppieters — Evangeliorum  secundum 
Matthseum,  Marcum  et  Lucam  Synopsis  juxta  Vul- 
gatam  Editionem  (1910). 

Campbell — First  Three  Gospels  in  Greek  (1899). 

Clark — Harmony  of  the  Gospels  in  the  Authorized  Ver¬ 
sion  (1892). 

Finney-— Huck’s  Synopsis  of  the  First  Three  Gospels 
(1909). 

Gardiner — A  Harmony  of  the  Four  Gospels  in  Greek 
(1873). 

Heineke — Synopse  der  drei  ersten  Kan.  Evangelien  mit 
Parallelen  aus  dem  Joh.  Ev.  (1898). 

Hill — The  Earliest  Life  of  Christ  ever  compiled  from 
the  Four  Gospels,  Being  the  Diatessaron  of  Tatian 
(1894). 

Huck — Synopse  der  drei  ersten  Evangelien.  4  Aufl. 
(1910). 

Kerr — A  Harmony  of  the  Gospels  in  the  American  Stand¬ 
ard  Version  (1903). 

Larfeld — Griechische  Synopse  der  4  neut.  Evangelien 
(1912). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — A  Harmony  of  the  Gospels  for 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  109 

Students  of  the  Life  of  Christ  (1922).  Second  Edi¬ 
tion  (1923). 

Robinson-Riddle — A  Harmony  of  the  Gospels  in  Greek 
(1885). 

Sharman — Records  of  the  Life  of  Jesus  (1917). 

Stevens  and  Burton — A  Harmony  of  the  Gospels  for 
Historical  Study  in  the  Revised  Version.  Tenth  edi¬ 
tion  (1910). 

Van  Kirk — A  Source  Book  for  the  Life  of  Christ 
(1919). 

Wieseler — Chronological  Synopsis  of  the  Gospel  History 
(1877). 

Wright — A  Synopsis  of  the  Gospels  in  Greek  (1903). 

IV.  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 

A  Small  Selection  from  the  Enormous  Literature 

1.  Bibliographies  and,  Criticism  of  Literature  on  the  Life 
of  Christ 

Anstey — Modern  Lives  of  Christ  (1895). 

Ayres — Jesus  Christ  Our  Lord.  An  English  Bibliog¬ 
raphy  of  Christology  Comprising  over  Five  Thousand 
Titles  Annotated  and  Classified  (1906). 

Conybeare — History  of  New  Testament  Criticism.  Is¬ 
sued  for  the  Rationalist  Press  Association  (1910). 

Fant — Die  Christologie  seit  Schleiermacher,  ihre  Gesch- 
ichte  und  ihre  Begriindung  (1912). 

Sanday — The  Life  of  Christ  in  Recent  Research  (1907). 

Sanday — Christologies  Ancient  and  Modern  (1910). 

Schweitzer — Von  Reimarus  zu  Wrede  (1906). 

Schweitzer— The  Quest  of  the  Historical  Jesus.  A 
Critical  Study  of  Its  Progress  from  Reimarus  to 
Wrede  (1910). 

Wabnitz — Histoire  de  la  vie  de  Jesus  (1906). 

Weinel — Jesus  im  neunszehnten  Jahrhundert.  2  Aufl. 

(1906). 


110  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Weinel — Jesus  in  the  Nineteenth  Century  and  After 
(1914). 

See  further  lists  in  the  various  lives  of  Christ,  in  the 
Bible  dictionaries,  and  in  the  New  Testament  bibli¬ 
ographies,  in  particular  Hastings’  Dictionary  of 
Christ  and  the  Gospels. 

2.  Introductory  Problems 

Anthony — Introduction  to  the  Life  of  Christ  (1896). 

Barth — Die  Hauptprobleme  des  Lebens  Jesu.  3  Aufl. 
(1907). 

Bauenfeind— Die  literarische  Form  des  Evangeliums 
(1915). 

Briggs — New  Light  on  the  Life  of  Jesus  (1904). 

Bultman— Die  Geschichte  der  synoptischen  Tradition 
(1921). 

Burkitt — The  Earliest  Sources  for  the  Life  of  Jesus 
(1910). 

Butler — How  to  Study  the  Life  of  Christ  (1900). 

Caspari — Chronological  and  Geographical  Introduction 
to  the  Life  of  Christ  (1869). 

Delff — Die  Geschichte  d.  Rabbi  Jesus  von  Nazareth 
(1889). 

Dibelius — Die  Formgeschichte  des  Evangeliums  (1919). 

Hill — Introduction  to  the  Life  of  Christ  (1911). 

Hodge — Historical  Atlas  and  Chronology  of  the  Life  of 
Christ  (1899). 

Holtzmann,  O. — Die  Hauptprobleme  der  Leben-Jesu 
Forschung  (1906). 

J ulicher — Neue  Linien  in  der  Kritik  der  evangelischen 
Ueberlieferung  (1906). 

Liberty — The  Political  Relations  of  Christ’s  Ministry 
(1916). 

Meyer,  E. — Ursprung  und  Anfange  des  Christentums 
(1921—). 

Miller — Our  Knowledge  of  Christ  (1914). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


111 


Mommert — Zur  Chronologie  des^Lebens  Jesu  (1909). 

Reville — Jesus  de  Nazareth:  Etudes  critiques  sur  les 
antecedents  de  l’histoire  evangelique  et  la  vie  de 
Jesus.  Two  volumes  (1897).  Second  edition  of 
Vol.  I.  (1906). 

Robinson— -Study  of  the  Saviour  in  the  Newer  Light 
(1898). 

Sanday — The  Sacred  Sites  of  the  Gospels  (1903). 

Schmidt,  K.  L. — Der  Rahmen  der  Geschichte  Tesu 
(1919). 

Soden — Die  wichtigsten  Fragen  im  Leben  Jesu.  2  Aufl. 
(1909). 

Spitta — Streitfragen  der  Geschichte  Jesu  (1907). 

Wernle — The  Sources  of  Our  Knowledge  of  Jesus 
(1907). 

Westcott — Introduction  to  the  Study  of  the  Gospels 
(1887). 

Wieseler — Chronological  Synopsis  to  the  Gospel  His¬ 
tory  (1877). 

3.  Exhaustive  Treatises  on  the  Life  of  Christ 

Andrews — Life  of  Christ.  New  edition  (1892). 

Beyschlag — Das  Leben  Jesu.  Two  volumes  (1893). 

Bovon — Vie  de  Jesus  (1894). 

Edersheim — The  Life  and  Times  of  Jesus  the  Messiah. 
Third  edition.  Two  volumes  (1886). 

Ewald — History  of  Christ  and  His  Times  (1865). 

Farrar — Life  of  Christ.  Two  volumes  (1874). 

Geikie — The  Life  and  Words  of  Christ.  Two  volumes 
(1879). 

Hanna — Our  Lord’s  Life  on  Earth.  Six  volumes 
(1876). 

Lepsius — Das  Leben  Jesu.  2  Bde  (1917,  1918). 

Noesgen — Geschichte  Jesu  Christi  (1891). 

Papini — The  Life  of  Christ.  Translation  from  the  Ital¬ 
ian  (1923). 


112  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 

Patterson-Smyth — A  People’s  Life  of  Christ  (1920). 
Pressense — Jesus  Christ:  His  Times,  Life,  and  Work 
(1879). 

Schlatter — Die  Geschichte  der  Christus  (1920). 

Smith,  D.- — In  the  Days  of  His  Flesh.  Tenth  edition 
(1915). 

Weiss,  B. — The  Life  of  Christ.  Second  edition.  Three 
volumes  (1909). 

Wernle — Jesus  (1916). 


'4.  Handbooks 

Anderson,  F.  L. — The  Man  of  Nazareth  (1914). 
Barton — Jesus  of  Nazareth  (1922). 

Bennett — The  Life  of  Christ  according  to  St.  Mark 
(1907). 

Campbell — The  Life  of  Christ  (1921). 

Davis — The  Story  of  the  Nazarene  (1904). 

Dawson — The  Man  Christ  Jesus  (1901). 

Drury — The  Ministry  of  Our  Lord  (1911). 

Ellicott — Historical  Lectures  on  the  Life  of  Christ 
(1869). 

Fairbairn — Studies  in  the  Life  of  Christ.  New  edition 
(1892). 

Garvie — Studies  in  the  Inner  Life  of  Jesus  (1907). 
Glover — The  Jesus  of  History  (1917). 

Good — The  Jesus  of  Our  Fathers  (1923). 

Headlam — The  Life  and  Teachings  of  Jesus  Christ 
(1922). 

Hill— The  Life  of  Christ  (1917). 

Holdsworth — The  Christ  of  the  Gospels  (1911). 

Kent — Life  and  Teachings  of  Jesus  (1913). 

Lees — The  Life  of  Christ  (1920). 

Loofs — Wer  war  Jesus  Christus  (1916). 

Parker — Ecce  Deus  (1875). 

Rhees — The  Life  of  Jesus  (1900). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


113 


Robertson,  A.  T. — Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Jesus.  Popu¬ 
lar  edition  (1923). 

Robertson,  J.  A. — The  Spiritual  Pilgrimage  of  Jesus. 
Fifth  edition  (1922). 

Robinson — St.  Mark’s  Life  of  Jesus  (1923). 

Sanday — Outlines  of  the  Life  of  Christ.  Second  edition 
(1908). 

Seel  ye — Ecce  Homo.  New  edition  (1895). 

Stalker — Life  of  Christ  (1881).  Many  editions  since. 
Stewart — The  Life  of  Christ. 

Watson — Life  of  the  Master  (1900). 

Whyte — The  Walk  and  Conversation  of  Jesus  Christ 
(1906). 

Wilson — The  Christ  That  We  Forget  (1917). 

5.  Very  Radical  Works 

Bousset — Jesus  (1906). 

Bousset — Kurios  Christos  (1914). 

Gilbert — Jesus  (1912). 

Holtzmann,  O. — The  Life  of  Jesus  (1904).  Christos. 
2  Aufl.  (1915). 

Keim — The  History  of  Jesus  of  Nazara.  Six  volumes 
(1876-83).  Jesus  von  Nazara.  2  Bde  (1872). 
Martin,  A.  W. — The  Life  of  Jesus  (1913). 

Neumann — Jesus  (1906). 

Peleiderer — Christian  Origins  (1906). 

Renan — The  Life  of  Jesus.  Twenty-third  edition 
(1896). 

Schmidt,  N. — The  Prophet  of  Nazareth  (1905). 
Schmidt,  P.  W. — Die  Geschichte  Jesu  (1904). 

Stapfer — Jesus  Christ.  Three  volumes  (1898). 

Strauss — The  Life  of  Jesus  Critically  Examined. 

Translation  from  fourth  German  edition  (1898). 
Van  Norden — Jesus  (1906). 

Williamson — The  Life  and  Times  of  Jesus  the  Christ 
(1912). 


114  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


6.  Jesus  Treated  as  a  Paranoiac 

Bundy — The  Psychic  Health  of  Jesus  (1922). 

Hall,  G.  Stanley— Jesus  Christ  in  the  Light  of  Psy¬ 
chology  (1917). 

Hitchcock— The  Psychology  of  Jesus. 

Holtzmann,  O. — War  Jesus  Ekstatiker?  (1903). 
Jaeger— 1st  Jesus  Christus  ein  suggestions-therapeut 
gewesen  (1918). 

Loops— What  Is  the  Truth  about  Jesus  Christ  (1913). 
Schaefer- — Jesus  in  psychiatrischer  Beleuchtung  (1910). 
Werner— Die  psychische  Gesundheit  Jesu  (1908). 

7.  The  Historicity  of  Jesus 

Bornemann — Jesus  als  Problem  (1909). 

Bugge — -Das  Christus-Mysterium  (1915). 

Case — The  Historicity  of  Jesus  (1912). 

Conybeare — The  Historical  Christ  (1914). 

Dibelius — Recent  Pamphlet  Lit.  on  the  subject  in  The- 
olog.  Literaturzeitung  1910,  No.  10. 

Drews— The  Christ  Myth  (1911). 

Drews— Die  Zeugnisse  fur  die  Geschichtlichkeit  Jesu 

(1911). 

Forrest — The  Christ  of  History  and  Experience 
(1897). 

Greer— The  Historical  Christ  (1890). 

Hauck— -Hat  Jesus  gelebt?  (1910). 

Hendrix— If  I  Had  Not  Come  (1916). 

Jensen— Moses,  Jesus,  Paulus.  2  Aufl.  (1909). 

Juli cher— Hat  Jesus  gelebt?  (1910). 

Kalthoff— Das  Christus-Problem  (1902). 

Kalthoff — Die  Enstehung  des  Christentums  (1904). 
Keim — Der  Historische  Christus  (1867). 
Klostermann— Die  neuesten  Angriffe  auf  die  Geschicht¬ 
lichkeit  Jesu. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


115 


Lacey — The  Historic  Christ  (1905). 

Melhorn — Wahrheit  und  Dichtung  im  Leben  Jesu.  2 
Aufl.  (1919). 

Piepenbring — Jesus  Historique  (1909).  New  ed. 
(1922). 

Riegel  and  Jordan — Simon,  Son  of  Man  (1917). 
Robertson,  J.  M. — Christianity  and  Mythology  (1900). 
Robertson,  J.  M. — Pagan  Christs  (1903). 

Robertson,  J.  M. — The  Historical  Jesus  (1916). 
Robertson,  J.  M. — The  Jesus  Problem  (1917). 
Rossington — Did  Jesus  Really  Live?  (1911). 
Schmiedel — Jesus  in  Modern  Criticism  (1907). 

Seitz — Christus.  Zeignisse  aus  dem  Altertum  (1896). 
Simpson — The  Fact  of  Christ  (1900). 

Smith,  D. — The  Historic  Jesus  (1912). 

Smith,  W.  B. — Der  vor-Christliche  Jesus  (1906). 
Smith,  W.  B. — The  Pre-Christian  Jesus  (1906). 

Soden — Hat  Jesus  gelebt?  (1910). 

Soden — Has  Jesus  Lived?  (1911). 

Thorburn — Jesus  the  Christ:  Historical  or  Mythical? 
(1912). 

Thorburn — The  Historical  Jesus  (1916). 

Troeltscpi — Die  Bedeutung  der  Geschichtlichkeit  Jesus 
fur  den  Glauben  (1911). 

Weinel — 1st  das  “liberate”  Jesusbild  widerlegt?  (1910). 
Weiss,  J. — Jesus  von  Nazareth,  Mythus  oder  Geschichte? 
(1910). 

Williamson — The  Times  and  the  Teaching  of  Jesus 
Christ  (1912). 

8.  The  Jesus  or  Christ  ( Jesus  or  Paul )  Controversy 

Bacon — Jesus  and  Paul  (1921). 

Breitenstein — Jesus  et  Paul  (1908). 

Carpenter — The  Historical  Jesus  and  the  Theological 
Christ  (1912). 

Drescher — Das  Leben  Jesu  bei  Paulus  (1900). 


116  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Dunkmann — Der  historische  Jesus,  der  mythologische 
Christus,  und  Jesus  der  Christus  (1910). 

Feine — Jesus  Christus  und  Paulus  (1902). 

Goguel— -L’apotre  Paul  et  Jesus-Christ  (1904). 

Heitmuller — Jesus  und  Paulus  (1915). 

Hibbert  Journal  Supplement — Jesus  or  Christ.  (Re¬ 
print  for  January,  1909). 

Holtzmann,  H. — Paulus  als  Zeuge  wider  die  Christus- 
mythe  von  Arthur  Drews  (Die  Christliche  Welt,  17 
Feb.,  1910). 

J ulicher — Paulus  und  Jesus  (1910). 

Kaftan-— Jesus  und  Paulus  (1906). 

Knowling — Testimony  of  St.  Paul  to  Christ.  Second 
edition  (1911). 

Kolbing — Die  geistige  Einwirkung  der  Person  Jesus  auf 
Paulus  (1906). 

Meyer,  A. — Jesus  or  Paul  (1909). 

Reid — Jesus  the  Christ  and  Paul  the  Apostle  (1915). 

Resch — Der  Paulinismus  und  die  Logia  Jesu  (1904). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — Paul  the  Interpreter  of  Christ  (1921). 

Schmidt,  F. — Der  Christus  des  Glaubens  und  der  Jesus 
der  Geschichte. 

Schmidt,  H. — Der  paulinische  Christus  (1867). 

Schweitzer — The  Quest  of  the  Historical  Jesus  (1900). 

Scott,  C.  A. — Tesus  and  Paul.  In  Cambr.  Biblical  Essays 
(1909). 

Weinel — Jesus  im  neunzehnten  Jahrhundert  (1906). 

Weiss,  J. — Paul  and  Jesus  (1909). 

Wernle — Jesus  und  Paulus  (1915). 

Wustmann — Jesus  und  Paulus  (1907). 

Wynne — Fragmentary  Records  of  Jesus  of  Nazareth 
from  the  Letters  of  a  Contemporary  (1887). 

9.  The  Person  of  Christ  ( Christology ,  Kenosis,  Son  of 
Man,  Son  of  God  or  Humanity  and  Deity  of  Jesus ) 

Abbott— The  Message  of  the  Son  of  Man  (1909). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  117 

Abbott — The  Son  of  Man:  Contributions  to  the  Study 
of  the  Thoughts  of  Jesus  (1910). 

Alexander,  Gross — The  Son  of  Man  (1901). 

Austin,  Mary — The  Man  Jesus  (1915). 

Bacon — Jesus  the  Son  of  God  (1911). 

Bailey — -Does  Hellenism  Contribute  Constituent  Ele¬ 
ments  to  Paul’s  Christology?  (1905). 

Baker — Christ  and  the  Pharisees  (1919). 

Baldensperger — Das  Selbstbewusstsein  Jesu.  2  Aufl. 
(1892). 

Ball — The  Kenotic  Theory  (1898). 

Bousset — Jesus  der  Herr  (1916). 

Briggs — The  Incarnation  of  Our  Lord  (1902). 

Bruce — The  Humiliation  of  Christ  (1892). 

Bruckner — Die  Entstehung  der  paulinischen  Christolo- 
gie  (1903). 

Bushnell — The  Character  of  Jesus  (1884). 
Cairncross— -The  Appeal  of  Jesus  (1916). 

Chapman — The  Consciousness  of  Christ  (1922). 

Cooke — The  Incarnation  and  Recent  Criticism  (1907). 
Craig — Jesus  as  He  Was  and  Is  (1914). 

Decker — Christ’s  Experience  of  God  (1914). 

Denney — Jesus  and  the  Gospel  (1908). 

Dorner — History  of  the  Development  of  the  Doctrine 
and  the  Person  of  Christ.  Five  volumes  (1878). 
Dougall  and  Emmett — The  Lord  of  Thought  (1923). 
Drummond — Via,  Veritas,  Vita  (1894). 

Du  Bose,  W.  P. — The  Gospel  in  the  Gospels  (1906). 

Du  Bose,  H.  M. — The  Consciousness  of  Jesus  (1917). 
Durell — The  Self-revelation  of  Our  Lord  (1910). 
Enlow — A  Jewish  View  of  Jesus  (1920). 

Fairbairn — The  Place  of  Christ  in  Modern  Theology 
(1893). 

Fant — Die  Christologie  seit  Schleiermacher  (1912). 
Fieberg — Der  Menschensohn  (1901). 

Findlay,  J.  A. — Jesus  as  They  Saw  Him  (1920). 
Forrest — The  Christ  of  History  and  Experience  (1897). 


118  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Forrest — The  Authority  of  Christ  (1906). 

Forsyth— The  Person  and  Place  of  Jesus  Christ  (1909). 

Frovig — Das  Selbstbewusstsein  Jesu  (1918). 

Garvie — Studies  in  the  Inner  Life  of  Jesus  (1907). 

Gibson — Jesus  Christ  the  Unique  Revealer  of  God 
(1915). 

Gifford — The  Incarnation  (1897). 

Glover — Jesus  in  the  Experience  of  Men  (1921). 

Gordan,  G.  A. — The  Christ  of  To-day. 

Gore- — The  Incarnation  of  the  Son  of  God  (1891). 

Granbery — An  Outline  of  N.  T.  Christology  (1909). 

Gunther — Die  Entwickelung  der  Lehre  Person  Christi 
im  XIX  Jahrhundert  (1911). 

Headlam — The  Life  and  Teachings  of  Jesus  Christ 
(1923). 

Hitchcock — The  Psychology  of  Jesus. 

Hoffmann — Das  Selbstbewusstsein  Jesu  (1904). 

Holdsworth — The  Christ  of  the  Gospels  (1911). 

Holtzmann,  H.  J. — Das  Messianische  Bewusstsein  Jesu 
(1907). 

Hoyt — The  Teaching  of  Jesus  Concerning  His  Own  Per¬ 
son  (1907). 

Jefferson — The  Character  of  Jesus  (1908). 

Kennedy — The  Self-Revelation  of  Jesus  Christ. 

Klausner — Jesus  of  Nazareth,  His  Life,  His  Times,  His 
Teachings.  By  a  Jew,  in  Hebrew  (1922). 

Kuhl — Das  Bewusstsein  Jesu  (1908). 

Lepin — Jesus  Messie  et  Fils  de  Dieu.  Third  edition 
(1908). 

Liddon— Our  Lord’s  Divinity  (1889). 

Lietzmann — Der  Menschensohn  (1896). 

Loofs — What  Is  the  Truth  about  Jesus  Christ?  (1913). 

Lucas — The  Fifth  Gospel.  The  Pauline  Interpretation 
of  Christ. 

Lutgert- — Johannes  Christologie. 

Mackintosh — The  Doctrine  of  the  Person  of  Jesus 
Christ  (1912). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  119 

MacNeill — The  Christology  of  the  Ep.  to  the  Hebrews 
(1914). 

Micklem — The  Galilean.  2d  ed.  (1921). 

Muller — Our  Lord :  Belief  in  the  Deity  of  Christ  (1907). 

Mullins — The  Authority  of  Christ  (in  Freedom  and 
Authority  in  Religion)  (1913). 

Nicoll — The  Church’s  One  Foundation:  Christ  and  Re¬ 
cent  Criticism  (1902). 

Nolloth — The  Person  of  Our  Lord  and  Recent  Thought 
(1908). 

Ottley — The  Doctrine  of  the  Incarnation  (1896). 

Parker — Ecce  Deus  (1875). 

Paulus — Der  Christus-Problem  der  Gegenwart  (1922). 

Peabody — The  Character  of  Christ  (1904). 

Peters — The  Master  (1911). 

Pfleiderer — The  Early  Christian  Conception  of  Christ 
(1905). 

Powell — The  Principle  of  the  Incarnation  (1896). 

Relton — A  Study  in  Christology  (1919). 

Reville — History  of  the  Dogma  of  the  Deity  of  Christ. 
Third  edition  (1905). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — The  Pharisees  and  Jesus  (1920). 

Ross,  G.  A.  J. — The  Universality  of  Jesus. 

Sanday — Christologies :  Ancient  and  Modern  (1910). 

Schmidt,  N. — Son  of  Man  and  Son  of  God  in  Modern 
Theology  (1904). 

Schurer — Das  Messianische  Selbstbewusstsein  Jesu 
Christi  (1903). 

Schweitzer — The  Quest  of  the  Historical  Jesus  (1910). 

Scott — Dominus  Noster  (1918). 

Seeberg — Christi  Person  und  Werk  nach  der  Lehre 
seiner  Jiinger  (1910). 

Seeley — Ecce  Homo  (1866). 

Somerville — St.  Paul’s  Conception  of  Christ  (1897). 

Stalker — The  Christology  of  Jesus  (1901). 

Streatfield — The  Self-Interpretation  of  Jesus  Christ 
(1907). 


120  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Temple — The  Boyhood  Consciousness  of  Christ  (1922). 
Torrey,  R.  A. — The  Real  Christ  (1920). 

Van  Oosterzee — The  Person  and  Work  of  the  Re¬ 
deemer  (1886). 

Voelter  —  Die  Menschensohnfrage  neu  untersucht 
(1916). 

Vonier — The  Personality  of  Christ  (1915). 

Walker — The  Spirit  and  the  Incarnation  (1900). 
Warfield- — The  Lord  of  Glory  (1907). 

Weiss,  J. — Christ:  The  Beginnings  of  Dogma  (1911). 
Wetter — Der  Sohn  Gottes  (1916). 

Wilkinson,  W.  C. — -Concerning  Jesus  Christ  the  Son  of 
God  (1916). 

Wrede — Das  Messiahgeheimnis  in  den  Evangelien 
(1907). 

Young-— Our  Lord  and  Master  (1902). 

10.  Special  Aspects 

For  lists  on  Virgin  Birth,  John  the  Baptist,  Baptism, 
Temptation,  Sermon  on  the  Mount,  Lord’s  Prayer, 
Trial,  Crucifixion,  Resurrection,  Ascension,  etc., 
see  lessons  on  those  topics. 

Aitken — The  Christ  of  the  Men  of  Art  (1914). 
Anthony — The  Method  of  Jesus  (1900). 

Bernard — The  Mental  Characteristics  of  Christ  (1888). 
Bischoff — Jesus  und  die  Rabbinen  (1905). 

Bishop — Jesus  the  Worker  (1910). 

Blaikie — Glimpses  of  the  Inner  Life  of  Our  Lord 
(1876). 

Brooks — The  Influence  of  Jesus  (1879). 

Brocker — Die  Wahrheit  fiber  Jesus  (1911). 

Broadus — Jesus  of  Nazareth  (1889). 

Bruce — The  Training  of  the  Twelve.  Fourth  edition 
(1894). 

Cairns — Christ  the  Central  Evidence  of  Christianity. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


121 


Cameron — The  Renascence  of  Jesus  (1915). 

Carpenter — The  Witness  of  the  Influence  of  Christ 
(1905). 

Farrar — The  Life  of  Lives  (1900). 

Farrar — The  Life  of  Christ  as  Represented  in  Art. 
Gibson — Jesus  the  Supreme  Revealer  of  God  (1915). 
Griffith-Jones — The  Master  and  His  Methods  (1902). 
Grist — The  Historic  Christ  in  the  Faith  of  To-day 
(1911). 

Hausrath — Jesus  und  die  neutest.  Schrif tsteller  ( 1908) . 
Jordan — Jesus  und  die  modernen  Jesusbilder  (1909). 
Latham — Pastor  Pastorum  (1890). 

Law — The  Emotions  of  Jesus  (1915). 

Leighton — Jesus  Christ  and  the  Civilization  of  To-day 
(1907). 

Matheson — Studies  in  the  Portrait  of  the  Messiah 
(1900). 

Matheson — St.  John’s  Portrait  of  Christ  (1910). 
McDowell — The  School  of  Christ  (1910). 

Morgan — Crises  of  the  Christ  (1910). 

Moule — Scenes  in  the  Life  of  Our  Lord  (1909). 
Myers,  M. — The  Sinlessness  of  Jesus  (1907). 

Parker — The  Inner  Life  of  Christ.  Three  volumes 
(1882). 

Parkin — The  New  Testament  Portrait  of  Jesus  (1908). 
Robertson,  A.  T. — The  Pharisees  and  Jesus  (1919). 
Robertson,  J.  A. — The  Spiritual  Pilgrimage  of  Jesus 
(1917). 

Robinson,  C.  H. — Studies  in  the  Character  of  Christ 
(1907). 

Selbie — Aspects  of  Christ  (1909). 

Slattery — The  Master  of  the  World  (1906). 

Speer — The  Man  Christ  Jesus  (1896). 

Stalker — Imago  Christi.  Seventh  edition  (1889). 

Tissot — The  Life  of  Our  Lord  Jesus  Christ.  Profusely 
Illustrated.  Third  edition  (1899). 

Thomas  a  Kempis — The  Imitation  of  Christ. 


122  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 

Ullmann — The  Sinlessness  of  Jesus  (1863). 
Warschauer — Jesus:  Seven  Questions. 

Wendling — The  Man  of  Galilee  (1908). 

^Wilson — Contrasts  in  the  Character  of  Christ  (1916). 

11.  The  Miracles  of  Jesus 

Abbott — New  Testament  Miracles. 

Argyle — Duke  of,  The  Reign  of  Law. 

Arnold,  M. — Literature  and  Dogma  (1898). 

Ballard — Miracles  of  Unbelief  (1904). 

Belcher— Our  Lord’s  Miracles  of  Healing  (1872). 
Best— Beyond  the  Natural  Order  (1908). 

Beth — The  Miracles  of  Jesus  (1907). 

Bowne — The  Immanence  of  God  (1905). 

Brewer — A  Dictionary  of  Miracles  (1897). 

Bruce — The  Miraculous  Element  in  the  Gospels  (1892). 
Burton— Christ’s  Acted  Parables  (1893). 

Bushnell — Nature  and  the  Supernatural. 

Butler,  Jos. — Analogy  of  Religion  (1896). 

Cairns — Christ  the  Central  Evidence  of  Christianity. 
Cooke — The  Credentials  of  Science  the  Warrant  of  Faith 
(1893). 

Davies — The  Miracles  of  Jesus  (1913). 

Duff  and  Allen — Psychic  Research  and  Gospel 
Miracles  (1902). 

Fiebig — Jiidische  Wundergeschichte  d.  neut.  Zeitalter 

c1911). 

Gilbert — The  Miracles  in  St.  John’s  Gospel  and  Their 
Teaching  (1922). 

Gordon— Religion  and  Miracle  (1909) 

Gore — Bampton  Lectures  (1891). 

Habershon — Study  of  the  Miracles  (1910). 

Headlam— The  Miracles  of  the  New  Testament  (1915). 
Hume — Enquiry  Concerning  the  Human  Understanding. 
New  edition  (1896). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  123 

Hutchinson — -Our  Lord’s  Signs  in  St.  John’s  Gospel 

(1892). 

Huxley — Some  Controverted  Questions  (1892). 
Huxley-— Science  and  Christian  Tradition  (1896). 
Illingworth — The  Divine  Immanence  (1898). 
Illingworth — Gospel  Miracles  (1915). 

Laidlaw — The  Miracles  of  Our  Lord  (1892). 

Lang — The  Miracles  of  Jesus  (1920). 

Lyttleton — The  Relation  between  Religion  and  Science. 
May — Miracles  and  Myths  of  the  New  Testament 
(1909). 

Micklem — Miracles  and  the  New  Psychology  (1923). 
Mozley- — On  Miracles  (1865). 

M ulli n s — Why  Christianity  is  True  (1905). 

Newman,  J.  H. — On  Miracles  (1870). 

Rainy,  Orr,  and  Dods — The  Supernatural  in  Christian¬ 
ity  (1894). 

Saintyves — Le  discernement  du  miracle  (1909). 
Steinmeyer — The  Miracles  of  Our  Lord  (1875). 

Taylor,  W.  M. — The  Gospel  Miracles  in  their  Relation 
to  Christ  and  Christianity  (1880). 

Taylor,  W.  M. — The  Miracles  of  Our  Lord  and  Saviour 
(1900). 

Thompson — Miracles  in  the  New  Testament  (1911). 
Traub — Die  Wunder  im  Neuen  Testament  (1905). 
Trench — Notes  on  the  Miracles  of  Our  Lord.  New 
edition  (1902). 

Warfield — Counterfeit  Miracles  (1918). 

Warrington — Can  We  Believe  in  Miracles?  (1871). 
Wendland — Miracles  and  Christianity. 

Westcott — Characteristics  of  the  Gospel  Miracles 
(1859). 

White,  A.  D. — Warfare  of  Science  with  Religion  (1897). 
Wright — The  Finger  of  God  (1903). 

See  Bible  dictionaries  and  magazines. 


124  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


12.  The  Parables  of  Jesus 

Arnot — The  Parables  of  Our  Lord  (1872). 

Beyschlag — Die  Gleichnisse  des  Herrn  (1875). 
Bourdillon — The  Parables  of  Our  Lord. 

Browne — The  Parables  of  the  Gospels  (1915). 

Bruce— -The  Parabolic  Teaching  of  Christ  (1892). 
Bugge — Die  Haupt-Parabeln  Jesu  (1903). 

Calderwood — Parables  of  Our  Lord  (1880). 

Dods — The  Parables  of  Our  Lord  (1895). 

Drummond — The  Parabolic  Teaching  of  Christ  (1872). 
Fiebig — Altjiidische  Gleichnisse  und  die  Gleichnisse  Jesu. 
Fiebig — Die  Gleichnisse  Jesu  im  Lichte  der  rabbin. 

Gleichnissen  (1912). 

Goebel- — The  Parables  of  Jesus  (1884). 

Habershon — A  Study  of  the  Parables  (1904). 

Hubbard — The  Parables  (1907). 

Julicher — Die  Gleichnisreden  Jesu  (1910). 

Koch — Die  Gleichnisse  Jesu  (1910). 

Lang — Thoughts  on  Some  of  the  Parables  of  Jesus 
(1905). 

Lisco — On  the  Parables  (1850). 

Lithgow — The  Parabolic  Gospel  (1914). 

Miner — The  Parabolic  Teaching  of  Christ  (1920). 
Murray — Jesus  and  His  Parables  (1914). 

Resker — Our  Lord’s  Illustrations  (1899). 

Robinson — The  Parables  of  Jesus  in  Their  Relation  to 
His  Ministry  (1921). 

Salmond — The  Parables  of  Our  Lord. 

Spanuth — Die  Gleichnisse  Jesu  (1906). 

Swete — Parables  of  the  Kingdom  (1920). 

Tamm — Der  Realismus  Jesu  in  seinen  Gleichnissen 
(1886). 

Taylor — The  Parables  of  Our  Saviour  (1886). 

Thomson — The  Parables  and  their  Home  (1895). 
Trench — Notes  on  the  Parables  of  Our  Lord.  New  edi¬ 
tion  (1902). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


125 


Weinel — Die  Gleichnisse  Jesu.  2  Aufl.  (1904). 

Young — The  Illustrative  Teachings  of  Jesus  (1915). 

See  Bible  dictionaries  and  magazines. 

13.  The  Teaching  of  Jesus 

Besides  general  works  on  Biblical  Theology  and  Bible 
dictionaries. 

(a)  Teaching  as  a  Whole. 

Abbott — The  Message  of  the  Son  of  Man  (1899). 
Adamson — Studies  in  the  Mind  of  Christ  (1898). 
Beardslee — Teacher-Training  with  the  Master  Teacher 
(1903). 

Bischoff — Jesus  und  die  Rabbinen  (1905). 

Bond — The  Master  Preacher  (1910). 

Bousset — Jesu  Predigt  im  ihren  Gegensatz  zum  Juden- 
tum  (1892). 

Bruce — The  Galilean  Gospel  (1893). 

Brun — Jesu  Evangelium  (1917). 

Burrell — The  Wonderful  Teacher  (1902). 

Castor — Matthew’s  Sayings  of  Jesus  (1918). 

Clarke — The  Ideal  of  Jesus  (1911). 

Dalman — The  Words  of  Jesus  (1898). 

Dalman — Jesus-Jeschua  (Jesus  und  Judenthum,  1922). 
D’Arcy — Ruling  Ideas  of  Our  Lord  (1901). 

Deane — Rabboni  (1921). 

Decker — Christ’s  Experience  of  God  (1915). 

Denney — Jesus  and  the  Gospel  (1908). 

Du  Bose — The  Gospel  in  the  Gospels  (1904). 

Evans,  M.  G. — What  Jesus  Taught  According  to  the 
Gospels  (1922). 

Fullkrug — Jesus  and  the  Pharisees  (1904). 

Garvie — Studies  in  the  Inner  Life  of  Jesus  (1907). 
Gibson — Christianity  to  Christ  (1885). 

Gilbert — The  Revelation  of  Jesus  (1899). 

Graves — What  Did  Jesus  Teach?  (1919). 


1 26  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Hall — The  Messages  of  Jesus  (1901). 

Horne — Jesus  the  Master  Teacher  (1920). 

Horton — The  Teaching  of  Jesus  (1895). 

Ihmels — Das  Evangelium  von  Jesus  Christus  (1911). 
Jackson — The  Table  Talk  of  Jesus  (1903). 

Jackson — The  Teaching  of  Jesus  (1903). 

King — The  Theology  of  Christ  (1903). 

Knox— The  Gospel  of  Jesus  (1909). 

Lancaster — The  Creed  of  Christ  (1905). 

Mackintosh — Rabbi  Jesus  (1911). 

Maclaren,  Ian — The  Mind  of  the  Master  (1896). 
Macfarland — Jesus  and  the  Prophets  (1905). 
McClelland — The  Mind  of  Christ  (1909). 

McGee — Jesus  the  World’s  Teacher  (1907). 

Meyer — Le  Christianisme  du  Christ. 

Montefiore — Some  Elements  in  the  Religious  Teachings 
of  Jesus  (1910). 

Picton — The  Religion  of  Jesus  (1893). 

Robertson,  James — The  Teaching  of  Our  Lord  (1900). 
Robertson,  A.  T. — Keywords  in  the  Teaching  of  Jesus 
(1906). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — The  Pharisees  and  Jesus  (1920). 
Schaeder — Das  Evangelium  Jesu  und  das  Evangelium 
von  Jesu  (1906). 

Schaefer — The  Supreme  Revelation.  Studies  in  the 
Synoptic  Teachings  of  Jesus  (1914). 

Schneider — Jesus  als  Philosoph  (1911). 

Seeberg — Das  Evangelium  Christi  (1905). 

Selwyn — The  Teaching  of  Christ  (1915). 

Skinner,  Charlotte — The  Master’s  Message  to  Women 
(1895). 

Smith — The  Teaching  of  Christ  in  John  (1904). 

Speer — The  Principles  of  Jesus  (1905). 

Stevens — The  Teaching  of  Jesus  (1901). 

Stier — The  Words  of  Jesus.  Eight  volumes  (1869). 
Swete — Studies  in  the  Teaching  of  Our  Lord  (1903). 
Tigert — Christianity  of  Christ  and  His  Apostles  (1905). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  127 

Walker,  W.  L. — The  Teaching  of  Christ  in  its  Present 
Appeal  (1904). 

Walker,  A.  H. — Christ's  Christianity  (1882). 
Weinstock — Jesus  the  Jew  (1902). 

Weiss,  J. — Predigt  Jesu. 

Wendt — The  Teaching  of  Jesus.  Two  volumes  (1892). 
Wunkhaus — Der  Humor  Jesu  (1909). 

(b)  The  Father  and  the  Holy  Spirit. 

Crane — The  Teaching  of  Jesus  Concerning  the  Holy 
Spirit  (1905). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — The  Teaching  of  Jesus  Concerning 
God  the  Father  (1904). 

Swete — The  Holy  Spirit  in  the  New  Testament  (1909). 
Walker — The  Spirit  and  the  Incarnation  (1900). 

(c)  Christ's  Idea  of  Himself. 

See  also  9. 

Baldensperger — Das  Selbstbewusstsein  Jesu.  2  Aufl. 
(1892). 

Beardslee — Christ's  Estimate  of  Himself. 

Bernard — The  Central  Teaching  of  Christ  (John  14-17) 
(1897). 

Durell — The  Self-Revelation  of  Our  Lord  (1910). 
Foster — Teaching  of  Jesus  Concerning  His  Own  Mission 
(1903). 

Fritzsche — Das  Berufsbewusstsein  Jesu  (1905). 

Frovig — Das  Selbstbewusstsein  Jesu  (1918). 

Hanel — Der  Schriftbegriff  Jesu  (1919). 

Hitchcock — The  Psychology  of  Jesus  (1907). 
Hoffmann — Das  Selbstbewusstsein  Jesu  (1904). 
Holtzmann,  H.  J. — Das  Messianische  Bewusstsein  Jesu 
(1907). 

Hoyt — Teaching  of  Jesus  Concerning  His  Own  Person 
(1907). 

Kennedy — The  Self-Revelation  of  Jesus  Christ. 

Kuhl — Das  Bewusstsein  Jesu  (1908). 


128  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Ross — The  Self-Portraiture  of  Jesus  (1904). 

Schurer — Das  Messianische  Selbstbewusstsein  Jesu 
Christi  (1903). 

Schwartzkopff — The  Prophecies  of  Jesus  Christ  Relat¬ 
ing  to  His  Death,  Resurrection,  Second  Coming  and 
Prophecy  Fulfilled  (1897). 

Stalker — The  Christology  of  Jesus  (1901). 

Stokes — What  Jesus  Christ  Thought  of  Himself  (1916). 

Voelter — Jesus  der  Menschensohn  oder  das  Berufs- 
bewusstsein  Jesu  (1914). 

Streatfield — The  Self -Interpretation  of  Jesus  Christ 
(1907). 

(d)  The  Kingdom  and  Eschatology. 

Atzberger — Die  Christliche  Eschatologie  (1890). 

Bartmann — Der  Himmelreich  und  sein  Konig  (1904). 

Boardman — The  Kingdom  of  God  (1893). 

Bruce — The  Kingdom  of  God  (1893). 

Candlish — The  Kingdom  of  God  (1884). 

Caven — Christ’s  Teaching  Concerning  Last  Things 
(1908). 

Chafer — The  Kingdom  in  History  and  Prophecy 
(1916). 

Dewick — Primitive  Christian  Eschatology  (1912). 

Dickey — The  Constructive  Revolution  of  Jesus. 

Dobschutz — The  Eschatology  of  the  Gospels  (1910). 

Durell — The  Self-revelation  of  Our  Lord  (1910). 

Emmet — Eschatological  Questions  in  the  Gospels  (1916). 

Erdman — The  Return  of  Christ  (1922). 

Gandier — The  Son  of  Man  Coming  in  His  Kingdom 
(1922). 

Goodspeed,  G.  S. — Israel’s  Messianic  Hope  to  the  Time 
of  Jesus  (1900). 

Hall — Eschatology  (1922). 

Haupt — Die  eschatologischen  Aussagen  Jesu  in  den  syn- 
optischen  Evangelien  (1895). 

Hogg — Christ’s  Message  of  the  Kingdom. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


129 


Hooke — Christ  and  the  Kingdom  of  God  (1917). 
Jackson — The  Eschatology  of  Jesus  (1913). 

Kolbing — Die  bleidende  Bedeutung  der  urchristlichen 
Eschatologie  (1907). 

Latimer — The  Eschatology  of  Jesus  (1913). 

Manson — -Christ’s  View  of  the  Kingdom. 

Mathews — The  Messianic  Hope  of  the  New  Testament 
(1905). 

Muirhead — The  Eschatology  of  Jesus  (1904). 
Oesterley — The  Doctrine  of  the  Last  Things  (1908). 
Oesterley — The  Apocalypse  of  Jesus  (1912). 
Robertson,  A. — Regnum  Dei  (1901). 

Ross,  J.  J. — Our  Glorious  Hope  (1922). 

Sanday — The  Life  of  Christ  in  Recent  Research  (1907). 
Schweitzer — The  Quest  of  the  Historical  Jesus  (1910). 
Scott,  E.  F. — The  Kingdom  and  the  Messiah  (1911). 
Sharman — The  Teaching  of  Jesus  about  the  Future,  ac¬ 
cording  to  the  Synoptic  Gospels  (1909). 

Stirling — Christ’s  Vision  of  the  Kingdom  of  Heaven 
(1913). 

Titus — Jesu  Lehre  vom  Reiche  Gottes  (1895). 

Vos — Teaching  of  Jesus  Concerning  the  Kingdom  and 
the  Church  (1903). 

Walker,  W.  L. — The  Cross  and  the  Kingdom  as  Re¬ 
vealed  by  Christ  Himself  in  the  Light  of  Evolution 
(1902). 

Weiffenbach — Die  Wiederkunftsgedanken  Jesu  (1873). 
Winstanley — Jesus  and  the  Future  (1913). 

Worsley — The  Apocalypse  of  Jesus  (1912). 

(e)  Ethical  and  Social  Problems. 

For  special  treatises  on  the  Sermon  on  the  Mount, 
see  lesson  on  that  subject. 

Bachmann — Die  Sittenlehre  Jesu  (1904). 

Briggs — The  Ethical  Teaching  of  Jesus  (1904). 

Cone — Rich  and  Poor  in  the  New  Testament  (1902). 
Flugel — Die  Sittenlehre  Jesu.  2  Aufl.  (1888). 


ISO  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 

Gardner,  C.  S. — The  Ethics  of  Jesus  and  Social  Progress 
(1914). 

Grimm — Die  Ethik  Jesu  (1903).  2  Aufl.  (1917). 

Hall — The  History  of  Ethics  Within  Organized  Chris¬ 
tianity  (1910). 

Herrmann — Die  sittlichen  Weisungen  Jesu  (1904). 

Herrmann — Faith  and  Morals  (1904). 

Jenks — Political  and  Social  Significance  of  the  Life  and 
Teaching  of  Jesus  (1906). 

Jennings — The  Social  Teaching  of  Jesus  (1915). 

Jones,  Griffith — The  Economics  of  Jesus. 

Jones,  J.  O. — Politics  of  the  Nazarene  (1901). 

King — The  Ethics  of  Jesus  (1910). 

Leighton — Jesus  Christ  and  the  Civilization  of  To-day 
(1907). 

Mathews — The  Social  Teaching  of  Jesus  (1897). 

Peabody — Jesus  and  the  Social  Question  (1901). 

Peabody — Jesus  Christ  and  the  Christian  Character 
(1905). 

Preisker — Die  Ethik  der  Evangelien  und  die  judische 
Apokalyptik  (1915). 

Rauschenbusch — The  Social  Principles  of  Jesus 
(1916). 

Sampey — The  Ethical  Teaching  of  Jesus  (1900). 

Savage — Jesus  and  Modern  Life  (1893). 

Stalker — The  Ethic  of  Jesus  (1909). 

Vedder — The  Gospel  of  Jesus  and  the  Problems  of 
Democracy  (1914). 

Zenos — The  Teaching  of  Jesus  Concerning  Christian 
Conduct  (1905). 

14.  Lives  of  Christ  for  Children 

Batchelor — Story  of  Jesus  Told  for  Little  Children 
(1905). 

Bird — Jesus  the  Carpenter  of  Nazareth  (1900). 

Blackall — Stories  about  Jesus  (1890). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


131 


Forbush — Boy’s  Life  of  Christ  (1905). 

Foster — The  Life  of  Jesus  Written  for  the  Young 
(1866). 

Geike — A  Short  Life  of  Christ.  New  edition  (1914). 
Hodges — When  the  King  Came  (1904). 

Newton,  R.  H.— The  Light  of  the  World  (1893). 
Robertson,  Ella  B. — The  Child’s  Bible  (1921). 
Sangster — The  Sweet  Story  of  Old  (1904). 

15.  Poems  about  Christ 

Arnold,  Edwin — The  Light  of  the  World  (1891). 
Chittenden — The  Pleroma.  A  Poem  of  the  Christ 
(1890). 

Ford,  C.  L. — Lyra  Christi.  Third  edition  (1892). 

Hoge,  P.  H. — The  Divine  Tragedy  (1905). 

Holland,  J.  G. — Christ  and  the  Twelve  (1876). 
Longfellow — The  Divine  Tragedy,  or  Christus. 
McDuff — The  Story  of  Jesus  in  Verse  (1893). 

Milton — Paradise  Regained. 

Montgomery,  Robert — Messiah. 

Wesley — The  Life  of  Our  Lord  Jesus  Christ  (1693). 

16.  Romances 

Anonymous — Philo-christus  (1878). 

Brooks — A  Son  of  Issachar  (1890). 

Burr — Aleph  the  Chaldsean ;  or,  The  Messiah  as  Seen 
from  Alexandria  (1891). 

Carus — The  Crown  of  Thorns  (1901). 

Clarke — Life  and  Times  of  Jesus  (1887). 

Corelli — Barabbas  (1893). 

Davis — When  Christ  Was  Here  (1905). 

Gardenhire — Lux  Crucis  (1904). 

Jacobs — As  Others  Saw  Him  (1895). 

Johnston,  Annie  Fellows — Joel,  A  Boy  of  Galilee 
(1896). 


132  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Kingsley — Titus,  A  Comrade  of  the  Cross  (1894). 

Moore — The  Brook  Kerith  (1916). 

Rhone — In  the  Days  of  the  Son  of  Man  (1903). 

Stout — Lacanus,  a  Friend  of  Christ  (1904). 

Sue — The  Silver  Cross;  or,  The  Carpenter  of  Nazareth 
(1898). 

Van  Dyke — The  Story  of  the  Other  Wise  Man  (1899). 

Wallace — Ben-Hur.  A  Tale  of  the  Christ  (1880). 

Ward,  Elizabeth  Phelps — The  Story  of  Jesus  Christ. 
Popular  edition  (1901). 

17.  N on-Scriptural  Accounts  of  Jesus 

Andrews — Apocryphal  Books  of  the  Old  and  New  Testa¬ 
ments  (1908). 

Barnes — Canonical  and  Uncanonical  Gospels  (1893). 

Bauer — Das  Leben  Jesu  im  Zeitalter  d.  neut.  Apokryphen 
(1909). 

Cowper — The  Apocryphal  Gospels  (1867). 

Donohoo— -Apocryphal  and  Legendary  Life  of  Christ 
(1903). 

Gould,  S.  Baring — Lost  and  Hostile  Gospels  (1901). 

Grenfell  and  Hunt — Logia  of  Jesus  (1897). 

Grenfell  and  Hunt — New  Sayings  of  Jesus  (1904). 

Griffenhoofe — The  Unwritten  Sayings  of  Christ 
(1903). 

Guerber— Legends  of  the  Virgin  and  Christ  (1896). 

Hackwood — Christ  Lore  (1907). 

Handmann — Das  Hebraer  Evangelium  (1888). 

Harris — The  Newly-Recovered  Gospel  of  St.  Peter 
(1893). 

Herford— Christianity  in  Talmud  and  Midrash  (1903). 

Hoennecke — Neutestamentliche  Apokryphen  (1904). 

Hone — Apocryphal  New  Testament  (1820). 

Horder — The  Newly-Found  Words  of  Jesus  (1905). 

Jackson — Twenty-five  Agrapha;  or,  Extra-Canonical 
Sayings  of  Our  Lord  (1900). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


133 


Josephus — Antiquities,  Bk.  XVIII.,  ch.  iii.,  §  3. 

Krauss — Leben  Jesu  nach  judischen  Quellen  (1905). 
Laible — Jesus  Christus  im  Talmud  (1900). 

Lock  and  Sanday- — Two  Lectures  on  the  Oxyrhynchus 
Sayings  of  Jesus  (1889). 

Mead — Sayings  of  Jesus  (1897). 

Nicholson— The  Gospel  according  to  the  Hebrews. 

Orr — New  Testament  Apocryphal  Writings  (1904). 

Pick — The  Apocryphal  Life  of  Jesus  (1887). 

Pick — The  Extra-Canonical  Life  of  Christ  (1903). 

Pick — Paralipomena  (1908). 

Pick — Jesus  and  the  Talmud  (1913). 

Preuschen— Antilegomena  (1905). 

Rawnsley — Sayings  of  Jesus  (1905). 

Resch — Aussercanonische  Paralleltexte  (1893). 

Resch — Agrapha.  2  Aufl.  (1906). 

Ropes — Die  Spriiche  Jesu  (1896). 

Smith,  D. — The  Unwritten  Sayings  of  Our  Lord  (1913). 
Swete — The  Apocryphal  Gospel  of  St.  Peter  (1893). 
Taylor,  C. — The  Oxyrhynchus  Logia  and  the  Apocryphal 
Gospels  (1899). 

Taylor,  C. — The  Oxyrhynchus  Sayings  of  Tesus  Found 
in  1903  (1905). 

Warschauer — Jesus  Saith  (1905). 

White — The  Sayings  of  Jesus  from  Oxyrhynchus 
(1922). 


LESSON  I:  BEGINNINGS  OF  THE  GOSPELS 
AND  PREPARATION  FOR  THE  BIRTH 

OF  JESUS 

Robertson’s  Harmony,  §§  1-9. 

Broadus’  Comm,  on  Matt.  pp.  1-13. 

Robertson’s  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Jesus,  Preface 
and  pp.  1-5. 


134  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim — Life  and 
Times  of  Jesus  the  Messiah,  Bk.  II.,  chs. 
III. — V. ;  D.  Smith,  In  the  Days  of  His  Flesh, 
ch.  I.;  Robertson,  Comm,  on  Matt.  (Introduc¬ 
tion),  Studies  in  Mark’s  Gospel,  and  Luke  the 
Historian. 

1.  About  Harmonies  of  the  Gospels.  Harmony,  pp. 

253-4. 

2.  Note  Luke’s  Use  of  Sources.  Footnote  to  Harmony, 

p.  1. 

3.  About  Synoptic  Criticism.  Harmony,  pp.  255-6. 

4.  The  Authorship  of  the  Fourth  Gospel.  Harmony, 

pp.  256-7. 

5.  The  Jesus  of  History.  Harmony,  p.  258. 

6.  Distinguish  the  Introductions  to  the  Gospels.  Har¬ 

mony,  footnote,  p.  1. 

7.  John’s  Use  of  the  Term  Logos.  Harmony,  footnote, 

p.  2. 

8.  Comparison  of  the  two  genealogies  in  Matthew  and 

Luke. 

Harmony,  pp.  259-62  and  footnotes  to  p.  4. 

Broadus  on  Matt.,  pp.  1  and  2,  5-7. 

9.  Be  able  to  state  intelligently  and  in  order  the  histori¬ 

cal  events  in  Harmony,  §§4-9.  Be  ready  to 
point  out  places  on  the  map. 

10.  Sources  of  the  Infancy  Stories.  Harmony,  foot¬ 

note,  p.  5. 

11.  Form  of  the  Names  in  Matthew’s  Genealogy. 

Broadus  on  Matt.,  p.  3. 

12.  Jesus  and  Christ. 

Broadus  on  Matt.,  pp.  2,  10.  Cf.  Acts  7:45;  Heb. 
4:8. 

13.  Joseph. 

Broadus  on  Matt.,  p.  8,  9,  13. 

14.  Mary  the  Mother  of  Jesus. 

Broadus  on  Matt.,  pp.  8-10. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


135 


15.  The  prophecy  quoted  in  Matt.  1 :  22  f . 
Broadus  on  Matt.,  pp.  11-13. 

16.  The  Virginity  of  Mary. 

Broadus  on  Matt.,  p.  13. 

17.  What  is  “the  Problem  of  Jesus”? 
Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Jesus,  pp.  1-5. 


LESSON  II:  THE  BIRTH  OF  JESUS 

Harmony,  §§  10-16. 

Broadus  on  Matt.,  ch.  II. 

Robertson,  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Jesus,  pp.  8-14. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim — Life  and 
Times,  chs.  VI.- VIII. ;  D.  Smith — In  the  Days 
of  His  Flesh,  ch.  I. 

1.  Give  events,  places,  dates. 

2.  Probable  Time  of  the  Saviour’s  Birth  in  the  Light  of 

New  Discoveries.  Harmony,  pp.  262-7. 

3.  Unconscious  Influence  of  Augustus.  Harmony,  foot¬ 

note,  p.  9. 

4.  Bethlehem.  See  Comm.  (Broadus  always  meant 

hereafter  by  this  abbreviation)  on  Matt.,  ii.,  1. 

5.  New  Testament  Psalms.  Harm.,  p.  11. 

6.  Herod  the  King.  Comm.,  pp.  15,  16,  18. 

7.  The  Magi.  Comm.,  pp.  16,  21  f. 

8.  The  Star.  Comm.,  ii.,  2. 

9.  The  Christ.  Comm.,  ii.,  4. 

10.  Chief  priests  and  scribes.  Comm.,  p.  18. 

11.  Four  quotations.  See  Comm,  on  Matt.,  ii.,  6,  15, 

18,  23. 

12.  Slaughter  of  the  babes.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  ii.,  16. 

13.  Sojourn  in  Egypt.  Comm.,  ii.,  13. 

14.  The  return  to  Nazareth.  Comm.,  p.  29. 

15.  The  Virgin  Birth  of  Jesus.  Epochs,  pp.  8-14. 


136  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  VIRGIN  BIRTH 

(Besides  books  on  the  Incarnation,  which  see  in  bibli¬ 
ography,  and  cyclopaedia  articles)  : 

Benson — The  Virgin  Birth  of  Our  Lord  and  Saviour 
Jesus  Christ  (1904). 

Box — The  Virgin  Birth  of  Jesus  (1916). 

Briggs — The  Incarnation  of  Our  Lord  (1902). 

Brown— -The  Gospel  of  the  Infancy  (1923). 

Conrady — Die  Quellen  der  canonischen  Kindheitsge- 
schichte. 

Gould,  S.  Baring — The  Birth  of  Jesus  (1885). 
Grautzmacher — The  Virgin  Birth  (1907). 

Hoben — The  Virgin  Birth  (1903). 

Knowling — Our  Lord’s  Virgin  Birth  (1907). 

Kregher — Die  jungfrausiche  Geburt  des  Herrn  (1900). 
Lobstein — The  Virgin  Birth  of  Christ  (1903). 

Machen — New  Testament  Account  of  the  Birth  of  Jesus 
(Princeton  Rev.,  1905  and  1906). 

Orr — The  Virgin  Birth  of  Christ  (1901). 

Oussani — The  Virgin  Birth  and  Modern  Criticism  (New 
York  Review,  1907,  pp.  313  fT. ) . 

Peeters — L’Evangile  de  l’Enfance  (1914). 

Prestige — The  Virgin  Birth  of  Our  Lord  (1918). 
Ramsay — Was  Christ  Born  at  Bethlehem?  (1898). 
Randolph — The  Virgin  Birth  of  Our  Lord  (1903). 
Resch — Das  Kindheitsevangelium  nach  Matt,  und  Luk. 
Soltau — The  Birth  of  Jesus  Christ  (1903). 

Stewart — Our  Lord’s  Nativity  and  Birth  (1905). 
Sweet — The  Birth  and  Infancy  of  Jesus  Christ  (1907). 
Taylor — Historical  Evidence  for  the  Virgin  Birth 
(1921). 


OTHER  BOOKS  OF  INTEREST 

Adeney — The  Women  of  the  New  Testament. 
Bernard— The  Songs  of  the  Nativity. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


137 


Doyle — The  Holy  Family  (1916). 

Gurney — Nunc  Dimittis  (1895). 

Huschke — Zeit  der  Geburt  Jesu  Christi  (1840). 
Mackinlay — The  Magi  (1907). 

Page — New  Light  from  Old  Eclipses  (1890). 

Sanday — Sacred  Sites  of  the  Gospels  (1903). 

Thomas — Our  Record  of  the  Lord’s  Nativity  (1900). 
Upham — Wise  Men  from  the  East  (1869). 
Waddy-Moss — The  Scene  of  Our  Lord’s  Life  (1902). 
Wieseler — Chronological  Synopsis  (1877). 

Zumpt — Das  Geburtjahr  Christi  (1869). 


LESSON  III:  THE  LONG  YEARS  OF  SILENCE 

Harmony,  §§  17-19. 

Comm.,  pp.  26-30. 

Josephus,  Ant.,  Bk.  XVII.,  chs.  viii.-xiii. 

Robertson — Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Jesus,  pp.  6-8. 
For  fuller  treatment,  see  Edersheim,  chs.  IX. -X. ; 
D.  Smith,  ch.  II.;  Ragg,  Plummer,  or  any 
commentary  on  Luke. 

1.  The  term  Judea.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  ii.,  22. 

2.  The  successors  of  Herod  the  Great.  Comm,  on 

Matt.,,  ii.,  22;  Josephus,  Ant.,  Book  XVII.,  chs. 
•  •  •  •  •  • 

V1U.-X111. 

(a)  Herod’s  last  will,  and  way  Archelaus  received  at 
Jerusalem.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  and  Jos.,  Ant., 
XVII.,  viii. 

(b)  Archelaus  going  to  Rome,  followed  by  Salome, 
Antipas,  and  others.  Ant.,  XVII.,  ix. 

(c)  Meanwhile  tumult  reigns  at  Jerusalem.  Ant., 
XVII.,  x. 

(d)  How  Caesar  decides  the  contest  and  exposes  a 
false  claimant.  Ant.,  XVII.,  xi.  and  xii. 


138  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


(e)  Caesar’s  advice  to  Archelaus,  and  how  Archelaus 
took  it.  Ant.,  XVII.,  xiii. 

3.  Nazareth.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  ii.,  23. 

4.  The  visit  of  Jesus  the  boy  to  Jerusalem.  Harm., 

Section  18.  State  events,  places,  dates. 

5.  The  Youth  of  Jesus.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  30  f .  * 

Harm.,  footnote,  p.  14. 

6.  The  First  Glimpse  of  Jesus.  Epochs,  pp.  6-8. 

SPECIAL  BOOKS 

Brough — The  Early  Life  of  Our  Lord. 

Doyle — The  Holy  Family  (1916). 

Durand — The  Childhood  of  Jesus  Christ  (1911). 
Forbush — Boy’s  Life  of  Christ  (1905). 

Meyers,  C. — The  Boy  Jesus  (1908). 

Monod — The  Childhood  of  Jesus  (1889). 

Morgan,  G.  Campbell — The  Hidden  Years  at  Nazareth 
(1898). 

Ramsay — The  Education  of  Christ  (1902). 

Smith — The  Holy  Child  Jesus. 

Stapfer — Jesus  Christ  Before  His  Ministry  (1896). 
Stewart — Infancy  and  Youth  of  Jesus  (1905). 

Temple — The  Boyhood  Consciousness  of  Christ  (1922). 
Van  Dyke — The  Childhood  of  Jesus  Christ  (1905). 
Wallace — Boyhood  of  Christ. 

Waugh — The  Child  of  Nazareth  (1906). 

The  so-called  manuscript  by  Notowitch,  purporting 
to  describe  a  visit  of  Jesus  to  India  during  this 
period,  is  a  fraud. 

LESSON  IV:  JOHN  THE  BAPTIST 

Harmony,  §§  20-23. 

Comm,  on  3 :  1-12. 

Robertson — Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Jesus,  pp.  14 
and  15. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


139 


For  fuller  discussion,  see  Robertson — John  the 
Loyal,  ch.  V. ;  Edersheim — Bk.  II.,  ch.  XI.,  and 
Bk.  III.,  ch.  XXVIII. 

1.  Events,  places,  dates.  Harmony,  §§20-23. 

2.  Luke’s  Method  of  Dating  the  Event.  Harmony, 

p.  15. 

3.  Gospel  account  of  John.  Harm.,  footnote,  p.  18. 

Read  all  these  references  about  John. 

4.  Early  life  of  John.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  iii.,  1. 

5.  Wilderness  of  Judea.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  33. 

6.  Repent.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  iii.,  2. 

7.  Kingdom  of  Heaven.  Comm.,  pp.  35  f. 

8.  Quotation  in  Matt.,  iii.,  3.  See  Comm. 

9.  John’s  dress  and  food.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  iii.,  4. 

10.  Meaning  of  baptize.  Comm.,  p.  39-41. 

11.  Proselyte  baptism.  Comm.,  p.  41b  f. 

12.  Pharisees  and  Sadducees.  Comm,  on  3  :  7-9. 

13.  John’s  baptism  and  Christ’s  baptism.  Comm,  on 

Matt.,  xi.,  11,  cf.  Josephus  on  John’s  baptism. 
Comm.,  p.  36. 

14.  The  Jordan.  Comm.,  p.  42  ff. 

15.  Baptism  with  water  or  in  water — unto  repentance — 

in  the  Holy  Spirit  and  fire.  Comm,  on  Matt, 
iii.,  11.  Note  carefully  exegesis  from  now  on. 

16.  The  Father’s  Sanction  of  the  Son.  Epochs,  pp.  14 

and  15. 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  JOHN  THE  BAPTIST 

Barde — Jean  Baptiste  (1892). 

Behrendts — Studien  iiber  Zacharias-Apokryphen  und 
Zacharias-Legenden  (1859). 

Behrendts — Die  h.  Ueberlieferung  der  Zach.  und  Joh. 
Apokryphen  (1904). 

Bernonilli — Johannes  der  Taiifer  und  die  Urgemeinde 
(1918). 


140  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Blakiston — John  the  Baptist  and  His  Relation  to  Jesus 
(1912). 

Boissonas — De  Y Attitude  de  Jean  Baptiste. 
Bornemann— Die  Taufe  Christi  durch  Johannes. 
Brandt — Ein  talmudisches  Zeugnis  von  dem  Johannes 
(Zschr.  f.  Neut.  Wiss.,  Heft  4,  1911). 

Breest — Johannes  der  Taiifer  (1881). 

Breuil — Du  Culte  de  S.  Jean  Baptiste. 

Chenot— Jean  le  Baptiste. 

Coleridge — Ministry  of  John  the  Baptist.  Vol.  I.  of  his 
Public  Life  of  Our  Lord. 

Dibelius — Die  urchristliche  Ueberlieferung  iiber  Jo¬ 
hannes  den  Taiifer  (1911). 

Douglas — More  than  a  Prophet  (1905). 

Duncan — Life,  Character,  and  Acts  of  John  the  Baptist 
(1853). 

Feather — John  the  Baptist. 

Gale — The  Prophet  of  the  Highest. 

Haupt — Johannes  der  Taiifer  (1874). 

Houghton — John  the  Baptist  (1889). 

Huxtable — The  Ministry  of  St.  John  the  Baptist. 
Innitzer — Johannes  der  Taiifer  (1908). 

Kohler — Johannes  der  Taiifer  (1884). 

Konrad— Johannes  der  Taiifer  (1911). 

Lofton — John  the  Baptist.  A  Poem  (1905). 
McCullough — The  Peerless  Prophet  (1888). 

Meyer,  F.  B. — John  the  Baptist  (1901). 

Penick — More  than  a  Prophet  (1881). 

P ottgiesser — Johannes  der  Taiifer  und  Jesus  Christus 
(1911). 

Reynolds — John  the  Baptist  (1874). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — John  the  Loyal.  Popular  edition 
(1923). 

Rymington — Vox  Clamantis  (1882). 

Simpson — The  Last  of  the  Prophets. 

Smith— Johannes  de  Dooper  (1908). 

Stalker — The  Two  Johns  (1895). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


141 


On  the  baptismal  controversy,  see  the  ecclesiologies, 
Bible  dictionaries,  and  various  treatises  like 
Broadus — -Immersion  Essential  to  Christian 
Baptism. 

LESSON  V:  CHRIST’S  BAPTISM  AND 
TEMPTATION 

Harmony,  §§24  and  25. 

Comm,  on  Matt.  3:  13 — 4:  11. 

Robertson— Epochs,  pp.  15-23. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  II.,  ch. 
XII.,  and  Bk.  III.,  ch.  I. ;  D.  Smith,  chs. 
III.-IV. 

1.  Three  lessons  on  the  Beginnings  of  Our  Lord’s  Min¬ 

istry.  Harmony,  §§  24-36. 

2.  The  Year  of  Obscurity.  Duration  of  this  Early  Min¬ 

istry.  Harmony,  footnote,  p.  19. 

3.  Division  of  this  Early  Ministry.  Harmony,  p.  19. 

4.  Events,  places,  dates  in  this  lesson.  Harmony, 

§§  24-25. 

5.  Time  of  the  Baptism  of  Jesus.  Comm,  on  3:  13. 

6.  Place  of  baptism  of  Jesus.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  iii.,  13. 

7.  Design  of  the  baptism  of  Jesus.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

iii.,  14  f. 

8.  From  the  water,  and  the  heavenly  testimony.  Comm. 

on  Matt.,  iii.,  16  f.  The  Father’s  Sanction  of  the 
Son.  Epochs,  pp.  14-18. 

9.  The  words  “tempt”  and  “devil.”  How  could  Jesus 

be  tempted?  Why  should  he  be?  Place  of  temp¬ 
tation.  Comm,  on  Matt,  iv.,  1. 

10.  Tempted  internally,  or  visibly  and  audibly.  Comm., 

p.  62. 

11.  The  fasting  and  the  ministry  of  angels.  Comm,  on 

Matt.,  iv.,  2,  111. 

12.  Twofold  meaning  of  each  of  the  three  recorded  temp¬ 

tations,  and  our  Lord’s  reply.  Meaning  of  the 


142  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


term  Son  of  God  in  Matt.,  iv.,  3,  cf.,  also  iv.,  8. 
Use  of  Scripture  by  Christ  and  Satan.  Comm, 
on  Matt.,  iv.,  3  f.,  5-7,  8-10. 

13.  Different  order  of  the  three  temptations  in  Matthew 

and  Luke.  Comm.,  p.  64b. 

14.  Progress  in  the  three  temptations  according  to  Mat¬ 

thew’s  order.  Comm.,  p.  71a. 

15.  Three  principal  wrong  courses  proposed  to  Jesus. 

Comm.,  p.  68b. 

16.  Three  false  views  of  the  devil.  Comm.,  p.  69a. 

17.  The  Moral  Issue  in  the  Temptation.  Epochs,  18-23. 

18.  Account  of  the  Temptation  in  the  Logia.  Harmony, 

footnote,  p.  20. 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  TEMPTATION  OF  JESUS 

Barrett — The  Temptations  of  Christ  (1903). 

Birks — God’s  Champion,  Man’s  Example  (1890). 

Bury — Our  Lord’s  Preparation  for  the  Messiahship 
(1909). 

Dickson — The  Temptation  in  the  Desert. 

Foxell — The  Temptation  of  Jesus  (1920). 

Hicks — Addresses  on  the  Temptation  (1903). 

Knight — The  Temptation  of  Our  Lord  (1906). 
Krummacher — The  Temptation  of  Christ. 

Macleod — The  Temptation  of  Our  Lord. 

Meyer,  A. — Die  Versuchung  Jesu  (1918). 

Mill — Sermons  on  the  Temptations  (1875). 

Murray — Studies  in  the  Temptations  of  the  Son  of  God 
(1916). 

Painter — The  Philosophy  of  Christ’s  Temptation 
(1914). 

Palmer — Thoughts  on  Our  Lord’s  Temptation  (1901). 
Rawnsley — Our  Lord’s  Three  Temptations  (1901). 
Spitta — Die  Versuchung  Jesu  (1907). 

Stewart — The  Temptations  of  Jesus  (1903). 

Vaughan — The  Two  Temptations  (1872). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


143 


LESSON  VI :  FROM  BETHANY  BEYOND 
JORDAN  TO  CAPERNAUM 

Harmony,  §§  26-30. 

Josephus,  Ant.,  XVIII.,  ch.  i.,  1 — ch.  v.,  2. 
Robertson — Epochs,  pp.  23-33. 

Westcott  or  any  comm,  on  John  1 :  19 — 2:  12. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  III.,  chs. 
II.-IV. ;  D.  Smith,  chs.  V.-VI. 

1  Events,  places,  dates  in  the  beginning  of  our  Lord’s 
Ministry.  Harm.,  §§26-30.  Given  only  in 
John’s  Gospel. 

2.  John  the  Baptist’s  testimonies  to  Jesus  and  the  four 

successive  days.  Harm.,  footnote,  p.  23 ; 
Epochs,  pp.  26-28. 

3.  Jesus’  Testimonies  to  John  the  Baptist.  Harmony, 

footnote,  p.  23. 

4.  Series  of  First  Things.  Harm.,  second  footnote,  p. 

23 ;  Epochs,  pp.  28-33. 

5.  Receiving  Jesus  as  the  Messiah.  Harm.,  footnote, 

p.  24 ;  Epochs,  pp.  24  f . 

6.  The  Johannine  Presentation  of  Jesus.  Epochs,  pp. 

23  f. 

7.  Josephus’  account  of 

(a)  Cyrenius.  Ant.  XVIII.,  i.,  1. 

(b)  Judas  the  Galilean  and  his  new  sect.  XVIII.,  i. 

(c)  Herod  Antipas  and  Philip.  XVIII.,  ii.,  and  iv., 
5  and  6.  Tetrarchs  of  what  regions? 

(d)  Pilate  and  his  outrages.  XVIII.,  iii.,  1  and  2, 
and  v.,  1  and  2.  Pilate  was  Procurator  of  Judea 
A.  D.  26-36. 

(e)  Jesus.  XVIII.,  iii.,  3.  See  War  VI.,  v.,  4.  See 
what  is  Josephus’  true  position  on  the  Messiah. 

(f)  Aretas  and  his  daughter’s  trouble  with  her  hus¬ 
band,  Herod  Antipas,  and  Herodias.  Who  was 


144  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


this  Herod  Philip,  husband  of  Herodias? 
Ant.  XVIII.,  v.,  1.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  314. 
Note  the  three  Herods  of  the  New  Testament 
who  are  called  Herod. 

(g)  John  the  Baptist’s  baptism  and  death.  Ant. 
XVIII.,  v.,  2.  Cf.  Comm.,  p.  36a  f. 

(h)  Banishment  of  the  Jews  from  Rome  to  Sardinia. 
Jos.,  Ant.,  XVIII.,  iii.,  5. 

Roman  Emperors  during  life  of  Christ: 

Octavius  reigned,  with  the  title  of  Augustus,  B.  C.  27 
— A.  D.  14.  Tiberius,  his  adopted  son,  reigned 

A.  D.  14-37. 

Rulers  in  Judea: 

Archelaus,  Ethnarch  of  Judea,  Samaria,  and  Idumea, 

B.  C.  4— A.  D.  6. 

Roman  Procurators  from  A.  D.  6  to  A.  D.  42,  when 
a  Herod  again  rules  Judea  as  King,  Herod 
Agrippa  I. 

Procurators  again  from  44  A.  D.  to  70  A.  D. 
Procurators  during  life  of  Christ: 

Coponius,  A.  D.  6-9. 

Marcus  Ambivius,  A.  D.  9-12. 

Annius  Rufus,  A.  D.  12-15. 

Valerius  Gratus,  A.  D.  15-26. 

Pontius  Pilate,  A.  D.  26-36. 

Galilee  and  Perea  remained  under  Herod  Antipas 
(B.  C.  4 — A.  D.  39)  all  through  Christ’s  life; 
so  did  Philip  (B.  C.  4 — A.  D.  34)  have  all  this 
time  Trachonitis  and  Iturea. 

High  Priests  during  Christ's  life: 

Mathias,  B.  C.  5. 

Joseph,  B.  C.  4. 

Joasar,  B.  C.  4. 

Eleazar,  B.  C.  6. 

Jesus,  A.  D.  6. 

Ananus  or  Annas,  A.  D.  6. 

Ishmael,  A.  D.  16 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


145 


Eleazar,  A.  D.  17. 

Simon,  A.  D.  18. 

Caiaphas,  A.  D.  18  until  about  A.  D.  36. 

Note  frequent  changes  in  the  High  Priesthood  by  the 
civil  authorities.  Annas  and  Caiaphas  held  office 
long,  and  they  had  the  esteem  of  the  people  in 
consequence.  Annas  lives  till  after  Christ’s 
death  and  is  called  High  Priest  along  with 
Caiaphas. 

During  Christ’s  ministry  the  rulers  whose  authority 
he  feels  are  Tiberius,  Pontius  Pilate,  Herod 
Antipas,  Philip  and  Caiaphas  (High  Priest). 
See  dictionaries  and  cyclopaedias. 

BOOKS  ON  THE  TWO-WINE  CONTROVERSY 

In  favor  of  two-wine  theory — Temperance  Bible 
Commentary;  Samson,  Bible  Wines,  with  three 
supplements;  Fowler,  The  Wines  of  the  Bible. 

Against  the  view — See  Commentaries  on  John;  Bible 
Dictionaries  and  Cyclopaedias ;  Presbyterian  Re¬ 
view  for  January,  1881 ;  Bibliotheca  Sacra  for 
April  and  July,  1880;  Baptist  Quarterly  Review 
for  April  and  July,  1887. 

LESSON  VII:  THE  EARLY  MINISTRY  IN 
JUDEA  AND  SAMARIA 


Harmony,  §§  31 — 36. 

Josephus,  War  Bk.,  VII.,  vi. 

Robertson,  Epochs,  pp.  33-40. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  III.,  chs. 
V.-VIII. ;  D.  Smith,  chs.  VII. -VIII ;  Westcott 
or  any  comm,  on  Jo.  2 :  13 — 4 :  45. 

1.  Events,  places,  dates.  Time  of  the  passover.  Har- 
mony,  §§  31-36. 


146  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


2.  Successive  scenes  of  Jesus’  early  ministry.  Harm., 

footnote,  p.  25. 

3.  The  Cleansing  of  the  Temple  in  the  Synoptic  Gospels. 

Harmony,  footnote,  p.  25. 

4.  The  Issue  with  the  Jerusalem  authorities.  Epochs, 

pp.  33-8. 

5.  An  Interview  with  a  Jewish  scholar.  Epochs,  pp. 

37-9. 

6.  Part  of  Jesus’  ministry  parallel  to  that  of  John. 

Harm.,  footnote,  p.  26.  Judean  ministry  ex¬ 
plains  the  latter  disciples  in  Judea. 

7.  Place  of  John’s  imprisonment.  Harm.,  footnote,  p. 

27 ;  Jos.,  War  VII.,  vi. ;  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xiv.,  3. 

8.  Reason  for  John’s  imprisonment.  Harmony,  §  34 

and  footnote  to  p.  27 ;  Jos.,  Ant.,  XVIII.,  v.,  2. 

9.  John  and  Jesus  preaching  to  Samaritans.  Harm., 

footnote,  p.  27. 

10.  An  Interview  with  a  Samaritan  Woman.  Epochs, 

pp.  39  f. 

11.  Jesus  regarded  as  the  Messiah.  Harm.,  footnote, 

p.  29. 

12.  Samaritans.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  x.,  5. 

13.  Why  Jesus  went  to  Galilee.  Harm.,  p.  29, 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  SAMARITANS  AND  NICODEMUS 

Montgomery — The  Samaritans. 

Reid — Jesus  and  Nicodemus  (1906). 

Rothstein — Juden  und  Samaritaner  (1908). 


LESSON  VIII :  BEGINNING  OF  THE  GALI¬ 
LEAN  MINISTRY 

Harmony,  §§  37-48. 

Comm,  on  Matt.  4 : 12-25 ;  8 :  2-4,  14-17 ;  9 : 2-34. 
Robertson — Epochs,  pp.  40-50. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


147 


For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  chs.  IX.-XI., 
XIII.-XVII. ;  D.  Smith,  chs.  IX.-XIV.,  XVII. 

1.  Six  lessons  on  the  Great  Ministry  in  Galilee.  See 

Harmony,  §§  37-71. 

2.  All  by  the  Synoptic  Gospels  save  one  visit  to  Jeru¬ 

salem  by  Gospel  of  John  (ch.  5).  Harmony, 
p.  30.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  pp.  71  f. 

3.  Outline  of  the  Galilean  Ministry  in  eight  divisions. 

Harmony,  p.  30. 

4.  Length  of  the  Great  Galilean  Ministry.  Harmony, 

footnote,  p.  30. 

5.  Progress  of  Christ’s  Ministry  along  three  lines.  Har¬ 

mony,  footnote,  p.  30. 

6.  Events,  places,  dates.  §§  37-48. 

7.  Galilee.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  iv.,  12. 

8.  The  Call  to  Nazareth.  Epochs,  pp.  40-2. 

9.  Capernaum.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  iv.,  13;  Harm.,  foot¬ 

note,  p.  32 ;  Epochs,  pp.  42-5. 

10.  The  quotation  from  Isaiah.  Comm,  on  Matt. 

4:  14-16. 

11.  The  call  to  the  four  fishermen.  Harm.,  footnote, 

p.  33 ;  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  76  f. 

12.  Sea  of  Galilee.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  iv.,  18. 

13.  The  quotation  in  Matt.,  viii.,  17.  See  Comm. 

14.  Great  extent  of  our  Lord’s  work  in  healing  and  teach¬ 

ing.  First  of  the  three  tours  of  Galilee.  This 
one  by  Jesus  himself  accompanied  by  the  four 
fishermen.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  iv.,  23 ;  Harm., 
footnote,  p.  36. 

15.  Synagogues.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  iv.,  23. 

16.  Reasons  for  commanding  the  healed  not  to  tell. 

Comm,  on  Matt.,  viii.,  4;  Epochs,  pp.  45-50. 

17.  On  fasting.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  ix.,  14-17. 

18.  Miracles  of  Jesus.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  80b,  and 

footnote  to  Comm.,  p.  275. 

19.  Leprosy.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  viii.,  2. 


148  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


20.  Publicans.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  v.,  46.  Publicans  and 

Sinners.  Comm,  on  Matt.  9 :  10. 

21.  Note  Use  of  Parables.  Harmony,  §48. 

SPECIAL  BOOKS 

Bruce — The  Galilean  Gospel  (1893). 

Merrill — Galilee  in  the  Time  of  Christ  (1901). 


LESSON  IX:  THE  SABBATH  CONTROVERSY 

Harmony,  §§49-51. 

Comm,  on  Matt.  12 :  1-14. 

Robertson— -Epochs,  pp.  51-6. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  III.,  ch. 
XII. ;  D.  Smith,  chs.  XV.-XVI. ;  Westcott  or 
any  comm,  on  John. 

1.  Events,  places,  dates.  §§49-51. 

2.  The  feast  of  John,  v.,  1.  Harm.,  footnote,  p.  42,  and 

Harm.,  pp.  267-270. 

3.  Length  of  the  Saviour’s  Ministry.  Harm.,  p.  42,  pp. 

267-270. 

4.  Jerusalem  Ministry  in  John.  Harmony,  footnote  to 

p.  42. 

5.  Jesus  accused  of  breaking  the  Sabbath,  and  on  what 

grounds.  Harm.,  §§49-51. 

6.  Growing  hostility  to  Jesus.  Harm.,  footnote  to  p.  43 

and  p.  45 ;  Comm.,  p.  263a;  Epochs,  pp.  51-6. 

7.  State  and  explain  the  eight  arguments  used  by  Jesus 

in  defense  of  his  position  on  the  Sabbath  ques¬ 
tion.  Harmony,  §§49-51,  and  footnote  to  p. 
45 ;  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xii.,  3-8. 

8.  Real  position  of  Christ  as  to  the  Sabbath.  Comm., 

p.  260b  and  261a. 

9.  Situation  as  to  the  Sabbath  under  the  New  Testament 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  14>9 

as  to  the  change  of  day,  its  significance,  and  its 
method  of  observance.  Comm.,  p.  261a. 

10.  Two  extremes  to  which  we  are  liable  now.  Comm., 
p.  266a. 

BOOKS  ON  THE  SABBATH  QUESTION 

Crafts — The  Sabbath  for  Man  (1892).  Has  full  bibli¬ 
ography. 

Flood y — Scientific  Basis  of  Sabbath  and  Sunday  (1908). 
Gamble — Sunday  and  the  Sabbath  (1902). 

Love — Sabbath  and  Sunday. 

Salmond — The  Sabbath. 

Taylor — The  Sabbatic  Question  (1915). 

Trevelyan — Sunday  ( 1902) . 

BOOKS  ON  CHRIST  AND  THE  OLD  TESTAMENT 

Burrell — Teaching  of  Jesus  concerning  the  Scriptures 
(1904). 

Ellicott — Christus  Comprobator. 

Gamble — Christ  and  Criticism. 

McIntosh — Is  Christ  Infallible  and  the  Bible  True? 
(1901). 

Mead — Christ  and  Criticism. 

Nicoll — The  Church’s  One  Foundation;  Christ  and  Re¬ 
cent  Criticism  (1901). 

Noesgen — Aussagen  des  Neuen  Testaments  ueber  den 
Pentateuch. 

Rae— How  Jesus  Handled  Holy  Writ  (1901). 

Saphir — Christ  and  the  Scriptures. 


LESSON  X :  THE  SERMON  ON  THE  MOUNT 
Harmony,  §§  52-54. 

Comm,  on  Matt.  12 : 15-21 ;  5 : 1 — 7 :  29. 


150  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Robertson — Epochs,  pp.  56-71. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  III.,  ch. 
XVIII.;  D.  Smith,  chs.  XVII.-XVIII.,  or  some 
of  the  books  on  the  Sermon  on  the  Mount  or 
other  commentaries  on  Matt,  and  Votaw  in 
Hastings’  D.  B. 

1.  Events,  places,  dates.  §§  52-54. 

2.  The  four  lists  of  the  Twelve.  Harmony,  pp.  271-3; 

Comm.,  p.  213. 

3.  The  New  Organization.  Epochs,  pp.  56-61. 

4.  Reasons  for  holding  the  discourses  in  Matthew  and 

Luke  to  be  the  same.  Harm.,  footnote,  p.  48, 
and  Harm.,  p.  273-6.  Cf.  Comm,  on  Matt., 
p.  84. 

5.  Design  of  the  discourse.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  84  f . 

6.  Analysis  of  the  discourse.  Harmony,  §  54. 

7.  Relation  of  our  Lord’s  mission  to  the  preceding  reve¬ 

lation,  that  he  came  to  complete  it.  Comm,  on 
Matt.,  v.,  17. 

8.  Christ’s  conception  of  righteousness  contrasted  with 

that  of  the  Scribes  and  Pharisees.  Comm,  on 
Matt,  v.,  20. 

9.  Explain  in  the  light  of  the  two  previous  points  the 

six  examples  of  Christ’s  teaching :  Matt.,  v., 
21-26  (murder),  27-30  (adultery),  31-32  (di¬ 
vorce),  33-37  (oaths),  38-42  (retaliation),  43-48 
(enemies).  See  Comm,  on  Matt. 

10.  State  the  general  principle  of  Matt.,  vi.,  1  (righteous¬ 

ness),  and  the  three  applications  of  it  in  verses 
2-4  (alms),  5-15  (prayer),  16-18  (fasting). 
See  Comm,  on  Matt. 

11.  Compare  the  “Lord’s  Prayer”  in  Matthew  and  Luke 

(§  105),  and  show  what  inferences  we  may  draw 
from  the  differences  in  form.  Comm,  on  Matt., 
p.  131  f.  How  far  is  this  prayer  parallel  in  the 
Jewish  books?  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  132  f.  Two 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


151 


divisions  of  the  prayer.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  133. 

12.  Analyze  Matt.,  vi.,  19-34  into  two  parts;  19-21 

(treasures),  22  f.  (the  eye),  24  (two  masters), 
25-34  (food  and  raiment).  Comm,  on  Matthew. 

13.  Judging  others.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  vii.,  1. 

14.  The  Golden  Rule.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  vii.,  12. 

15.  The  Declaration  of  Principles.  Epochs,  pp.  61-71. 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  LORD’S  PRAYER 

(Selection  from  the  enormous  literature) 

Anderson,  Robert— The  Lord’s  Prayer. 

Boardman,  George  Dana — Studies  in  the  Model  Prayer 
(1879). 

Bourdaloue — The  Lord’s  Prayer  (1894). 

Chase,  F.  H. — The  Lord’s  Prayer  in  the  Early  Church 
(1891). 

Dibelius — Das  Vaterunser  (1903). 

Dods,  Marcus — The  Prayer  that  Teaches  to  Pray.  New 
edition  (1893). 

Erb — The  Lord’s  Prayer  (1906). 

Farrar — The  Lord’s  Prayer  (1893). 

Gladden — The  Lord’s  Prayer  (1881). 

Gordon,  S.  D. — Jesus’  Habits  of  Prayer  (1904). 

Gore — Prayer  and  the  Lord’s  Prayer  (1898). 
Goulbourn — The  Lord’s  Prayer  (1898). 

Hall,  Newman — The  Lord’s  Prayer.  Third  edition 
(1897). 

Howrie — A  Comment  on  the  Lord’s  Prayer  (1908). 
Jones,  J.  D. — The  Model  Prayer.  Third  edition  (1904). 
Maurice,  F.  D. — The  Lord’s  Prayer.  New  edition 
(1893). 

McNeile — After  This  Manner  Pray  Ye  (1916). 

Miller,  J.  R. — The  Golden  Gate  of  Prayer  (1900). 
Morrison — The  Lord’s  Prayer  and  the  Prayer  of  Our 
Lord  (1917). 


152  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 

Poteat,  E.  M. — The  Religion  of  the  Lord’s  Prayer 
(1914). 

Ruskin,  John — The  Lord’s  Prayer  and  the  Church. 

Third  edition  (1896). 

Slattery — How  to  Pray  (1920). 

Stubbs — Social  Teaching  of  the  Lord’s  Prayer.  New 
edition  (1900). 

Van  Dyke,  H.  J. — The  Lord’s  Prayer  (1871). 
Vaughan,  C.  J. — The  Lord’s  Prayer  (1876). 

Whyte — Lord,  Teach  Us  to  Pray  (1922). 


BOOKS  ON  THE  SERMON  ON  THE  MOUNT 

(Brief  selection) 

Achelis — Die  Bergpredigt  (1875). 

Augustine — The  Exposition  of  the  Sermon  on  the 
Mount  and  the  Harmony  of  the  Evangelists.  Trans¬ 
lated  by  Findlay  and  Salmond  in  1873.  Trench’s 
translation  (1869). 

Bacon,  B.  W. — The  Sermon  on  the  Mount:  Its  Literary 
Structure  (1902). 

Baumgartner — Bergpredigt  und  Kultur  der  Gegenwart 
(1921). 

Bischoff — Jesus  und  die  Rabbinen  (1905). 

Blauvelt — Ultimate  Ideals  (1917). 

Boardman,  Geo.  D. — -Studies  in  the  Mountain  Instruc¬ 
tion  (1880). 

Bossuet — The  Sermon  on  the  Mount.  Translated  by 
Capes  (1900). 

Bradbury — The  Beatitudes  (1879). 

Carpenter,  W.  Boyd — The  Great  Charter  of  Christ 
(1900). 

Devine — The  Religion  of  the  Beatitudes  (1918). 

Duncan — The  Inheritors  of  the  Kingdom  (1902). 

Dykes — The  Beatitudes  of  the  Kingdom.  New  edition 
(1887). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


153 


Findlay,  J.  A. — The  Realism  of  Jesus  (1922). 

Fletcher — The  Sermon  on  the  Mount  and  Practical 
Politics  (1911). 

Foston — The  Beatitudes  and  the  Contrasts  (1911). 

Friedlander — The  Jewish  Sources  of  the  Sermon  on  the 
Mount  (1911). 

Glover — The  Beatitudes  (1888). 

Gore — The  Sermon  on  the  Mount.  New  edition  (1904), 

Griffith-Jones — The  Sermon  on  the  Mount  (1903). 

Grauert — Die  Bergpredigt  (1900). 

Heinrici — Die  Bergpredigt  (1905). 

Jones,  J.  D. — The  Way  into  the  Kingdom  (1900). 

Kaiser — Die  Bergpredigt  des  Herrn  (1901). 

Luther,  Martin — Comm,  on  Sermon  on  the  Mount. 
English  translation  (1854). 

Lyttleton — Studies  in  the  Sermon  on  the  Mount  (1905). 

Mackintosh — Christ  and  the  Jewish  Law  (1885). 

Maclaren,  A. — Message  from  the  King  (1904). 

McAfee — The  Sermon  on  the  Mount  (1910). 

Moberley — Fifteen  Sermons  on  the  Beatitudes.  Third 
edition  (1870). 

Rashdall — Conscience  and  Christ  (1916). 

Robinson — Studies  in  the  Teaching  of  the  Sermon  on 
the  Mount  (1922). 

Shearer — The  Sermon  on  the  Mount  (1906). 

Schenck — The  Ten  Commandments  and  the  Lord’s 
Prayer  (1902). 

Shorthouse — The  Men  of  the  Beatitudes  (1904). 

Stalker — The  Ethic  of  Jesus. 

Steinmeyer — Die  Rede  des  Herrn  auf  dem  Berge 
(1885). 

Strekking — Die  Bergrede  (1914). 

Stubbs — Christ  and  Economics  in  the  Light  of  the  Ser¬ 
mon  on  the  Mount  (1893). 

Tait — The  Charter  of  Christianity  (1886). 

Tholuck — A  Commentary  on  the  Sermon  on  the  Mount 
(1860). 


154  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Vaughan — Characteristics  of  Christ’s  Teaching  Drawn 
from  the  Sermon  on  the  Mount.  Seventh  edition 
(1884). 

Votaw — Sermon  on  the  Mount.  In  Vol.  V.  of  Hastings, 
D.  B. 

Weinel — Die  Bergpredigt  (1920). 

lWesley,  John — Discourses  on  the  Sermon  on  the  Mount. 
New  edition  (1873). 


LESSON  XI:  GOING  TO  WORK  WITH  THE 

TWELVE 


Harmony,  §§  55-63. 

Comm,  on  Matt.  8:1,  5-13  ;  11 :  2-30;  12  :  22-50. 
Robertson — Epochs,  pp.  71-80. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  III.,  chs. 
XIX.-XXII. ;  D.  Smith,  chs.  XX.,  XXIV. 

1.  Events,  places,  times.  §§  55-63. 

2.  Faith  of  a  heathen  commander.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

viii.,  10.  Cf.  also  Comm.,  p.  177. 

3.  Spread  of  Jesus’  fame  and  why.  Harm.,  footnote, 

p.  57. 

4.  Despair  of  John  the  Baptist.  Epochs,  pp.  71-4. 

5.  Design  of  John’s  Message.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xi.,  2  f. 

6.  Where  was  John,  and  where  was  Jesus?  Harm., 

footnote,  p.  57. 

7.  Relation  of  John’s  Mission  to  that  of  Jesus.  Comm. 

on  Matt.,  xi.,  Ilf. 

8.  Rejection  of  both  John  and  Jesus.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

xi.,  16-19. 

9.  Hades.  See  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xi.,  23,  and  Hell-fire, 

Comm.,  p.  103  f. 

10.  The  Son’s  Relation  to  the  Father.  Epochs,  pp.  74  f . 

11.  Jesus  as  the  Great  Teacher.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xi., 

27  f . ;  Harmony,  footnote  to  p.  59. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


155 


12.  The  woman  anointing  the  Savior’s  feet.  Harm.,  foot¬ 

note  to  p.  60. 

13.  Second  circuit  of  Galilee,  taking  the  Twelve  with 

him.  Harm.,  §  60,  and  footnote  to  p.  61 ; 
Epochs,  pp.  78  f . 

14.  The  busy  day.  §§61-66.  Harm.,  p.  61. 

15.  The  blasphemous  accusation.  §  61.  Comm,  on 

Matt.,  xii.,  23-32 ;  Harmony,  footnote  to  p.  61 ; 
Epochs,  pp.  77-80.  Note  parables  in  §  61. 

16.  Claim  of  Jesus  to  be  Messiah,  Matt.,  xii.,  28. 

17.  The  sign  of  Jonah.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xii.,  40,  and 

footnote. 

18.  “This  Wicked  Generation.”  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xii., 

45. 

19.  Mother  and  brethren.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xii.,  46-50. 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  JESUS*  ALLUSION  TO  JONAH 

Crane — Hard  Sayings  of  Jesus  Christ.  Second  edition 
(1901). 

Kennedy — Book  of  Jonah. 

McGarvey — Jesus  and  Jonah  (1896). 

Trumbull — Nineveh. 


LESSON  XII:  THE  FIRST  GREAT  GROUP  OF 

PARABLES 


Harmony,  §  64. 

Comm,  on  Matt.  13. 

Robertson — Epochs,  pp.  80-3. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  III.,  ch. 
XXIII. ;  D.  Smith,  ch.  XXL,  or  some  of  the 
books  on  the  Parables  of  Jesus  in  the  Bibliog¬ 
raphy. 

1.  Events,  places,  times.  §  64.  Still  in  the  Busy  Day. 
Note  outline  of  events. 


156  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


2.  Jesus’  New  Style  of  Teaching.  Epochs,  pp.  80-3. 

3.  Meaning  and  various  uses  of  the  term  parable. 

Comm,  on  Matt.,  xiii.,  3. 

4.  Our  Lord’s  design  in  employing  parables.  Comm,  on 

Matt.,  xiii.,  3. 

5.  Four  things  to  be  done  in  the  interpretation  of  any 

parable.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  284. 

6.  What  isolated  parables  have  been  given  heretofore? 

Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  285. 

7.  State  the  three  leading  groups  of  our  Lord’s  para¬ 

bles.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  285 ;  Harm.,  footnote, 
p.  64. 

8.  Mention  the  ten  parables  in  this  group,  and  divide 

them  into  five  pairs.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  294; 
Harmony,  footnote,  p.  70. 

9.  Give  the  general  aim  of 

(a)  The  Sower.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xiii.,  18-23. 

(b)  The  Seed  Growing  of  Itself.  Mark  iv.,  26-29. 
Any  comm,  on  Mark. 

(c)  The  Tares.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  299  f.  and  p. 
302. 

(d)  The  Net.  Comm.,  p.  306  f. 

(e)  The  Mustard  Seed.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xiii.  31  f. 

(f)  The  Leaven.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  297  f. 

(g)  The  Hidden  Treasure.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p. 
304  f. 

(h)  The  Precious  Pearl.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  305  f. 

(i)  The  Lamp.  Comm,  on  Matt.  5:15  (or  Mark 
4:  21-Luke  8:16). 

(j)  The  Householder.  Comm,  on  Matt.  13:  51-53. 

LESSON  XIII :  REMAINDER  OF  THE  BUSY  DAY 
AND  CLOSE  OF  GALILEAN  CAMPAIGN 

Harmony,  §§  65-71. 

Comm,  on  Matt.  8:18,  23-34;  9:1,  35;  11:1; 
13:54-8;  14:1-12. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


157 


Robertson — Epochs,  pp.  83-9, 

For  full  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  III.,  chs. 
XXIV.,  XXV.,  XXVII.,  XXVIII.;  D.  Smith, 
chs.  XXL,  XXV.,  XXVI. 

1.  Events,  places,  times.  §§65-71. 

2.  Jesus  in  heathen  territory.  Epochs,  pp.  83-5. 

3.  The  Gadarenes  (Matt.),  and  the  Gerasenes  (Mark 

and  Luke).  Harm.,  footnote  to  p.  71,  and 
Comm,  on  Matt.,  viii.,  28. 

4.  Two  demoniacs  or  one.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  viii., 

28. 

5.  Details  by  Mark  in  §  66  not  in  Matthew  and  Luke, 

illustration  of  Mark’s  vividness. 

6.  Devils  or  demons.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  viii.,  31. 

7.  Reality  of  the  demoniacal  possession.  Comm,  on 

Matt.,  p.  189  f. 

8.  Our  Lord’s  destroying  property.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

p.  192. 

9.  Placing  of  §  67.  Harmony,  footnote  to  p.  74. 

10.  A  second  visit  to  Nazareth,  §  69.  Footnote  to 

Harm.,  p.  77 ;  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  309 ;  Epochs, 
pp.  85  f. 

11.  Our  Lord’s  brothers  and  sisters.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

pp.  310-312.  State  the  three  theories,  and  which 
seems  to  have  the  best  of  the  argument. 

12.  Third  circuit  of  Galilee,  sending  the  Twelve  before 

him.  §  70,  and  footnote,  p.  78  of  Harm. ; 
Epochs,  pp.  86-89. 

13.  Prayer  for  laborers.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  ix.,  37  f., 

and  x.,  1. 

14.  Details  of  the  instructions  to  the  Twelve.  Comm. 

on  Matt.,  x.,  6  ff.,  9  f .,  11,  16,  19  f.,  23. 

15.  Herod  Antipas  jealous  of  Jesus.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

xiv.,  2;  Harmony,  footnote  to  p.  82.  Why  John 
is  in  prison.  -  Comm.,  p.  317 ;  Harmony,  foot¬ 
note  to  p.  82. 


158  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


16.  Why  Herod  had  not  at  once  slain  John.  Comm,  on 

Matt.,  xiv.,  5. 

17.  The  Dancing  of  Salome.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  318. 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  DEMONOLOGY 

Alexander— Demoniac  Possession  (1902). 

Davis — Magic,  Divination,  and  Demonology. 

Nevius — Demon  Possession  and  Allied  Themes  (1894). 
Has  extensive  bibliography. 

Thompson— The  Devils  and  Evil  Spirits  of  Babylonia 
,(1903). 


LESSON  XIV:  THE  FIRST  THREE  WITH¬ 
DRAWALS  FROM  GALILEE 

Harm.,  §§  72-79. 

Comm,  on  Matt.,  14:  13-15:38. 

Robertson — Epochs,  pp.  89-104. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  III.,  chs. 
XXIX. -XXXIII. ;  D.  Smith,  chs.  XXVII.- 
XXXV. 

1.  How  much  of  the  ministry  gone,  and  how  long  till 

the  end.  Harmony,  p.  85  and  footnote. 

2.  Length  of  this  season  of  retirement.  Time  of  year. 

Harm.,  p.  85  and  footnote. 

3.  How  many  withdrawals  and  whither  (Bethsaida, 

Tyre  and  Sidon,  Decapolis,  Caesarea  Philippi). 
Harm.,  p.  85  and  footnote. 

4.  Out  of  Herod’s  territory,  and  to  mountains.  Harm., 

p.  85. 

5.  Five  reasons  for  retiring  from  Galilee.  Harm., 

footnote,  p.  85,  and  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  322. 

6.  Events,  places,  dates,  in  the  first  three  withdrawals. 

§§  72-79. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


1 59 


7.  First  withdrawal  to  Bethsaida,  §  72.  What  Beth- 

saida?  Harm.,  footnote  to  p.  86.  Note  that  the 
first  effort  to  gain  rest  failed. 

8.  Feeds  the  multitude.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xiv.,  13  f. 

place,  16,  19-21. 

9.  Effect  on  the  multitude  and  on  the  Twelve.  Comm. 

on  Matt.,  p.  326. 

10.  Jesus  and  the  Twelve  quitting  the  scene.  Comm,  on 

Matt.,  xiv.,  22-27,  and  second  footnote  on  p. 
327. 

11.  Walking  on  the  water.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xiv.,  28-31. 

12.  State  leading  thoughts  of  §  76. 

13.  The  Galileans  and  a  spiritual  Messiah.  Epochs,  pp. 

89-93. 

14.  The  tradition  of  the  elders,  etc.,  §  77,  comm,  on 

Matt.,  xv.,  2,  and  footnote  there  as  to  Mark’s 
further  statements. 

15.  Jesus’  reply.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xv.,  3-6,  11,  17-20; 

Epochs,  pp.  93-97. 

16.  Reason  for  special  training  of  the  Twelve.  Epochs, 

pp.  98-100. 

17.  The  second  retirement,  §  78.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xv., 

21,  24  f . ;  Epochs,  pp.  100-102;  Harmony,  foot¬ 
note  to  p.  94. 

18.  The  third  retirement,  §  79.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xv., 

29;  Epochs,  pp.  102-4;  Harmony,  p.  95,  foot¬ 
note. 

19.  Feeding  the  multitude  twice.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p. 

346;  Harmony,  p.  96,  footnote. 

See  Spitta — Jesus  und  die  Heidenmission  (1909). 


LESSON  XV:  THE  FOURTH  RETIREMENT 

Harmony,  §§  80-84. 

Comm,  on  Matt.,  15:39-16:28. 

Robertson — Epochs,  pp.  104-111. 


160  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  III.,  chs. 
XXXVI.,  XXXVII. ;  D.  Smith,  ch.  XXXI. 

1.  Events,  places,  times.  §§  80-84. 

2.  Magadan  and  Bethsaida.  Harm.,  footnote,  p.  97,  and 

Comm,  on  Matt.,  xv.,  39. 

3.  Renewed  hostility  from  Jewish  leaders.  Harm.,  sec¬ 

ond  footnote,  p.  97;  Comm,  on  Matt.,  16:1; 
Epochs,  pp.  104-106. 

4.  Sadducees  and  Christ.  Comm.,  p.  347. 

5.  Jesus’  warning  about  the  Pharisees,  Sadducees,  and 

Herod,  and  the  slowness  of  the  disciples  to  un¬ 
derstand.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xvi.,  5-12.  Union 
of  Sadducees,  Pharisees,  and  Herod  against 
Jesus. 

6.  The  withdrawal  to  Caesarea  Philippi.  Comm,  on 

Matt.,  xvi.,  13. 

7.  Caesarea  Philippi.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  351  f.;  Har¬ 

mony,  p.  98,  footnote. 

8.  The  disciples  declare  Jesus  to  be  the  Messiah. 

Harm.,  footnote,  p.  99;  comm,  on  Matt.,  xvi., 
15  and  16;  Epochs,  pp.  107-109. 

10.  Jesus’  reply.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xvi.,  18  f.,  A,  B,  C, 

D ;  Harmony,  p.  100,  footnote. 

11.  They  must  not  tell  others  he  is  the  Messiah.  Comm. 

on  Matt.,  xvi.,  20. 

12.  Jesus  begins  plainly  to  foretell  his  death  and  resur¬ 

rection,  §  83 ;  comm,  on  Matt.,  xvi.,  21 ;  Epochs, 
pp.  109-111;  cf.  instances  before  this.  §31, 
§§  48  and  62.  Cf.  also  §§  84,  85,  86,  88,  96,  99, 
101,  108,  113,  125,  128,  130,  132,  137,  139,  140, 
141,  146,  147,  148,  149,  150,  151,  152. 

13.  Peter  rebuked.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xvi.,  23. 

14.  Conditions  of  following  Jesus.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

xvi.,  24-26. 

15.  Meaning  of  the  Saviour’s  coming  in  Matt.,  xvi.,  27  f. 
For  books  on  “church,”  see  Dargan’s  Ecclesiology 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  l6l 

and  Hiscox’s  New  Directory  for  Baptist 
Churches. 

LESSON  XVI:  THE  CLOSE  OF  THE  SEASON 

OF  RETIREMENT 

Harmony,  §§  85-95. 

Comm,  on  Matt.  17:1 — 18:35;  8:19-22. 
Robertson — Epochs,  pp.  111-119. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  IV.,  chs. 

I.-III. ;  D.  Smith,  XXXII.,  XXXIII. 

1.  Events,  places,  times.  §§  85-95. 

2.  Time,  place  and  manner  of  the  transfiguration,  Har¬ 

mony,  §  85 ;  and  footnote  to  p.  102  and  to  p. 
103 ;  comm,  on  Matt.,  beginning  of  ch.  xvii.,  and 
on  xvii.,  1-4. 

3.  Design  of  the  transfiguration.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xvii., 

9;  Epochs,  pp.  111-114. 

4.  Coming  of  Elijah  before  the  Messiah.  Comm,  on 

Matt.,  17:10-13;  Harmony,  p.  104,  footnote. 

5.  The  difficulty  of  the  disciples  about  the  demoniac 

boy.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xvii.,  19  f. 

About  fasting  and  verse  21.  Comm,  on  Matt.  17 :  21. 

6.  The  poll  tax  for  the  temple.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xvii., 

24-27. 

7.  Difficulty  about  death  of  Christ.  Matt.,  xvii.,  9  and 

22;  Epochs,  pp.  114-117. 

8.  The  object  lesson  in  humility.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

xviii.,  1-9. 

9.  Their  angels.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xviii.,  10. 

10.  Winning  back  an  erring  brother.  Forgiveness  of  per¬ 

sonal  injury.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xviii.,  15-25. 

11.  The  word  church  in  xviii.,  17  f.  Comm,  on  Matt. 

Cf.  Matt,  xvi.,  18.  Two  uses  of  the  word  in  the 
New  Testament,  as  illustrated  by  these  two  pas¬ 
sages. 


162  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


12.  Restraint  and  Stimulus.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  viii.,  20  f . 

13.  The  Son  of  Man.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  185.  Cf. 

Son  of  God.  Comm,  on  Matt.  4 : 3.  Also  pp. 
329  and  353. 

14.  Light  advice  from  the  brothers  of  Jesus.  Epochs, 

117  f. 

15.  Jesus  facing  Jerusalem.  Epochs,  pp.  118  f.;  Har¬ 

mony,  p.  113,  footnote. 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  TRANSFIGURATION 

Beet,  W.  E. — The  Transfiguration.  New  edition  (1915). 
Gunsaulus — The  Transfiguration  (1886). 

Vaughan,  W. — The  Transfiguration  of  Our  Lord.  Sec¬ 
ond  edition  (1892). 


LESSON  XVII :  THE  GREAT  CONFLICT  IN  JERU¬ 
SALEM  AT  THE  FEAST  OF  TABERNACLES 

Harmony,  §§96-101. 

Robertson — Epochs,  pp.  120-125. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  IV.,  chs. 
VI.-X. ;  D.  Smith,  ch.  XXXVII.;  Robertson, 
The  Pharisees  and  Jesus,  ch.  II;  Westcott  or 
any  comm,  on  John  7 : 11 — 10:20. 

1.  Location  and  time  of  this  closing  ministry.  Harm., 

p.  114. 

2.  John  and  Luke  furnish  exclusive  account  of  this 

period  till  the  last  journey  toward  Jerusalem. 
Harmony,  p.  114. 

3.  Time  and  meaning  of  the  Feast  of  Tabernacles.  See 

comm,  on  John  or  Bible  Dictionary. 

4.  Three  journeys  toward  Jerusalem.  On  the  com¬ 

bination  of  Luke  and  John  for  this  period,  see 
Harm.,  pp.  276-279. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  163 

5.  The  first  of  these  journeys  toward  Jerusalem.  §  95, 

and  beginning  of  §  96. 

6.  Events,  places,  times.  §§  96-101. 

7.  Attitude  in  Jerusalem  toward  Jesus  before  he  comes. 

Epochs,  pp.  120  f. 

8.  Different  Groups  at  the  Feast  in  John  7.  Harmony, 

p.  114. 

9.  The  Jerusalem  Conspirators  Outwitted  at  Home. 

Epochs,  pp.  121-5. 

10.  Union  of  both  Parties  in  the  Sanhedrin  against 

Jesus.  Harmony,  p.  115,  footnote.  Read  also 
Chapter  II  of  The  Pharisees  and  Jesus  (Rob¬ 
ertson). 

11.  The  story  of  the  adulterous  woman.  Harm.,  foot¬ 

note,  p.  115.  See  Bibliography  for  literature  on 
the  Agrapha  of  Jesus. 

12.  Note  that  this  entire  lesson  is  from  John.  Cf.  the 

First  and  Second  Passovers,  §  31  and  §  49.  John 
supplies  our  knowledge  of  the  Jerusalem  minis¬ 
try  of  Jesus  before  the  last  passover. 


LESSON  XVIII :  WITHDRAWAL  FROM  JERUSA¬ 
LEM  INTO  JUDEA  AND  RETURN  TO  FEAST 
OF  DEDICATION. 

Harmony,  §§  102-111. 

Robertson — Epochs,  pp.  126-128. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  IV.,  chs. 
XI. -XIII.  Ragg,  Plummer  or  any  comm,  on 
Luke’s  Gospel. 

1.  The  Early  Judean  Ministry  given  by  John.  Har¬ 

mony,  §§  31-33. 

2.  This  Later  Judean  Ministry  (given  by  John  and 

Luke)  is  similar  in  many  things  to  the  Great 
Galilean  Ministry.  Harm.,  pp.  114,  120,  129; 
Epochs,  pp.  126  f . 


164  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


3.  Time  embraced  in  this  Later  Judean  Ministry. 

Harm.,  p.  114. 

4.  Events,  places,  times.  §§  102-111. 

5.  The  two  Bethanys.  Harm.,  footnote,  p.  122. 

6.  Repetition  of  the  model  prayer.  §  105,  and  first 

footnote  in  Harm.,  p.  123. 

7.  Repetition  of  the  blasphemous  accusation.  §  106  and 

second  footnote  in  Harm.,  p.  123. 

8.  Series  of  Discourses  in  §  108.  Harmony,  footnote  to 

p.  126. 

9.  Time  of  the  Feast  of  Dedication.  Harmony,  §  111. 

10.  Why  Jesus  in  Jerusalem  Now.  Epochs,  p.  128. 


LESSON  XIX:  FROM  BETHANY  BEYOND  JOR¬ 
DAN  TO  THE  RAISING  OF  LAZARUS  AT 
BETHANY  NEAR  JERUSALEM. 

Harmony,  §§  112-119. 

Robertson-— Epochs,  pp.  129-134. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  IV.,  chs. 
XIV.,  XVIII.,  XXL ;  D.  Smith,  chs.  XXXVIII., 
XXXIX;  Westcott  on  John,  Plummer  on  Luke 
or  others  comms.  See  also  J.  D.  Jones — The 
Lord  of  Life  and  Death  (1919). 

1.  Events,  places,  times.  §§  112-119. 

2.  Second  Withdrawal  from  Jerusalem  and  Why. 

Harmony,  §  112,  and  footnote  to  p.  131.  Cf. 
the  four  withdrawals  from  Galilee.  Reception 
in  Bethany  in  Perea.  Epochs,  pp.  129-131. 

3.  The  Later  Perean  Ministry  Divided  into  a  Second 

(§§  112-117)  and  a  Third  (§§  120-125)  by  the 
Raising  of  Lazarus  at  Bethany  near  Jerusalem 
(§§  118-119).  Harmony,  footnote  to  p.  131. 

4.  Length  of  the  Later  Perean  Ministry.  Harmony,  p. 

131  and  second  footnote. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


165 


5.  The  Second  Perean  Ministry.  By  John  and  Luke. 

§§112-117.  Cf.  §§26-28  for  the  first  Perean 
Ministry  as  given  by  John. 

6.  Length  of  this  Second  Perean  Ministry.  Harm., 

footnote,  p.  131. 

7.  Jewish  Meals.  Harm.,  footnote,  p.  133. 

8.  The  Second  Great  Group  of  Parables.  §§  114-117. 

9.  The  Second  Journeying  towards  Jerusalem,  and 

why.  §  118  and  footnote  to  p.  137.  This  time 
not  through  Samaria  as  in  §  95.  Special  reasons 
for  it  then.  But  now  in  Perea. 

10.  The  Sanhedrin  in  Desperation.  Harmony,  §  119. 

Epochs,  pp.  131-133. 

11.  The  Third  Withdrawal  from  Jerusalem.  Now  to  the 

hills  around  Ephraim.  §  119.  Jerusalem  now 
more  dangerous  than  Galilee  had  been.  Not 
long  till  the  last  Passover,  and  lines  closing 
around  the  Master.  Epochs,  p.  133  f.  Cf. 
Jones,  J.  D. — The  Lord  of  Life  and  Death.  Ex¬ 
position  of  John  xi.  (1920). 


LESSON  XX:  THE  LAST  JOURNEY  TO 

JERUSALEM 

Harmony,  §§  120-127. 

Comm,  on  Matt.  19  and  20. 

Robertson — Epochs,  pp.  134-137. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  IV.,  chs. 
XIX.-XX.,  XXII.-XXIV. ;  D.  Smith,  ch.  XL. 

1.  Events,  places,  times.  §§  120-127. 

2.  The  third  journey  toward  Jerusalem.  §  120.  Cf. 

§  128a. 

3.  Course  of  this  journey  from  Ephraim  to  Jerusalem. 

Harm.,  footnote,  p.  139. 

4.  Combination  of  Matthew  and  Mark  with  Luke  from 


166  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


now  on.  Harm.,  footnote,  p.  139  and  141;  pp. 
276-279;  comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  393  f. 

5.  A  Third  Perean  ministry,  §§  122-125.  Given  by 

all  the  Synoptists.  See  Harm.,  footnotes,  pp. 
141,  143  and  147. 

6.  Beyond  Jordan  or  Perea.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  395. 

7.  Jesus  Going  to  Face  the  Issue.  Epochs,  pp.  134-137. 

8.  “Divorce  for  every  cause.”  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xix., 

3.  Cf.  also  comm,  on  Matt.,  v.,  31  f. 

9.  “For  your  hardness  of  heart.”  Comm,  on  Matt., 

xix.,  7-9.  Cf.  also  comm,  on  Matt.,  v.,  32.  Cf. 
Luke  xvi.,  18;  §  117. 

10.  Details  in  Matt.,  xxi.,  6-8.  Comm.,  p.  426. 

11.  “Little  Children,”  and  “of  such.”  Comm,  on  Matt., 

pp.  401-404. 

12.  Christ’s  teaching  about  poverty.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

xix. ,  21. 

13.  “Through  a  needle’s  eye.”  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xix., 

24. 

14.  “In  the  regeneration.”  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xix.,  28. 

15.  “First  shall  be  last,”  and  design  of  the  following 

parable. 

16.  Text  of  Matt.,  xx.,  16.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xix.,  30. 

17.  Jesus  foretelling  his  death  and  the  request  of  James 

and  John.  Harmony,  §  125;  Comm,  on  Matt., 

xx. :  17-28. 

18.  Sketch  of  Jericho.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  420;  comm. 

on  Matt.,  xx.,  17-28. 

19.  Discrepancies  as  to  place  and  number  healed  at 

Jericho.  Harm.,  footnote,  p.  149,  and  comm,  on 
Matt.,  xx.,  29  f. 

20.  Parable  of  the  Pounds,  not  same  as  the  Parable  of 

the  Talents.  Harm.,  §  127  and  footnote,  p.  150. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


167 


LESSON  XXI:  SUNDAY  AND  MONDAY  OF 

THE  LAST  WEEK 

Harmony,  §§  128a-130. 

Comm,  on  Matt.  21 :1-17. 

Robertson — Epochs,  pp.  137-140. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  V.,  chs. 

I.-II. ;  D.  Smith,  ch.  XLI. 

Westcott  or  other  comms.  on  John  12. 

1.  Time  of  the  Last  Public  Ministry.  Harmony,  p.  152. 
2-  Date  of  our  Saviour’s  death.  Harm.,  footnote,  p. 
152. 

3.  From  Jericho  to  Bethany,  time  Friday,  and  descrip¬ 

tion  of  Jerusalem.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  pp.  422- 
424,  and  map. 

4.  Various  visits  to  Bethany.  Harm.,  second  footnote, 

p.  152.  Spends  Saturday  in  Bethany.  Reason 
for  following  Mark  and  not  John  here.  Har¬ 
mony,  third  footnote. 

5.  The  Mount  of  Olives.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  424. 

6.  Events,  places,  times.  Sunday,  Monday.  §§  128a- 

130. 

7.  The  Challenge  to  Jerusalem.  Epochs,  pp.  137-139; 

Harmony,  last  footnote  on  p.  152. 

8.  The  prophecy  in  Matt.,  xxi.,  4  f .  Comm.,  p.  425. 

9.  “Upon  an  ass  and  upon  a  colt.”  Comm,  on  Matt., 

xxi.,  5. 

10.  Details  in  Matt.,  xxi.,  6-8.  Comm.,  p.  426. 

11.  The  Welcome  in  Jerusalem.  Comm.,  p.  427. 

12.  Second  cleansing  of  the  temple.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

xxi.,  5;  Harmony,  footnote  to  p.  156. 

13.  Description  of  the  temple  courts.  Comm.,  pp,  429  f. 

14.  “Out  of  the  mouth  of  babes  and  sucklings.”  Comm. 

on  Matt.,  xxi.,  16. 

15.  The  road  between  Jerusalem  and  Bethany.  Comm. 

on  Matt.,  p.  432  f. 


168  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


16.  The  barren  fig  tree.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxi.,  19. 

17.  A  foretaste  of  the  struggle.  Epochs,  p.  139  f. 

18.  The  Rejection  of  Jesus  by  the  Jews.  Harmony,  foot¬ 

note  to  p.  158. 


LESSON  XXII:  THE  LAST  DAY  IN  CHRIST’S 

PUBLIC  MINISTRY 

Harmony,  §§  131-138. 

Comm,  on  Matt.  21 :  19-23  :  39. 

Robertson — Epochs,  pp.  140-143. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Robertson,  The  Pharisees 
and  Jesus,  chs.  II  and  III;  Edersheim,  Bk.  V., 
chs.  III.-V. ;  D.  Smith,  chs.  XLII.-XLIII. 

1.  Events,  places,  time.  §§  131-138.  Details  of  this 

Tuesday.  Harmony,  footnote  to  p.  159. 

2.  Power  of  faith.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxi.,  20-22. 

3.  The  victorious  debate.  Epochs,  pp.  141-143. 

4.  The  attack  of  the  Sanhedrin.  Comm,  on  Matt.  21 : 

23 ;  Harmony,  footnote  to  p.  160. 

5.  The  defense  of  Jesus.  Comm,  on  Matt.  21:24 — 

22 :  14. 

6.  The  third  group  of  parables.  §  132.  General  mean¬ 

ing  of  each  of  these  three  parables.  See  comm, 
on  Matt,  and  Harmony,  second  footnote  to  p. 
160. 

7.  The  attack  of  the  Pharisees  and  the  Herodians.  De¬ 

scription  of  the  Herodians.  Comm,  on  Matt. 
22:  15-17. 

8.  “The  Things  of  Caesar  and  the  Things  of  God.” 

Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxii.,  21 ;  Harmony,  footnote 
to  p.  164. 

9.  Question  of  the  Sadducees  and  reply  of  Jesus. 

Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxii.,  30-32;  Harmony,  foot¬ 
note  to  p.  165. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST  1 69 

10.  Question  of  the  lawyer  and  the  reply  of  Jesus. 

Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxii.,  34-40. 

11.  Christ’s  final  question  to  which  they  could  not  reply. 

Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxii.,  43-46. 

12.  The  authorship  of  Ps.  110.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  459  f. 

13.  Rabbis  as  successors  of  Moses.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

p.  464. 

14.  Phylacteries.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxiii.,  5-7. 

15.  Rabbi.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxiii.,  8. 

16.  Proselytes.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxiii.,  15. 

17.  The  irony  of  Jesus.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxiii.,  23-33; 

Harmony,  footnote  to  p.  169. 

18.  Zacharias  the  son  of  Barachias.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

xxiii.,  35. 

19.  A  mournful  apostrophe  to  Jerusalem.  Comm,  on 

Matt.,  xxiii.,  37-39. 

20.  Christ’s  Last  Appearance  in  the  Temple.  Harmony, 

footnote  to  p.  172. 

See  Abbott — The  Last  Days  of  Jesus  Christ  (1918). 


LESSON  XXIII:  FROM  THE  DISCOURSE  ON 
THE  MOUNT  OF  OLIVES  TO  THE  LAST 
PASSOVER  MEAL. 

Flarmony,  §§  139-147. 

Comm,  on  Matt.  24:  1-26:25,  31-35. 

Robertson — Epochs,  pp.  143-149. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  V.,  chs. 
VI.-IX. ;  D.  Smith,  ch.  XL.-IV. 

1.  Events,  places,  times.  §§  139-147.  Tuesday  after¬ 

noon  and  evening,  Wednesday,  Thursday,  and 
Thursday  evening. 

2.  The  great  discourse  on  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem 

and  the  second  coming,  with  outline.  §  139. 
The  transition  and  blending  of  the  two  topics. 


170  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Comm.,  p.  479  f. ;  Epochs,  p.  143  f . ;  Harmony, 
p.  173,  footnote. 

3.  Misleading  signs.  Comm,  on  Matt,  xxiv.,  4-14. 

4.  “Abomination  of  desolation,”  and  “flee  unto  the 

mountains.”  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxiv.,  15  f. 

5.  Pella.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxiv.,  16. 

6.  “This  generation.”  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxiv.,  34. 

7.  “Of  that  day  and  hour.”  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxiv.,  36. 

8.  Suddenness  of  the  second  coming.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

xxiv.,  37-51. 

9.  Parable  of  the  Ten  Virgins.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p. 

498  f .,  and  p.  500b  f. 

10.  Parable  of  the  Talents.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  502b  f. 

11.  The  Judgment  Scene.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  507b. 

12.  Serving  Christ  by  serving  his  brethren.  Comm,  on 

Matt.,  p.  510. 

13.  Eternal  punishment  and  eternal  life.  Comm.,  p.  511- 

551a. 

14.  Jesus  preparing  himself  for  his  death  and  his  dis¬ 

ciples  for  the  separation.  Harm.,  p.  173  and 
footnote. 

15.  The  Supper  at  Bethany.  Harm.,  footnote,  p.  187 

(cf.  §  128a,  footnote),  and  comm,  on  Matt., 
xxvi.,  6 ;  Epochs,  p.  145  f . 

16.  The  Sanhedrin  receives  unexpected  help.  Comm,  on 

Matt.,  p.  522;  Epochs,  pp.  146-148. 

17.  Did  Jesus  eat  the  Passover?  Harm.,  footnotes,  p. 

190,  and  pp.  279-284.  Five  passages  in  John. 
Cf.  comm.,  p.  524  f. 

18.  Was  Judas  present  at  the  Lord’s  Supper?  Comm. 

on  Matt.,  xxvi.,  25 ;  Harmony,  p.  195,  footnote. 

19.  Jesus’  concern  for  the  disciples.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

xxvi.,  31-35;  Epochs,  p.  148  f. 

For  literature  on  the  eschatology  of  Jesus,  see  Bibli¬ 
ography. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


171 


LESSON  XXIV:  FROM  THE  LORD’S  SUPPER  TO 
THE  AGONY  IN  THE  GARDEN 

Harmony,  §§  148-152. 

Comm,  on  Matt.  26 :  26-29,  30,  36-46. 

Robertson— Epochs,  pp.  150-154. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  V.,  chs. 
X.-XII. ;  D.  Smith,  chs.  XLV.-XLVI ;  Westcott 
on  John  14-17  or  Robertson,  Divinity  of  Christ 
in  the  Gospel  of  John. 

1.  Events,  places,  time.  Thursday  night.  §§  148 — 152. 

2.  The  four  narratives  of  the  institution  of  the  bread 

and  wine,  in  two  pairs.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxvi., 
26;  Harmony,  p.  196,  footnote. 

3.  Blessing  the  loaf.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxvi.,  26. 

4.  The  phrase  “broken  for  you”  not  genuine  in  I.  Cor. 

10:  16.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  529. 

5.  Four  different  views  of  “this  is  my  body.”  Comm. 

on  Matt.,  p.  529  f. 

6.  “Blood  of  the  covenant.”  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  530  f., 

and  footnote. 

7.  Different  names  for  the  ordinance.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

p.  531b. 

8.  The  future  Kingdom.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  532. 

9.  Compare  the  farewell  discourse  to  the  eleven  in 

§§  149 — 151  (and  p.  197,  footnote,  and  p.  198, 
footnotes)  with  the  formal  address  to  the  twelve 
and  others  in  §  54.  Observe  adaptation  of  each 
to  time,  place,  and  circumstances.  Epochs,  pp. 
150-152. 

10.  Gethsemane.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  535b  f . ;  Har¬ 

mony,  p.  201,  footnote. 

11.  A  real  human  soul  suffering.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p. 

536  f. 

12.  What  constituted  this  suffering?  Comm,  on  Matt., 

p.  539a. 


172  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


13.  “That  ye  enter  not  into  temptation.”  Comm,  on 

Matt.,  xxvi.,  41. 

14.  “Sleep  on  now,”  and  “Rise,  let  us  be  going.”  Comm. 

on  Matt.,  xxvi.,  45. 

15.  The  struggle  of  Jesus  with  himself.  Epochs,  pp. 

152-4. 

For  books  on  the  Lord's  Supper,  see  literature  on 
Ecclesiology.  Also  David  Smith's  Pilgrim's 
Hospice  (1906),  and  Goetz — Das  Abendmahl 
eine  Diatheke  oder  sein  letzter  Gleichniss  (1920). 

i 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  CHRIST’S  FAREWELL  DISCOURSE  AND 

THE  INTERCESSORY  PRAYER 

Alexander,  Thomas — The  Intercessory  Prayer  (1868). 
Bowen- — Love  Revealed.  Meditations  on  John  xiii.-xvii. 
(1884). 

Burrell— In  the  Upper  Room  (1913). 

Dunham — John  Fourteen  (1917). 

Garvie — The  Master's  Comfort  and  Hope  (1917). 
Maclaren,  Ian — In  the  Upper  Room  (1896). 

Rainsford — The  Lord’s  Prayer  for  Believers.  New  edi¬ 
tion  (1895). 

Sample— Christ’s  Valedictory. 

Swete — The  Last  Discourse  and  Prayer.  New  edition 
(1915). 

On  Judas  Iscariot,  see 

Baldwin — The  Gospel  of  Judas  Iscariot  (1902). 

Page — The  Diary  of  Judas  Iscariot  (1912). 


LESSON  XXV:  THE  ARREST  AND  TRIAL 

OF  JESUS 

Harmony,  §§  153-161. 

Comm,  on  Matt.  26 :  47-27 : 26. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


173 


Robertson — Epochs,  pp.  154-160. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  V.,  chs. 
XIII.-XIV. ;  D.  Smith,  chs.  XLVII.-XLVIII. 

1.  Events,  places,  time.  Friday,  long  before  dawn  and 

till  sunrise.  §§  153-161. 

2.  The  coming  of  Judas  with  the  multitude  and  the 

soldiers.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxvi.,  47. 

3.  The  betrayer’s  kiss.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxvi.,  47. 

4.  The  character  of  Judas.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  pp. 

556b  f. 

5.  The  rashness  of  Peter.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  pp.  541  f. 

6.  The  surrender  of  Jesus.  Epochs,  pp.  154  f. 

7.  The  Jewish  trial  in  three  parts.  Harm.,  footnote, 

p.  209;  comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  544. 

8.  The  Roman  trial  in  three  parts.  Harm.,  footnote, 

p.  216;  comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  544. 

9.  Annas  and  Caiaphas.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  544. 

10.  Before  Annas.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  544b  f. 

11.  The  Sanhedrin.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  546. 

12  The  charge  against  Him.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  547. 

13.  Jesus  speaking  on  oath  in  a  court  of  justice,  and 

admitting  that  He  is  the  Messiah.  Comm,  on 
Matt.,  p.  548b.  The  blasphemy  charged.  Legal¬ 
ity  of  the  High  Priest’s  course.  Comm,  on 
Matt.,  p.  548b  f.;  Epochs,  pp.  155-160. 

14.  The  ground  of  conviction  and  the  real  ground  against 

Him.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  549  f. 

15.  Peter’s  three  denials.  Harm.,  footnote,  p.  212,  and 

Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  55 lb-3.  Cf.  also  p.  554. 

16.  The  decision  of  the  Sanhedrin.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

p.  555. 

17.  The  formal  stage  of  Jewish  trial.  Observe  that  Luke 

alone  gives  details  here.  Harmony,  §  157  and 
p.  215  footnote. 

18.  End  of  Judas.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  556-8. 

19.  The  prophecy  in  Matt.,  xxvii.,  9. 


174-  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


20.  Pilate.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  560b  f.  Cf.  also  p. 

567a. 

21.  Reasons  for  our  Lord’s  silence  before  the  Sanhedrin 

and  before  Pilate.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  562a. 

22.  Herod  Antipas  sees  Jesus  at  last.  §  160. 

23.  About  Barabbas.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  562b  f. 

24.  About  Pilate’s  Wife.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  563. 

25.  Time  of  the  condemnation.  Jo.,  xix.,  14.  Harm., 

footnote,  p.  224,  and  pp.  284 — 287. 

26.  The  Guilt  of  Pilate,  of  the  Sanhedrin,  of  the  Jewish 

People,  of  Judas.  Harmony,  p.  225,  footnote. 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  TRIAL  OF  JESUS 

Broade— The  Sixfold  Trial  of  Our  Lord  (1899). 

Broderick — The  Trial  and  Crucifixion  of  Jesus  Christ 
of  Nazareth  (1908). 

Buss — The  Trial  of  Jesus  (1906). 

Chandler — The  Trial  of  Jesus  from  a  Lawyer’s  Stand¬ 
point.  Two  volumes  (1908). 

Chapman — Legalized  Wrong  (1899). 

Chase — The  Trial  of  Jesus  (1876). 

DeLand — The  Mis-Trials  of  Jesus  (1914). 

Drucker — The  Trial  of  Jesus  (1907). 

Greenleaf,  Simon — The  Testimony  of  the  Evangelists 
Examined  by  the  Rulers  of  Evidence  Administered 
in  the  Courts  of  Justice.  Also  a  Review  of  the  Trial 
of  Jesus  (1876). 

Hobbs — The  Court  of  Pilate  (1906).  The  so-called 
Gesta  Pilati  and  Cesar’s  Court  are  also  apocry¬ 
phal. 

Husband — The  Prosecution  of  Jesus  (1916). 

Innes,  Taylor — The  Trial  of  Jesus.  A  Legal  Mono¬ 
graph  (1899). 

Kastner — Jesus  for  Pilatus  (1912). 

Kaye — The  Trial  of  Christ  (1909). 

Klarman — The  Trial  of  Jesus  before  Pilate. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


175 


Rosadi — The  Trial  of  Jesus  (1905). 

Stalker — The  Trial  and  Death  of  Jesus  Christ  (1894). 
Stevenson — The  Judges  of  Jesus  (1909). 

Stout — The  Trial  and  Crucifixion  of  Christ  (1886). 
Wellford— The  Lynching  of  Jesus  (1905). 

Wilson,  T.  F. — The  Trial  of  Jesus.  Historical  and  Legal 
Standpoint  (1906). 


LESSON  XXVI :  THE  CRUCIFIXION 

Harmony,  §§  162-168. 

Comm,  on  Matt.  27 : 27-66. 

Robertson — Epochs,  pp.  160-8. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  V.,  ch. 
XV. ;  D.  Smith,  ch.  XLIX. 

1.  Events,  places,  time.  The  four  stages  by  hours  from 

the  start  till  the  burial.  §§  162-168. 

2.  The  Mockery  of  Jesus  by  the  Soldiers.  Harmony, 

§  162,  and  footnote  to  p.  226.  Cf.  The  Mock¬ 
ery  by  the  Sanhedrin,  §  155. 

3.  Simon  bearing  the  Cross.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

xxvii.,  32. 

4.  Place  of  the  Crucifixion.  Harm.,  footnote,  p.  226, 

and  comm,  on  Matt.,  xxvii.,  33. 

5.  Wine  and  gall.  Comm  on  Matt.,  p.  569. 

6.  Nature  and  time  of  the  Crucifixion.  Comm,  on 

Matt.,  xxvii.,  35. 

7.  The  Accusation.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  571. 

8.  State  the  seven  sayings  on  the  Cross,  at  what  point 

each  one  was  uttered,  and  by  whom  recorded. 
The  first  three  relate  to  others,  and  the  last  four 
to  Christ.  The  first  three  during  the  first  three 
hours,  the  last  four  during  the  last  three  hours. 
Three  are  by  Luke,  three  are  by  John,  one  by 
Matthew  and  Mark.  Probable  order  of  the 


176  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


first  three,  Harm.,  footnote,  p.  228.  Probable 
order  of  the  last  four,  Llarm.,  footnote,  p.  232. 
Meaning  of  the  fourth  saying,  Comm,  on  Matt., 
xxvii.,  46. 

9.  The  two  robbers  and  the  other  revilers.  Comm,  on 
Matt.,  xxvii.,  39-44. 

10.  The  darkness.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxvii.,  45. 

11.  The  veil  of  the  temple.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxvii.,  51. 

12.  Raising  the  dead  from  the  tombs.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

xxvii.,  52. 

13.  The  shame  of  the  Cross.  Epochs,  pp.  160-5. 

14.  Impression  made  on  three  classes  of  spectators. 

Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  576b  f. 

15.  Mary  Magdalene.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  577  f. 

16.  Joseph  of  Arimathea.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  579  f. 

17.  Jesus  in  the  Tomb.  Epochs,  pp.  165-8. 

18.  The  fear  of  the  rulers.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxvii.,  63-5. 

19.  Setting  a  watch.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxvii.,  66  (end). 

20.  The  Women  on  the  Sabbath.  Harmony,  p.  237, 

footnote. 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  CRUCIFIXION 

(For  literature  on  the  Atonement,  see  Biblical  and  Sys¬ 
tematic  Theology,  as  only  a  few  of  the  mass  of  books 
on  the  Cross  are  given.) 

Ahlfeld — The  Voice  from  the  Cross  (1888). 

Aldrich — A  Critical  Examination  of  the  Time  of  Our 
Saviour's  Crucifixion  (1882). 

Baxter,  Richard — The  Crucifying  of  the  World  by  the 
Cross  of  Christ.  New  edition  (1861). 

Belzer — Die  Geschichte  des  Leidens  und  Sterbens  der 
Auferstehung  und  Himmelfahrt  des  Herrn  (1903). 
Birks — The  Shadow  of  the  Cross  in  Our  Lord’s  Min¬ 
istry  (1891). 

Brown,  Charles — Lessons  from  the  Cross  (1904). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


177 


Burrell — The  Singular  Death  of  Christ  (1900). 

Clow — The  Cross  and  Christian  Experience  (1908). 
Clow — In  the  Day  of  the  Cross  (1909). 

Dalman — Der  leidende  und  sterbende  Messias  (1888). 
Denney — The  Death  of  Christ.  Second  edition  (1911). 
Falconer — The  Three  Crosses  (1907). 

Forsyth — The  Cruciality  of  the  Cross  (1909). 

Gordon — Reflections  in  Palestine  (1883). 

Hanna — The  Last  Day  of  Our  Lord’s  Passion  (1871). 
Hirsch — The  Crucifixion  from  a  Jewish  Standpoint 
(1901). 

Hoge,  P.  H. — The  Divine  Tragedy.  A  Poem  (1905). 
Howe — The  True  Site  of  Calvary  (1871). 

Krummacher — The  Suffering  Saviour. 

Jowett — The  School  of  Calvary  (1911). 

Landels — The  Cross  of  Christ  (1864). 

Nicoll — The  Seven  Words  from  the  Cross  (1896). 

Ross,  G.  A.  Johnston — The  Cross.  The  Report  of  a 
Misgiving  (1912). 

Rutherford — Christ  Dying. 

Simpson — Christus  Crucifixus  (1909). 

Stalker — The  Trial  and  Death  of  Jesus  Christ  (1894). 
Stone — The  Passion  of  Christ  (1912). 

Stroud — A  Treatise  on  the  Physical  Cause  of  the  Death 
of  Christ  (1846). 

Trench,  G.  H.- — The  Crucifixion  and  Resurrection  of 
Christ  in  the  Light  of  Tradition  (1908). 

Tholuck — Light  from  the  Cross  ( 1859)  0 
Vaughan — Lessons  on  the  Cross  and  Passion  (1869). 
Wabnitz — Histoire  de  la  vie  de  Jesus :  La  passion,  la 
mort,  et  la  resurrection  de  Jesus  (1904). 

Westberg — Zur  neutest.  Chronologie  und  Golgothas 
Ortslage  (1911). 

Wontner — Visio  Crucis  (1918). 

Wright — The  Cross  of  Our  Lord  (1909). 


178  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


LESSON  XXVII :  THE  RESURRECTION  AND 

ASCENSION 

Harmony,  §§  169-184. 

Comm,  on  Matt.,  ch.  28. 

Robertson — Epochs,  ch.  VIII. 

For  fuller  discussion,  see  Edersheim,  Bk.  V.,  chs. 
XVI.-XVII. ;  D.  Smith,  ch.  L. 

1.  Movements  of  Jesus  during  the  Forty  Days.  First 

footnote,  Harm.,  p.  239  and  footnote. 

2.  Events,  places,  times.  §§  169-184. 

3.  Five  narratives  of  the  resurrection  of  Jesus.  Comm. 

on  Matt.,  p.  583. 

4.  How  long  did  Jesus  remain  in  the  tomb?  Harm., 

footnote,  p.  240,  and  Harm.,  pp.  289-291. 

5.  Time  of  his  resurrection.  Harm.,  pp.  287-289,  and 

second  footnote  to  p.  239.  Cf.  Comm,  on  Matt., 
p.  583  f.  In  the  Harm.,  Luke,  xxiv.,  1,  and  John, 
xx.,  1,  are  parallel  to  Mark,  xvi.,  2.  Then  Matt., 
xxviii.,  1,  would  be  a  visit  before  sundown  on 
the  Sabbath  to  see  the  sepulchre.  After  sun¬ 
down  the  two  Marys  and  Salome  bought  the 
spices  (Mark,  xvi.,  1).  Early  next  morning  they 
proceeded  to  the  tomb  (Mark,  xvi.,  2;  Luke, 
xxiv.,  1;  Jo.,,  xx.,  1).  The  resurrection,  pre¬ 
ceded  by  the  earthquake  (Matt.,  xxviii.,  2),  had 
already  taken  place  before  they  came.  Such  is 
the  probable  order  of  events  here. 

6.  The  Attitude  of  the  Disciples.  Epochs,  pp.  169  f. 

7.  The  fact  of  the  empty  tomb.  Epochs,  pp.  170-2. 

8.  Five  appearances  on  the  first  day,  and  ten  in  all. 

Harm.,  p.  242. 

9.  The  ten  appearances  in  their  order.  Comm,  on  Matt., 

p.  590a. 

10.  Men  or  angels,  and  number.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  585. 
The  story  of  the  angels.  Epochs,  pp.  172  f. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


179 


11.  John’s  intuition.  Epochs,  pp.  173  f. 

12.  As  to  Jesus  appearing  first  to  women,  and  first  to 

Mary.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  587 ;  Epochs,  pp. 
174-177. 

13.  Report  of  the  Watch.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  xxviii., 

11-15. 

14.  Unexpected  light  on  the  problem.  Epochs,  pp.  177-9. 

15.  A  Conference  on  the  situation.  Epochs,  pp.  179-182. 

16.  The  Case  of  Thomas.  Epochs,  pp.  182-4. 

17.  By  the  Sea  of  Galilee.  Epochs,  pp.  184-6;  Har¬ 

mony,  p.  247,  footnote. 

18.  The  three  final  commissions  of  Jesus.  Harm.,  foot¬ 

note,  p.  246. 

19.  The  fact  that  Jesus  rose.  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  588b. 

20.  What  Jesus’  Resurrection  carries  with  it.  Comm,  on 

Matt.,  p.  589a. 

21.  Theological  importance  of  Christ’s  Resurrection. 

Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  589b. 

22.  Remarks  on  these  appearances  in  general.  Comm,  on 

Matt.,  p.  590. 

23.  On  a  mountain  in  Galilee.  Number  present  and  to 

whom  the  commission  was  given.  Harm.,  foot¬ 
note,  p.  249,  and  Comm,  on  Matt.,  p.  591.  Wor¬ 
ship  by  some,  doubt  by  others.  Epochs,  pp. 
186-8. 

24.  The  commission  in  Matthew. 

(1)  “All  authority,”  etc.  Comm.,  p.  592. 

(2)  Christianity  a  missionary  religion.  Comm.,  p. 
592b  f. 

(3)  “Disciple.”  Comm.,  p.  593. 

(4)  “All  the  nations.”  Comm.,  p.  593  f. 

(5)  Baptizing  in  the  name.  Comm.,  p.  594  f. 

(6)  The  formula  for  baptism  and  the  design  of  bap¬ 
tism.  Comm.,  p.  595  f. 

(7)  The  closing  promise.  Comm.,  p.  596b  f. 

25.  The  last  view.  Epochs,  pp.  188-190. 


180  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  RESURRECTION  AND  ASCENSION 

(A  Selection) 

Androt — Jesus-Christ  est-il  resurrecte?  (1909). 

Anonymous — Resurrectio  Christi  (1909). 

Archer-Shepherd — Nature  and  Evidence  of  the  Resur¬ 
rection  of  Christ  (1910). 

Boardman — Our  Risen  King’s  Forty  Days  (1902). 

Bowen — Resurrection  in  the  New  Testament  (1911). 

Breton — La  Resurrection  du  Christ  (1908). 

Brown,  J.  B. — The  Risen  Christ  (1890). 

Bruckner — Die  sterbende  und  auferstehunde  Gottheiland 
in  die  orientalische  Religionen  und  ihre  Verhaltniss 
zum  Christentum  (1908). 

Burckhardt — Die  Auferstehung  des  Herrn. 

Callaud — Le  Probleme  de  la  Resurrection  du  Christ 
(1909). 

Carpenter,  W.  Boyd— The  Forty  Days  of  the  Risen  Life 
(1898). 

Case — The  Resurrection  of  Jesus  (1920). 

Eck — Ueber  die  Bedeutung  der  Auferstehung  Jesu 
(1898). 

Edgar — The  Gospel  of  a  Risen  Saviour  (1892). 

Edgar — The  Resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ  (1886). 

Faunce,  D.  W. — Advent  and  Ascension  (1903). 

Frick — The  Resurrection  and  Paul’s  Argument  (1915). 

Goguel — Les  sources  du  recit  Tohannique  de  la  passion 
(1910). 

Gurney — The  Living  Lord  and  the  Open  Grave  (1902). 

Hanna — The  Forty  Days  after  Our  Lord’s  Resurrection 
(1866). 

Herman — The  Glory  of  the  Risen  Lord  (1917). 

Ihmels — Die  Auferstehung  Jesu  Christi  (1906). 

Kennedy — The  Resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ  (1895). 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRIST 


181 


Krummacher — The  Risen  Redeemer  (1863). 

Lake,  Kirsopp — Historical  Evidence  of  the  Resurrection 
of  Jesus  Christ  (1907). 

Latham — The  Risen  Master  (1901). 

Loofs — Die  Auferstehungsberichte  und  ihr  Wert.  3  Aufl. 
(1908). 

Maltby — The  Meaning  of  the  Resurrection  (1921). 

M archant — Theories  of  the  Resurrection  (1899). 

Milligan,  W. — The  Resurrection  of  Our  Lord  (1886). 

Milligan,  W.— The  Ascension  and  Heavenly  Priesthood 
of  Our  Lord. 

Moberly — Sayings  of  the  Great  Forty  Days.  New  edi¬ 
tion  (1875). 

Meyer,  A. — Die  Auferstehung  Christi  (1905). 

Orr — The  Resurrection  of  Jesus  (1908). 

Randolph — The  Empty  Tomb  (1906). 

Riggenbach — Die  Auferstehung  Jesu  (1905).  Trans. 
(1907). 

Ring — The  Most  Certain  Fact  in  History  (1893). 

Robinson,  C.  H. — Studies  in  the  Resurrection  of  Christ 
(1909). 

Shaw,  J.  M. — The  Resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ  (1920). 

Simpson,  W.  J.  Sparrow — Our  Lord’s  Resurrection 
(1906). 

Skrine — The  Survival  of  Jesus  (1917). 

Spitta — Die  Auferstehung  Jesu  (1918). 

Stapfer — Death  and  Resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ 
(1898). 

Stone — The  Glory  After  the  Passion  (1912). 

Swete — The  Appearances  of  Our  Lord  After  the  Resur¬ 
rection  (1907). 

Swete — The  Ascended  Christ  (1910). 

Tait — Heavenly  Session  of  Our  Lord  (1912). 

Thorburn — Resurrection  Narratives  and  Modern  Criti¬ 
cism  (1910). 

West,  Gilbert — Observations  on  the  History  and  Evi- 


182  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


dences  of  the  Resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ.  New 
edition  (1874). 

Westcott — Gospel  of  the  Resurrection  (1874). 
Westcott — The  Revelation  of  the  Risen  Lord.  Fifth 
edition  (1891). 


PART  III:  THE  ACTS  AND  THE 

EPISTLES 

(PROBABLY  A.  D.  30  to  A.  D.  90) 


PART  III:  THE  ACTS  AND  THE 

EPISTLES 

(Probably  A.  D.  30  to  A.  D.  90) 

The  text-books  used  in  connection  with  this  part  of  the 
New  Testament  Syllabus  are  the  American  Revision  of 
the  New  Testament  in  the  Student’s  Chronological  New 
Testament,  Josephus,  the  professor’s  Epochs  in  the  Life 
of  Paul,  Angus’s  Environment  of  Early  Christianity, 
Carver’s  Commentary  on  Acts  (or  some  other  commen¬ 
tary),  and  any  good  commentary  on  the  various  Epistles. 
Specific  references  for  further  study  are  given  in  each 
lesson  to  other  books  like  those  of  Ramsay,  David  Smith’s 
Life  and  Letters  of  St.  Paul,  Conybeare  and  Howson’s 
Life  and  Epistles  of  St.  Paul. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

I.  BOOKS  ON  THE  APOSTOLIC  PERIOD 

(A  Brief  Selection) 

1.  General  History.  (See  also  in  the  General  Bibliog¬ 
raphy  for  the  New  Testament  the  books  on  New 
Testament  Times  and  History.) 

Arnold,  T.  W. — The  Roman  System  of  Provincial  Ad¬ 
ministration.  New  edition  (1906). 

Botsford — Ancient  History. 

Botsford — History  of  Greece. 

Botsford — History  of  Rome. 

Bouchier — Syria  as  a  Roman  Province  (1916). 

185 


186  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Bury— History  of  the  Roman  Empire  (27  B.  C.— 180 
A.  D.)  (1893). 

Droysen — Geschichte  des  Hellenismus.  2  Aufl.  (1877). 

Ferrero — Greatness  and  Decline  of  Rome.  Five  vol¬ 
umes  (1907). 

Ferrero — Characters  and  Events  of  Roman  History 
(1909). 

Ferrero — The  Women  of  the  Caesars. 

Ferrero — Short  History  of  Rome. 

Harrer — Studies  in  the  History  of  the  Province  of  Syria 
(1915). 

Hogarth — The  Nearer  East  (1902). 

Juster — Les  juifs  dans  l’empire  romaine  (1914). 

Kaerst — Geschichte  des  hellenistischen  Zeitalters.  2  vol¬ 
umes  (1901-9). 

Mahaffy — The  Silver  Age  in  the  Greek  World  (1905). 

Mommsen— The  History  of  Rome.  Five  volumes 
(1894). 

Mommsen- — The  Provinces  of  the  Roman  Empire  from 
Caesar  to  Diocletian.  Two  volumes  (1909). 

Ramsay — Historical  Geography  of  Asia  Minor  (1890). 

Schurer — The  Jewish  People  in  the  Time  of  Jesus 
Christ.  Five  volumes  (1891). 

2.  Culture  of  the  Period.  (See  also  the  General  Bibli¬ 
ography  and  that  in  Lesson  XIII  on  Interbiblical 
History.) 

Abbott — Common  People  of  Ancient  Rome  (1912). 

Baumgartner,  Poland  and  Wagner — Die  hellenistisch- 
romische  Kultur  (1913). 

Botsford — Hellenic  Civilization  (1915). 

Boyd — Public  Libraries  and  Literary  Culture  in  Ancient 
Rome  (1915). 

Buckland — The  Roman  Law  of  Slavery  (1909). 

Buss — Roman  Law  and  History  in  the  New  Testament 
(1901). 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES  187 

Butcher — Some  Aspects  of  Greek  Genius.  Third  edi¬ 
tion  (1904). 

Davis — The  Influence  of  Wealth  in  Imperial  Rome 
(1910). 

Deissmann — Light  from  the  Ancient  East  (1910). 

Deissmann — New  Light  on  the  New  Testament  (1907). 

Dill — Roman  Society  from  Nero  to  Marcus  Aurelius 
(1905). 

Ferguson — Legal  Terms  Common  to  the  Macedonian 
Inscriptions  and  the  New  Testament. 

Fowler — The  City-State  of  the  Greeks  and  Romans. 
Second  edition  (1895). 

Fowler — Social  Life  at  Rome  in  the  Age  of  Cicero 
(1908). 

Friedlander — Roman  Life  and  Manners  under  the  Early 
Empire.  Three  volumes  (1909-10). 

Hahn — Rom  und  Romanismus  im  griechisch-romischen 
Osten  (1906). 

Inge — Society  in  Rome  under  the  Caesars  (1894). 

Livingston — The  Greek  Genius  and  Its  Meaning  to  Us 
(1912). 

Livingston — The  Legacy  of  Greece  (1923). 

Mahaffy — Survey  of  Greek  Civilization  (1896). 

Marquardt — Das  Privatleben  der  Romer  (1878). 

Meyer,  E. — Sklaverei  im  Aeltestum  (1898). 

Putnam — Authors  and  Their  Public  in  Ancient  Times 
(1894). 

Skeel — Travel  in  First  Century. 

Stobart — The  Glory  That  Was  Greece  (1911). 

Stobart — The  Grandeur  That  Was  Rome  (1912). 

Thieling — Hellenismus  in  Kleinafrika  (1911). 

Torr — Ancient  Ships. 

Tucker — Life  in  the  Roman  World  of  Nero  and  St.  Paul 
(1910). 

.Wendland — Die  hellenistisch-romische  Kultur.  3  Aufl. 
(1912). 


188  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


3.  Philosophy 

Arnold,  E.  V. — Roman  Stoicism  (1911). 

Bevan — Stoics  and  Sceptics  (1913). 

Bigg — Neoplatonism  (1911). 

Bonhoffer — Epiktetand  d.  Stoa  (1890). 

Bonhoffer — Epiktet  und  das  Neue  Testament  (1911). 
Bussell — The  School  of  Plato  (1896). 

Cairo,  E. — The  Evolution  of  Theology  in  the  Greek 
Philosophers.  Two  volumes  (1904). 

Davidson — The  Stoic  Creed  (1907). 

Drummond — Philo-Judaeus,  or  Jewish-Alexandrian  Phi¬ 
losophy.  Two  volumes  (1888). 

Fairbairn — The  Philosophy  of  Religion.  Fifth  edition 
(1908). 

Hegel — Philosophy  of  Religion  (1895). 

Hicks — Stoic  and  Epicurean  (1910). 

Hicks — Traces  of  Greek  Philosophy  and  Roman  Law  in 
the  New  Testament  (1896). 

Murray — The  Stoic  Philosophy  (1915). 

Sharp — Epictetus  and  the  New  Testament  (1914). 
Thill y — History  of  Philosophy. 

Windelband — History  of  Ancient  Philosophy  (1900). 

4.  History  of  Religion  and  Morality .  (See  previous  lists 

in  the  General  Bibliography,  in  the  Interbiblical 
History,  Chapter  XII  in  particular,  and  the  King¬ 
dom  Teaching  and  the  Eschatology  of  Jesus.) 

Adam — Religious  Teachers  of  Greece  (1908). 

Allard — Le  christianisme  et  l’empire  romain  de  Neron 
a  Theodose  (1897). 

Allo — L’evangile  en  face  du  syncretisme  pai'en  (1910). 
Angus — The  Environment  of  Early  Christianity  (1915). 
Anrich — Das  antike  Mysterienwesen  in  seinem  Einfluss 
auf  das  Christentum  (1894). 

Anz — Zur  Frage  nach  dem  Ursprung  des  Gnosticismus. 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES  189 

Arneth — Das  classische  Heidentum  und  die  christliche 
Religion.  Two  volumes  (1895). 

Baur,  A. — Vom  Griechentum  zum  Christentum  (1910). 

Bauer,  B. — Christus  und  die  Caisaren.  2  Aufl.  (1879). 

Berthelot — Die  Stellung  der  Israeliten  und  der  Juden 
zu  den  Fremden  (1896). 

Berthelot — Das  religionsgeschichtliche  Problem  des 
spatjudentums  (1909). 

Berthelot — Die  jiidische  Religion  von  der  Zeit  Esras  bis 
zum  Zeitalter  Christi  (1911). 

Beurlier — Le  cult  rendu  aux  empereurs  (1891). 

Bevan — Hellenism  and  Christianity  (1921). 

Boissier — La  Religion  romain  d’  Auguste  aux  Antonius. 
Two  volumes  (1874). 

Bousset — Die  Religion  des  Judentums  im  neutest.  Zeit¬ 
alter.  2  Aufl.  (1906). 

Bousset — Hauptprobleme  der  Gnosis  (1907). 

Bousset — Anti-christ. 

Bugge — Das  Christusmysterium  (1915). 

Burkitt — Jewish  and  Christian  Apocalypses  (1913). 

Burton — Spirit,  Soul  and  Flesh  (1918). 

Caird,  E. — The  Evolution  of  Greek  Religion.  Third 
edition.  Two  volumes  (1899). 

Campbell — Religion  in  Greek  Literature  (1898). 

Carter — Religious  Life  of  Ancient  Rome  (1912). 

Charles — Eschatology,  Hebrew,  Jewish,  and  Christian. 
Second  edition  (1913). 

Cheetpiam — The  Mysteries,  Pagan  and  Christian 
(1897). 

Clemen — Primitive  Christianity  and  Its  Non- Jewish 
Sources  (1912). 

Clemen — Der  Einfluss  der  Mysterienreligionen  auf  das 
alteste  Christentum  (1913). 

Clemen — Die  Reste  der  primitiven  Religion  im  altesten 
Christentum  (1916). 

Cumont — Oriental  Religions. 

Cumont — Mysteries  of  Mithra  (1903). 


190  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 

Cumont — Astrology  and  Religion  among  the  Greeks  and 
Romans  (1912). 

Cumont — Les  religions  orientales  dans  le  paganisme 
romain. 

De  Zwaan — Antieke  Cultuur  om  en  achter  het  Nieuwe 
Testament.  Second  edition  (1918). 

Dollinger — The  Gentile  and  the  Jew.  Two  volumes 
(1906). 

Eysinga — Voorchristelijk  Christendom  (1918). 

Edmunds — Buddhistic  and  Christian  Gospels.  Two  vol¬ 
umes  (1902-9). 

Farnell — Higher  Aspects  of  Greek  Religion  (1912). 

Farrer — Paganism  and  Christianity  (1891). 

Faye — Introduction  a  l’etude  du  Gnosticisme. 

Felten — Neutest.  Zeitgeschichte  (1910). 

Ferrero — The  Ruin  of  the  Ancient  Civilization  and  the 
Triumph  of  Christianity  (1921). 

Foucart — Les  mysteres  d’  eleusis  (1914). 

Fowler — Religious  Experience  of  the  Roman  People 

(i9ii). 

Fowler — Roman  Ideas  of  the  Deity  in  the  last  Century 
before  the  Christian  Era  (1914). 

Glover — The  Conflict  of  Religions  in  the  Early  Roman 
Empire  (1909). 

Glover — Progress  in  Religion  to  the  Christian  Era 
(1922). 

Gunkel — -Zum  religionsgeschichtlichen  Verstandnis  des 
N.  T.  2  Aufl.  (1910). 

Hall— Historical  Setting  of  the  Early  Gospel  (1912). 

Halliday — Lectures  on  the  History  of  Roman  Religion 
(1923). 

Harrison,  Miss  J.  E. — Prolegomena  to  the  Study  of  the 
Greek  Religion  (1903). 

Hase — New  Testament  Parallels  in  Buddhistic  Litera¬ 
ture  (1907). 

Heinrici — Die  Hermesmystik  und  das  Neue  Testament 
(1918). 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


191 


Heinrici — Hellenismus  und  Christentum  (1909). 
Heinrici — Die  Eigenart  des  Christentums  (1911). 
Holtzmann,  O. — Neutest.  Zeitgeschichte.  2  Aufl. 
(1906). 

Jacoby — Das  antike  Mysterienwesen  und  das  Christen¬ 
tum  (1910). 

Jeremias — Babylonisches  im  Neuen  Testament  (1905). 
Jong — Das  antike  Mysterienwesen  (1909). 

Kautsky — Der  Ursprung  des  Christentums  (1908). 
Keim — Rom  und  das  Christentum  (1881). 

Kennedy — St.  Paul  and  the  Mystery-Religions  (1913). 
King — Gnostics  (1887). 

Legge — Forerunners  and  Rivals  of  Christianity  (1916). 
Lewis — Paganism  Surviving  in  Christianity  (1892). 
Lichtenbahn — Die  Offenbarung  in  Gnosticismus 
(1902). 

Lohmeyer — Christuskult  und  Kaiserkult  (1919). 
Mansel — The  Gnostic  Heresies  (1875). 

Milligan — Here  and  There  Among  the  Papyri  (1922). 
Mills — Our  Own  Religion  in  Ancient  Persia  (1913). 
Moore — Religious  Thought  of  the  Greeks  and  of  the 
Romans  from  Homer  to  the  Triumph  of  Christianity 
(1916). 

Moulton,  J.  H. — From  Egyptian  Rubbish  Heaps  (1916). 
Norden — Agnostos  Theos  (1913). 

Oesterley — The  Doctrine  of  the  Last  Things  (1908). 
Oesterley — The  Religion  and  Worship  of  the  Syna¬ 
gogue.  Second  edition  (1911). 

Patterson — Mithraism  and  Christianity  (1921). 

Petrie — Personal  Religion  in  Egypt  before  Christianity 
(1909). 

Pfleiderer — Christian  Origins  (1906). 

Pressense — The  Religions  before  Christ  (1862). 
Pthythian-Adams — Mithraism  ( 1915 ) . 

Reitzenstein — Die  hellenistischen  Mysterienreligionen 
(1910).  2  Aufl.  (1920). 

Reitzenstein — Poimandres. 


192  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Renan — The  Influence  of  the  Institutions,  Thought,  and 
Culture  of  Rome  on  Christianity  ( 1880) . 

Schmitz,  O. — Die  Opferanschauung  des  spatern  Juden- 
tums  und  die  Opferaussagen  des  N.  T.  (1910). 

Scott — The  Apologetic  of  the  N.  T.  (1907). 

Sheldon — The  Mystery  Religions  and  Christianity 
(1918). 

Soltau — Das  Fortleben  des  Heidentums  in  der  altchrist- 
lichen  Kirche  (1900). 

Staerck— Neutest.  Zeitgeschichte.  2  Aufl.  (1912). 

Sweet — Roman  Emperor  Worship  (1919). 

Swiney — The  Esoteric  Teaching  of  the  Gnostics  (1909). 

Troupe — St.  Paul  and  the  Mystery  Religions. 

Uhlhorn — Conflict  of  Christianity  with  Heathenism 
(1879). 

Walton — Cult  of  Asklepios  (1894). 

Wenley — Preparation  for  Christianity  (1898). 

Westermarck — Origin  and  Development  of  the  Moral 
Ideas.  Two  volumes  (1906-8). 

Whittaker — The  Origins  of  Christianity.  Second  edi¬ 
tion  (1909). 

Wilamowitz-Moellendorff  and  Niese — Staat  und 
Gesellschaft  der  Griechen  und  Romer  (1910). 

Wissowa — Die  Religion  und  Mythologie  der  Romer.  2 
Aufl.  (1912). 

5.  The  History  of  Apostolic  Christianity 

(Most  of  the  church  histories  have  a  sketch  of  the 
Apostolic  age.) 

Achelis— Das  Christentum  in  den  ersten  drei  Jahrhun- 
derten  (1912). 

Addis — Christianity  and  the  Roman  Empire  (1902). 

Adeney — Men  of  the  New  Testament  (1915). 

Aytoun — City  Centers  of  Early  Christianity  (1915). 

Bacon — The  Founding  of  the  Church  (1909). 

Bartlet— The  Apostolic  Age  (1899). 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


193 


Baur — The  Apostles. 

Baur,  F.  C. — Church  History  of  the  First  Three  Cen¬ 
turies  (1879). 

Bigg — The  Church’s  Task  under  the  Roman  Empire 
(1905). 

Blunt — Studies  in  Apostolic  Christianity  (1909). 

Bruce — The  Training  of  the  Twelve. 

Burkitt — Early  Christianity  outside  of  the  Roman  Em¬ 
pire. 

Case — The  Evolution  of  Early  Christianity  (1914). 

Camus — L’oeuvre  des  Apotres  (1905). 

Clemen — Die  Apostelgeschichte  im  Lichte  der  neueren 
Forschungen  (1905). 

Clemen — Religionsgeschichtliche  Erklarung  des  N.  T. 
(1909). 

Clemen — Entwickelung  der  christlichen  Religion  inner- 
halb  des  N.  T.  (1908). 

Cobern — New  Archaeological  Discoveries  and  Their 
Bearing  on  the  New  Testament  (1917). 

Cox — The  First  Century  of  Christianity  (1886). 

Deane — Friends  and  Fellow-laborers  of  St.  Paul  (1907). 

Dewick — Primitive  Christian  Eschatology  (1912). 

De  Zwaan — Imperialisme  van  den  oudchristelijken  geest 
(1919). 

Dobschutz — Christian  Life  in  the  Primitive  Church 
(1904). 

Dobschutz — Problems  of  the  Apostolic  Age  (1909). 

Drummond,  R.  J. — The  Relation  of  the  Apostolic  Age 
to  the  Teaching  of  Christ  (1900). 

Ewald — Geschichte  des  apostolischen  Zeitalters  (1858). 

Fairbairn — Studies  in  Religion  and  Theology.  The 
Church:  in  Idea  and  in  History  (1910). 

Farrar— Early  Days  of  Christianity  (1882). 

Faye — Etude  sur  les  origines  des  eglises  de  1’age  apos- 
tolique  (1909). 

Fisher — The  Beginnings  of  Christianity.  Second  edi¬ 
tion  (1911). 


194  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 

Fletcher — The  Psychology  of  the  New  Testament. 

Foakes,  Jackson  and  Kirsopp  Lake — The  Beginnings 
of  Christianity  (1921 — ). 

George — The  Twelve. 

Gilbert — A  Short  History  of  Christianity  in  the  Apos¬ 
tolic  Age  (1906). 

Gilbert — The  First  Interpreters  of  Jesus  (1901). 

Goguel — Les  Chretiennes  et  1’empire  (1909). 

Greenough — The  Apostles  of  Our  Lord  (1904). 

Hardy — Christianity  and  the  Roman  Government  (1894). 

Harnack — The  Mission  and  Expansion  of  Christianity 
in  the  First  Three  Centuries.  Two  volumes  (1908). 

Harnack — The  Constitution  and  Law  of  the  Churches 
in  the  First  Two  Centuries.  Second  edition  (1910). 

Hatch — The  Organization  of  the  Early  Christian 
Churches  (1895). 

Hausrath — History  of  N.  T.  Times:  Apostles.  Four 
volumes  (1895). 

Hausrath — Jesus  und  die  neutest.  Schriftsteller  (1908). 

Heinrici— Das  Urchristentum  (1902). 

ttENSON — Apostolic  Christianity  (1898). 

Hill — The  Apostolic  Age  (1922). 

Hoennicke — Das  Judenchristen  in  1.  und  2.  Jahrhun- 
derten  (1908). 

Hort — The  Christian  Ecclesia  (1898). 

Hort — Judaistic  Christianity  (1898). 

Jones,  J.  D. — The  Glorious  Company  of  the  Apostles 
(1910). 

Jungst— Die  Quellen  der  Apostelgeschichte  (1895). 

Kent — The  Work  and  Teaching  of  the  Apostles  (1916). 

Kirk — The  Religion  of  Power  (1916). 

Kiefl — Die  Theorien  des  modernen  Sozialismus  fiber 
den  Ursprung  des  Christentums  (1915). 

Lake — Landmarks  of  Early  Christianity  (1920). 

Lechler — The  Apostolic  and  Post-Apostolic  Times 
(1886). 

Lightfoot — Dissertations  on  the  Apostolic  Age  (1892). 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


195 


Lilley — Four  Apostles  (1915). 

Lindsay — The  Church  and  the  Ministry  *in  the  Early  Cen¬ 
turies  (1902). 

Luckock — Footprints  of  the  Apostles  (1905). 

Matheson — Representative  Men  of  the  N.  T.  (1905). 
Mathews — The  Messianic  Hope  in  the  N.  T.  (1905). 
McDaniel — The  Churches  of  the  New  Testament 
(1921). 

McGiffert — A  History  of  Christianity  in  the  Apostolic 
Age.  Second  edition  (1910). 

Meyer,  E. — Ursprung  und  Anfange  des  Christentums 
(1921—). 

Moorhouse — Dangers  of  the  Apostolic  Age  (1903). 
Neander — History  of  the  Planting  and  Training  of  the 
Christian  Church.  Two  volumes  (1889). 

Nolloth — The  Rise  of  the  Christian  Religion  (1917). 
Orr — Neglected  Factors  in  the  Study  of  the  Early  Prog¬ 
ress  of  Christianity  (1909). 

Paterson — The  Apostolic  Teaching. 

Piepenbring — Jesus  et  les  apotres  (1911). 

Pfleiderer — Primitive  Christianity  (1906). 

Pressense — The  Early  Years  of  Christianity  (1870). 
Pressense — The  Apostolic  Era. 

Purves — The  Apostolic  Age  (1900). 

Ragg — The  Church  of  the  Apostles  (1909). 

Rall— N.  T.  History  (1914). 

Ramsay — The  Church  in  the  Roman  Empire  (1893). 
Ramsay — Pictures  from  the  Apostolic  Church  (1910). 
Rankin — First  Saints  (1893). 

Renan — The  Apostles  (1898). 

Renan — Antichrist  (1897). 

Ritschl — The  Origin  of  the  Early  Catholic  Church. 
Robertson,  A.  T. — Studies  in  the  N.  T.  (1915). 
Robertson,  A.  T. — Types  of  Preachers  in  the  New  Testa¬ 
ment  (1922). 

Ropes — The  Apostolic  Age  in  the  Light  of  Modern 
Criticism  (1906). 


196  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


.Schaff,  P. — History  of  the  Apostolic  Church  (1853). 
Schell — Traits  of  the  Twelve  (1911). 

Scott — The  Beginnings  of  the  Church  (1914). 

Selwyn — The  Christian  Prophets  (1901). 

Sorley — Jewish  Christians  and  Judaism  (1881)  . 

Still — The  Jewish  Christian  Church.  Two  volumes 
(1912,  1922). 

Stalker — Christian  Psychology  (1914). 

Vedder — The  Dawn  of  Christianity  (1894). 

Veitch — The  First  Christians  (1906). 

Votaw— -The  Primitive  Era  of  Christianity  (1902). 
Watson — In  the  Apostolic  Age  (1902). 

Weinel — Die  Stellung  des  Urchristentums  zum  staat 
(1908). 

Weiss,  J.  und  R.  Knopf — Das  Urchristentums  (1917). 
Weizsacker — The  Apostolic  Age  of  the  Christian 
Church.  Second  edition.  Two  volumes  (1899). 
Wellhausen,  Julicher,  et  al. — Geschichte  der  christ- 
lichen  Religion.  2  Aufl.  (1909). 

Wernle — The  Beginnings  of  Christianity.  Two  volumes 
(1903-4). 

Wieseler — Chronologie  des  apostolischen  Zeitalters 
(1840). 

See  also  Hastings — Dictionary  of  the  Apostolic 
Age,  besides  the  other  Bible  dictionaries. 

ii.  special  books  on  the  life  and  teaching  of  peter 

(See  also  Commentaries  on  Epistles  of  Peter.) 

Barnes — St.  Peter  in  Rome  and  His  Tomb  on  the  Vati¬ 
can  Hill. 

Berks — Studies  in  the  Life  and  Character  of  St.  Peter 
(1887). 

Couard — Simon  Petrus  der  Apostel  des  Herrn. 

Davidson — St.  Peter  and  His  Training. 

Elert — Die  Religiositat  des  Petrus  (1911). 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES  197 

Fouard — St.  Peter  and  the  First  Years  of  Christianity. 
Green — The  Apostle  Peter  (1873). 

Greene — St.  Peter  (1909). 

Grill — Der  Primat  des  Petrus  (1904). 

Guignebert— La  Primaute  de  Pierre  et  la  Venne  de 
Pierre  a  Rome  (1909). 

Henriott — Saint  Pierre  (1891). 

Howson — Horae  Petrinae  (1883). 

Lewis — Petros. 

Meyer,  F.  B. — Peter:  Fisherman,  Disciple,  Apostle 
(1920). 

Reagan — The  Preaching  of  Peter  (the  Beginning  of 
Christian  Apologetics)  (1922). 

Robinson — Simon  Peter.  His  Life  and  Times.' 
Salmond — Life  of  Peter. 

Scharfe — Die  petrinische  Stromung  der  neut.  Literatur 
(1893). 

Schmid — Petrus  in  Rom.  (1879). 

Seeley — The  Life  and  Writings  of  St.  Peter. 

Southouse — The  Making  of  Simon  Peter. 

Spence — Scenes  from  the  Life  of  St.  Peter. 

Taylor — Peter  the  Apostle  (1876). 

Thomas,  W.  H.  Griffith — The  Apostle  Peter.  Second 
edition  (1905). 

Thompson — Life-work  of  Peter  the  Apostle. 

Upham — Simon  Peter  Shepherd  (1910). 

Weiss,  B. — Der  petrinische  Lehrbegriff  (1855). 

HI.  SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  LIFE  AND  TEACHING  OF  THE 

APOSTLE  JOHN 

(See  also  books  on  the  authorship  of  the  Fourth  Gospel 
in  Part  II  and  commentaries  on  Fourth  Gospel.) 

Benham — St.  John  and  His  Work  (1902). 

Chapman,  Dom — John  the  Presbyter  and  the  Fourth 
Gospel  (1911). 


198  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 

Culross — John  Whom  Jesus  Loved  (1878). 

Fouard — Saint  Jean  et  la  fin  de  l’age  apostolique  (1904). 
Garvie — The  Beloved  Disciple  (1922). 

Gloag — Life  of  St.  John  (1891). 

Hayes — John  and  His  Writings  (1917). 

Krenkel — Apostel  Johannes  (1897). 

Lias- — Doctrinal  System  of  St.  John  (1875). 

Lowrie — The  Doctrine  of  St.  John  (1895). 

Lutgert — Johannes  Christologie. 

Matheson — St.  John’s  Portrait  of  Christ  (1910). 
McDonald — Life  and  Writings  of  John  (1877). 

Niese — Das  Leben  des  heiligen  Johannes  (1878). 
Schwartz — Ueber  den  Tod  der  Sohne  Zebedai  (1904). 
Scott — The  Fourth  Gospel :  Its  Theology  and  Purpose 
(1908). 

Scott-Moncrieff — St.  John,  Apostle,  Evangelist,  and 
Prophet  (1909). 

Stalker — The  Two  St.  Johns  (1895). 

Stevens — Johannine  Theology  (1894). 

Titius — Die  Johanneische  Anschauung  unter  dem  Ge- 
sichtspunkt  der  Seligkeit. 

Weiss,  B. — Der  johanneische  Lehrbegriff  (1882). 


IV.  THE  LIFE  AND  TEACHING  OF  JAMES 

(See  also  commentaries  on  Epistle  of  James.) 

Bartmann — St.  Paulus  und  St.  Jakobus. 

Fitch — James  the  Lord’s  Brother. 

Mayor — The  Epistle  of  St.  James.  New  edition  (1913). 
Pages  I.-LXV. 

Meinertz — Der  Jakobusbrief  und  sein  Verfasser  (1905). 
Patrick — James,  the  Lord’s  Brother  (1906). 

Robertson — Practical  and  Social  Aspects  of  Christianity. 

The  Wisdom  of  James  (1915).  Pages  1-52. 
Taylor,  J.  F. — The  Apostle  of  Patience  (1907). 

Weiss — Der  Jakobusbrief  und  die  neuere  Kritik  (1904). 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


199 


V.  LIFE  AND  TEACHING  OF  LUKE 

(See  also  commentaries  on  Gospel  of  Luke  and  on 
Acts.) 

Cadbury — The  Style  and  Literary  Method  of  Luke 
(1920). 

Carpenter — Christianity  according  to  St.  Luke  (1919). 
Chase — The  Credibility  of  the  Book  of  the  Acts  of  the 
Apostles  (1902). 

Harnack — Luke  the  Physician  (1908). 

Harnack — The  Acts  of  the  Apostles  (1909). 

Harnack — The  Date  of  the  Acts  and  the  Synoptic  Gos¬ 
pels  (1911). 

Hobart — The  Medical  Language  of  St.  Luke  (1882). 
Klostermann — Vindicae  Lucanae  (1866). 
Machlachlan — St.  Luke  Evangelist  and  Historian 
(1912). 

Machlachlan — St.  Luke :  The  Man  and  His  Work 
(1920). 

Mackinlay — Recent  Discoveries  in  the  Writings  of  St. 
Luke  (1921). 

Selwyn — St.  Luke  the  Prophet  (1901). 

Ramsay — Luke  the  Physician  (1908). 

Ramsay — Was  Christ  Born  at  Bethlehem?  A  Study  in 
the  Credibility  of  St.  Luke  (1899). 

Ramsay — St.  Paul  the  Traveller  and  Roman  Citizen. 
Twelfth  edition  (1909). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — Luke  the  Historian  in  the  Light  of 
Research  (1920). 

VI.  LIFE  AND  TEACHING  OF  PAUL 

Only  additions  to  the  extensive  bibliography  of  Paul  in 
the  author’s  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul  (1909),  pp.  221-7, 
which  please  see  at  this  point.  The  lists  here  given  are 
simply  supplementary.  See  also  the  lists  of  commentaries 
on  Paul’s  Epistles. 


200  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


1.  Life  and  Work 

Abbott,  L. — The  Life  and  Letters  of  Paul. 

Ball — The  Apostle  of  the  Gentiles  (1885). 

Bevan— St.  Paul  in  the  Light  of  To-day  (1912). 

Cohu — St.  Paul  in  the  Light  of  Recent  Research  (1910). 
Deissmann — St.  Paul :  A  Study  in  Social  and  Religious 
History  (1912). 

Dodd,  C.  H. — The  Meaning  of  Paul  for  To-day  (1921). 
Drummond,  J. — Paul.  His  Life  and  Teachings  (1912). 
Drury — The  Prison  Ministry  of  St.  Paul  (1910). 
Dudley — St.  Paul’s  Friendships  and  His  Friends  (1911). 
Fletcher — The  Conversion  of  St.  Paul  (1910). 
Gamble— St.  Paul  the  Apostle  to  the  Gentiles. 

Gardner — The  Religious  Experience  of  St.  Paul  (1911). 
Garvie — The  Life  and  Teaching  of  Paul  (1910). 
Goodwin — A  Harmony  of  the  Life  of  the  Apostle  Paul 
(1895). 

Hall — Paul  the  Apostle. 

Hausleiter — Paulus. 

Haweis — The  Picture  of  Paul  (1887). 

Johnstone — St.  Paul  and  His  Mission  to  the  Roman 
Empire  (1909). 

Jones — St.  Paul  the  Orator  (1910). 

Knopf — Paulus  (1909). 

Knopf — Probleme  der  Paulus-forschung  (1913). 

Lees — St.  Paul  and  His  Converts. 

Manen — Paulus.  Three  volumes  (1890-6). 

Matthews — Paul  the  Dauntless  (1916). 

McNeile — St.  Paul:  Life  and  Epistles  (1920). 

Meyer,  F.  B. — Paul  a  Servant  of  Jesus  Christ. 

Moe — Paulus  und  die  evangelische  Geschichte  (1912). 
Muntz — Rome,  St.  Paul  and  the  Early  Church  (1913). 
Munziger — Paulus  in  Corinth  (1902). 

Myers — Saint  Paul.  A  Poem. 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


201 


Noesgen — D.  Deissmann’s  Paulus  fiir  Theologen  und 
Laien  (1912). 

Peabody — The  Apostle  Patil  and  the  Modern  World 
(1923). 

Plooij — De  Chronologie  Van  het  Levan  Van  Paulus 
(1918). 

Plumptre — St.  Paul  in  Asia  Minor. 

Pounder — St.  Paul  and  His  Cities  (1913). 

Ramsay — Was  Paul  an  Epileptic?  ( The  Expositor, 
Nov.,  1913). 

Redlich — St.  Paul  and  His  Companions  (1913). 
Robertson,  J. — Scenes  from  the  Life  of  St.  Paul  (1862). 
Robertson,  A.  T. — Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul.  Popular 
edition  (1923). 

Robinson — The  Life  of  Paul  (1918). 

Rosser — Paul  the  Preacher  (1916). 

Rutherford — The  Last  Years  of  St.  Paul  (1912). 
Samuels — Far  Hence  Unto  the  Gentiles :  St.  Paul  in  a 
New  Light  (1915). 

Schwartz — Paulus  (1910). 

Schweitzer — Paul  and  His  Interpreters.  A  Critical  His¬ 
tory  (1912). 

Seeligmuller — War  Paulus  Epileptiker?  (1910). 
Smith,  D. — The  Life  and  Letters  of  St.  Paul  (1920). 
Strachan,  R. — The  Individuality  of  St.  Paul  (1916). 
Vischer — Der  Apostel  Paulus  und  sein  Werk  (1910). 
Warneck — Paulus  im  Lichte  der  heutigen  Heiden  Mis¬ 
sion  (1914). 

Weber — Die  antiochenische  Kollekte  (1917). 

Weinel — Paulus  als  kirchlicher  Organisator. 

Weinel — Paulus.  2  Aufl.  (1915). 

Wernle — Paulus  als  Heidenmissionar. 

Wilkinson — Paul  and  the  Revolt  Against  Him  (1914). 
Wood — The  Life  and  Ministry  of  Paul  the  Apostle 
(1912). 

Wrede — Paulus  (1907). 


202  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 

Zahn — Zur  Lebensgeschichte  des  Apostels  Paulus  (Neue 
Kirchliche  Zeitschrift  XV.). 

2.  The  Epistles  of  Paul  Treated  as  a  Whole.  (Addi¬ 
tional  list.) 

r 

Bonnet-Schroeder — Epitres  de  Paul.  Fourth  edition 
(1912). 

Bruckner — Die  chronologische  Reihenfolge  in  welcher 
die  Briefe  des  Neuen  Testaments.  Verfasst  sind 
(1890). 

Buell — The  Autographs  of  St.  Paul  (1913). 

Champlain — The  Epistles  of  Paul  (1906). 

Clemen — Einheitlichkeit  d.  paul.  Briefe  (1894). 

Drummond — The  Epistles  of  Paul  the  Apostle  (1899). 

Grafe — Das  Verhaltnis  der  paulinischen  Schriften  zur 
sapientia  Salamonis  (1892). 

Hartke — Die  Sammlung  und  die  altesten  Ausgaben  der 
Paulus  briefe  (1917). 

Hayes — Paul  and  His  Epistles  (1915). 

Heinrici— Die  Forschungen  iiber  die  paulinischen  Briefe 
(1886). 

Lake — The  Earlier  Epistles  of  St.  Paul  (1915). 

Neil — The  Pauline  Epistles  (1906). 

Scott — The  Pauline  Epistles  (1909). 

Vischer — Die  Paulusbriefe. 

Voelter— Die  Composition  der  paulinischen  Hauptbriefe 
(1890). 

Way — The  Letters  of  Paul  to  Seven  Churches  and  Three 
Friends  (1906). 

Weinel— Die  Echtheit  der  paulinischen  Hauptbriefe 
(1920). 

Weiss,  B.— -Present  Status  of  the  Inquiry  concerning  the 
Genuineness  of  Paul’s  Epistles  (1901). 

Weiss,  B. — Die  paulinische  Briefe.  2  Aufl.  (1902). 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


203 


3.  The  Teachings  of  Paul.  (See  also  lists  for  the  Jesus 
and  Paul  Controversy.) 

(Only  additional  books  to  those  in  Epochs  in  Life 
of  Paul.) 

Alexander — -Ethics  of  St.  Paul  (1910). 

Allen — The  Christology  of  St.  Paul  (1912). 

Andrews — The  Value  of  the  Theology  of  St.  Paul  for 
Modern  Thought. 

Bacon — St.  Paul’s  Message  to  Religion  (Constructive 
Quarterly,  March,  1913). 

Bacon — Jesus  and  Paul  (1921). 

Bailey — Does  Hellenism  Contribute  Constituent  Ele¬ 
ments  to  Paul’s  Christology?  (1905). 

Bartmann — St.  Paulus  und  St.  Jakobus. 

Benz — Die  Ethik  des  Apostels  Paulus  (1912). 

Carre — Paul’s  Doctrine  of  Redemption  (1914). 
Deissner — Auferstehung  und  Pneumagedanke  bei  Paulus 
(1912). 

Deissner — Paulus  und  die  Mystik  siner  Zeit.  2  Aufl. 
(1921). 

Dibelius — Die  Geisterwelt  im  Glauben  des  Paulus 
(1909). 

Foster — The  Resurrection  in  Paul’s  Argument  (1915). 
Garvie — Studies  of  Paul  and  His  Gospel  (1911). 
Greenough — The  Mind  of  Christ  in  St.  Paul  (1909). 
Griffith-Thomas— The  Prayers  of  St.  Paul. 

Harford — The  Gospel  according  to  St.  Paul  (1912). 
Harnack — 1st  die  Rede  des  Paulus  in  Athen  ein  ur- 
sprunglicher  Bestandteil  der  Apostelgeschichte  ? 
(1913). 

Hatch,  W.  H.  P. — The  Pauline  Idea  of  Faith  in  Its 
Relation  to  Jewish  and  Hellenistic  Religion  (1917). 
Headlam — St.  Paul  and  Christianity. 

Juncker — Die  Ethik  des  Paulus.  II  Halfte  (1919). 
Karl — Beitrage  zum  Verstandnis  der  soteriologischen  Er- 
fahrungen  und  Spekulationen  des  Apostels  Paulus. 


204  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Kennedy — St.  Paul  and  the  Mystery-Religions  (1913). 

Kxttel — Paulus  im  Talmud  (1920). 

Leathes — The  Witness  of  St.  Paul  to  Christ  (1869). 

Lilley — The  Soul  of  St.  Paul  (1909). 

Lundberg — Christus-Mystiker  hos  Paulus  (1916). 

Machen — The  Origin  of  Paul’s  Religion  (1921). 

Mackintosh — Pragmatic  Element  in  Paul’s  Teaching 
(Am.  Journal  of  Theology,  July,  1910). 

Martin — St.  Paul’s  Ethical  Teaching  (1917). 

Meyer,  A.— Jesus  and  Paul  (1909). 

Miller — Paul’s  Message  for  To-day  (1914). 

Moffatt — Paul  and  Paulinism  (1910). 

Montefiore — Judaism  and  St.  Paul  (1915). 

Morgan — The  Religion  and  Theology  of  St.  Paul  (1917). 

Olchewski — Die  Wurzeln  der  paulinischen  Christologie 
(1909). 

Peck — The  Rival  Philosophies  of  Jesus  and  Paul  (1919). 

Philippi — Paulus  und  das  Judentum  (1916). 

Pope — Studies  in  the  Language  of  St.  Paul. 

Pope — The  Prayers  of  St.  Paul 

Prat — La  Theologie  de  Saint  Paul.  Two  volumes  (1908, 
1912). 

Ramsay — The  Teaching  of  St.  Paul  in  Terms  of  the 
Present  Day  (1913). 

Reid — Jesus  the  Christ  and  Paul  the  Apostle  in  the  Light 
of  Modern  Criticism  (1915). 

Roberts — Eucken  and  St.  Paul  (Contemporary  Review, 
Vol.  97). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — The  Glory  of  the  Ministry.  Paul’s 
Exultation  in  Preaching  (1911).  Fifth  ed.  (1923). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — Paul  the  Interpreter  of  Christ  (1921). 
Second  edition  (1922). 

Rostron — The  Christology  of  St.  Paul  (1912). 

Scharling — Ekklesiabagrebet  hos  Paulus  (1917). 

Schmidt — Der  Leib  Christi  (1919). 

Schmoller — Die  geschichtliche  Person  Jesu  nach  den 
paulinischen  Schriften  (Theol.  Stud,  und  Krit.  1894). 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES  205 

Schweitzer — Die  Mystik  des  Apostels  Paulus  (1912). 

Shears — The  Gospel  according  to  St.  Paul  (1919). 

Steinmann — Paulus  und  die  Sklaven  zu  Korinth  (1911). 

Teichmann — Die  paulinischen  Vorstellungen  von  Aufer- 
stehung  und  Gericht  und  ihre  Beziehung  zur  jiidi- 
schen  Apokalyptik  (1896). 

Weiss — Paul  and  Jesus  (1909). 

Westcott,  F.  B. — St.  Paul  and  Justification  (1912). 

Williams— A  Plea  for  a  Reconsideration  of  Paul’s  Doc¬ 
trine  of  Justification  (1912). 


VII.  SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  ACTS 

1.  Discussions 

Belser — Die  Ap.  (1908). 

Benson — Addresses  on  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles  (1901). 

Briggs — The  Acts  of  the  Risen  Lord  (1911). 

Burton — Records  and  Letters  of  the  Apostolic  Age 
(1900). 

Cadbury — Critical  Studies  in  the  Gospel  of  Luke  and  the 
Book  of  Acts  (1918). 

Chase — The  Credibility  of  the  Books  of  the  Acts  of  the 
Apostles  (1902). 

Clark — Harmonic  Arrangement  of  the  Acts  and  the 
Epistles  (1884). 

Clemen — Die  Apostelgeschichte  im  Lichte  der  neueren 
Forschungen  (1905). 

Foakes,  Jackson  and  Kirsopp  Lake — The  Acts  of  the 
Apostles  (Part  I  of  the  Beginnings  of  Christianity), 
Prolegomena.  Vol.  I.,  Jewish  and  Gentile  Back¬ 
grounds  (1921).  Vol.  II.,  Criticism  (1922). 

Friedrich — Das  Lucas-evangelium  und  die  Apostel¬ 
geschichte  (1890). 

Goguel — Introduction  au  Nouveau  Testament,  Tome 
III,  Le  Livre  du  Actes  (1922). 

Harnack — The  Acts  of  the  Apostles  (1909). 


206  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Harnack— The  Date  of  the  Acts  and  of  the  Synoptic 
Gospels  (1911). 

Kennedy— Vital  Forces  of  the  Early  Church  (1920). 

Lekebusch — Composition  und  Entstehung  der  Apostel- 
geschichte. 

Luckock— The  Footprints  of  the  Apostles  Traced  by 
St.  Luke  in  the  Acts. 

Morrison- — Acts  and  Epistles  of  Paul. 

Pick — The  Apocryphal  Acts  (1909). 

Pirot — Les  Actes  des  Apotres  et  la  Commission  biblique 
(1919). 

Ramsay — St.  Paul  the  Traveller  and  the  Roman  Citizen. 
Twelfth  edition  (1909). 

Robertson,  A.  T.— Luke  the  Historian  in  the  Light  of 
Research  (1920). 

Spitta — Die  Apostelgeschichte,  ihre  Quellen  und  deren 
geschichtlicher  Werth  (1891). 

Stifler — An  Introduction  to  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles 
(1892). 

Still — The  Jewish  Christian  Church.  2  vols.  (1912, 
1922). 

Vedder — The  Dawn  of  Christianity  (1894). 

Weiss — Ueber  die  Asbsicht  und  den  lit.  Charakter  der 
Ap.  Gesch.  (1897). 

Wellhausen — Kriticshe  Analyse  der  Apostelgeschichte 
(1914). 

Wendt — The  Historical  Trustworthiness  of  the  Book  of 
Acts  (1913). 

Zeller — Contents  and  Origin  of  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles. 

Zahn — Die  Urausgabe  der  Apostelgeschichte  des  Lukas 
(1916). 

2.  Commentaries  on  the  English  Text 

Besides  continuous  sets  like  those  of  Bengel,  Calvin, 

Maclaren’s  Expositions  of  Holy  Scripture,  Parker’s  Peo¬ 
ple’s  Bible,  Weiss,  etc. 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES  207 

Abbott,  Lyman — Acts  of  the  Apostles. 

Alexander — The  Acts  of  the  Apostles  Explained.  Two 
volumes  (1857). 

Andrews — The  Acts  of  the  Apostles.  West.  N.  T. 
(1908). 

Bartlet — The  Acts  of  the  Apostles.  New-Century 
Bible  (1901). 

Furneaux — The  Acts  of  the  Apostles  (1912). 

Gilbert — The  Acts  of  the  Apostles.  Bible  for  Home  and 
School  (1909). 

Griffith-Thomas — The  Acts  of  the  Apostles.  2  Vols. 
(1915). 

Hackett — The  Acts  of  the  Apostles.  American  Comm. 
(1882). 

Lindsay — The  Acts  of  the  Apostles. 

Lumby — The  Acts  of  the  Apostles. 

McGarvey — New  Commentary  on  Acts.  Two  volumes 
(1892). 

jRackham — The  Acts  of  the  Apostles.  Westminster 
Comm.  (1901). 

Sitterly — From  Jerusalem  to  Rome  (1915). 

Still — The  Acts.  Two  volumes  (1912,  1922). 

Stokes — The  Acts  of  the  Apostles.  Two  volumes.  The 
Exp.  Bible  (1892). 


3.  Commentaries  on  the  Greek  Text 

Besides  the  continuous  sets  like  those  by  Alford,  Ben- 
gel,  Chrysotom,  Meyer,  etc. 

Barde — Commentaire  sur  les  Actes  des  Apotres. 

Blass — Acta  Apostolorum  (1895). 

Burnside — The  Acts  of  the  Apostles  (1916). 
Camerlynck — Commentarius  in  Actus  Apostolorum 
(1910). 

Dentler — Die  Apostelgeschichte  (1912). 


208  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 

Foakes-Jackson — Vols.  III.  and  IV.  of  Part  I.  of  The 
Beginnings  of  Christianity  (in  preparation  1923). 
Gloag — The  Acts  of  the  Apostles.  Two  volumes  (1870). 
Hoennicke — Die  Apostelgeschichte  (1914). 

Holtzmann — Die  Synoptiker  und  Apostelgeschichte. 

Hand-Commentar.  3  Aufl.  (1901). 

Kahler — Die  Apostelgeschichte  (1903). 

Knabenbauer — Acta  Apostolorum  (1899). 

Knopf — Die  Apostelgeschichte.  2  Aufl.  (1907). 
Knowling — The  Acts  of  the  Apostles.  The  Exp.  Gk. 
Test.  (1900). 

Loisy — Les  Actes  (1921). 

Rendall — Greek  Text  with  Notes. 

Page — The  Acts  of  the  Apostles  (1897). 

Preuschen — Die  Apostelgeschichte.  Handbuch  zum  N. 
T.  (1912). 

Steinmann — Die  Apostelgeschichte  (1913). 

Weiss,  B.— -Die  Apostelgeschichte  (1902). 

Wendt — Meyer  Kommentar.  9  Aufl.  (1913). 

Zahn — Die  Apostelgeschichte  des  Lukas.  Kap.  I.-XIL 
(1919). 

LESSON  I:  BEGINNINGS  OF  APOSTOLIC 

HISTORY 

(A.  D.  29  or  30) 

Angus — Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  ch.  I. 
Student’s  Chron.  N.  T.,  Introduction  to  Acts. 

Chron.  N.  T.,  Acts  1  and  2. 

Carver  or  any  commentary  on  Acts. 

Note  in  the  Introduction  the  discussion  of  the  date  of 
the  book,  the  author,  the  unity,  the  historical  credibility, 
the  purpose,  the  relation  to  the  Gospel  of  Luke,  the  rela¬ 
tion  to  the  Epistles,  the  sudden  close,  and  the  detailed 
outline  of  the  Acts. 

For  further  study  see 

Bartlet — The  Apostolic  Age,  pp.  I.-XLIV.,  1-18 ; 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


209 


Ramsay — St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  chs.  I.  and  XVII.; 
Ramsay — Pictures  of  the  Apostolic  Church,  chs.  I.-III.; 
Ramsay — Pauline  and  Other  Studies,  ch.  XII. ; 

Swete — The  Holy  Spirit  in  the  N.  T.,  Part  I.,  ch.  V. 

special  books  about  the  holy  spirit 

Arnal — La  Notion  de  l’Esprit  (1908). 

Arthur — The  Tongue  of  Fire  (1880). 

Crane — The  Teaching  of  Jesus  about  the  Holy  Spirit 
(1905). 

Denio — The  Supreme  Leader  (1900). 

Dixon  and  others — Person  and  Ministry  of  the  H.  S. 
(1890). 

Downer — Mission  and  Ministration  of  the  Holy  Spirit 
(1909). 

Gloel — Der  heilige  Geist  (1888). 

Gordon — The  Ministry  of  the  Spirit. 

Griffith-Thomas — The  Holy  Spirit.  Second  edition 
(1922). 

Gunkel — Die  Wirkungen  des  heiligen  Geistes  (1899). 
Hayes — The  Gift  of  Tongues. 

Hobart — Our  Silent  Partner  (1908). 

Johnson — The  Holy  Spirit  Then  and  Now  (1904). 
Kuyper — The  Work  of  the  Holy  Spirit  (1902). 

Lechler — Die  biblische  Lehre  vom  heiligen  Geiste 
(1900-4). 

Leisegang — Der  heilige  Geist  (1919). 

Noesgen — Der  heilige  Geist  (1905). 

Rees — The  Holy  Spirit  (1915). 

Slattery — The  Light  Within.  A  Study  of  the  Holy 
Spirit  (1915). 

Smeaton — The  Doctrine  of  the  Holy  Spirit  (1882). 
Swete — The  Holy  Spirit  in  the  N.  T.  (1909). 

Swete — The  Spirit  of  God  in  the  Church  (1912). 

Torrey — Baptism  with  the  Holy  Spirit.  Second  edition 
(1895). 


210  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 

Volz — Der  Geist  Gottes  (1910). 

Walker,  D. — The  Gift  of  Tongues  (1906). 

Walker,  W.  L. — The  Spirit  and  the  Incarnation  (1909). 
Walpole — The  Mission  of  the  Holy  Ghost  (1906). 
Washburn — The  Holy  Spirit  (1918). 

Weinel — Die  Wirkungen  des  Geistes  (1899). 

Welldon — The  Revelation  of  the  Holy  Spirit  (1902). 
Winstansley — The  Spirit  in  the  New  Testament  (1908). 
Wood— The  Spirit  of  God  in  Biblical  Literature  (1904). 

LESSON  II:  THE  YEARS  OF  WAITING  IN 

JERUSALEM 

(A.  D.  30-34) 

Angus — The  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp. 
6-9. 

Chron.  N.  T.,  Acts  3-7. 

Carver  or  any  commentary  on  Acts. 

For  further  study  see 

Conybeare  and  Howson — Life  and  Epistles  of  St.  Paul, 
Introduction,  and  first  half  of  ch.  I. ; 

Ramsay — Pictures  of  the  Apostolic  Church,  chs.  IV.-IX. ; 
Ramsay — St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  pp.  367-379; 

Smith,  D.— Life  and  Letters  of  St.  Paul,  pp.  1-16. 

See  also  Goulbourn — The  Acts  of  the  Deacons 
(1866);  Schumacher — Der  Diakon  Stephanus  (1910); 
chapter  on  Stephen  in  Robertson,  Types  of  Preachers  in 
the  New  Testament. 


LESSON  III :  THE  YOUTH  OF  SAUL  OF  TARSUS 

Angus — Environment,  pp.  9  (bottom) -12. 

Robertson — Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul,  ch.  I. 

For  further  study,  see 

Conybeare  and  Howson — Life  and  Epistles  of  St.  Paul, 
second  half  of  ch.  I.  and  all  of  ch.  II.; 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


211 


Ramsay — St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  ch.  II.; 

Ramsay — Cities  of  St.  Paul,  Parts  I.  and  II. ; 

Smith — Life  and  Letters  of  St.  Paul,  pp.  17-33. 

LESSON  IV:  THE  SCATTERED  DISCIPLES  AND 
THE  OUTSIDE  WORLD 

Angus — Environment  of  Early  Christianity. 

Chron.  N.  T.,  Acts  8. 

Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul. 

Josephus’  Antiquities. 

1.  Angus — Environment,  pp.  12  (bottom)  17  (top). 

2.  The  Scripture  Narrative.  Acts  viii.  About  A.  D. 

34-35. 

3.  Historical  exposition.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul, 

ch.  II. 

4.  For  Simon  Magus,  Candace,  and  Ethiopia,  see  some 

Bible  dictionary. 

5.  Glimpse  of  Jewish  and  Roman  Rulers  of  A.  D.  30-37. 

Jos.,  Antiquities,  Book  XVIII.,  chs.  vi.  and  vii. 
(a)  Roman  Emperors.  Tiberius,  stepson  of  Augus¬ 
tus,  was  Emperor  A.  D.  14-37.  Tiberius  had 
grandson,  Tiberius,  son  of  Drusus,  now  dead. 
Caius  Caligula,  who  succeeded  Tiberius  instead 
of  his  own  grandson,  was  grandson  of  another 
Drusus,  stepson  also  of  Augustus.  The  succes¬ 
sion  from  Augustus  to  Nero  can  best  be  repre¬ 
sented  by  a  chart : 

Augustus  B.  C.  42 — A.  D.  14  =  Livia 


Tiberius  A.  D.  14-37  Drusus  =  Antonia 

^  I  I 

Drusus 


Germanicus  Claudius  41-54 


Caius  Caligula  Agrippina  Britannicus  Octavia 
37-41  I 


Nero  54-68 


212  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


(b)  Story  of  the  way  Caius  obtained  the  crown. 

(c)  The  Herods  in  the  Acts.  Herod  Agrippa  I. 
(Acts  xii.,  1)  was  son  of  Aristobulus,  son  of 
Herod  the  Great.  Herod  Agrippa  II.  (Acts 
xxv.,  13)  and  his  sisters,  Bernice  and  Drusilla, 
were  children  of  Herod  Agrippa  I. 

(d)  Capers  of  Herod  Agrippa  I.  in  Rome,  and  how 
finally  he  was  made  King  of  Philip’s  Tetrarchy. 

(e)  How  the  envy  of  Herodias  and  Herod  Antipas 
led  to  the  loss  of  his  Tetrarchy  and  the  increase 
of  Agrippa’s  Kingdom. 

(f)  Pilate  deposed  from  Procuratorship  in  A.  D.  36. 
No  successor  for  considerable  time.  Vitellius  is 
Propraetor  of  Syria  till  37,  when  Petronius  suc¬ 
ceeded  him. 

See  further,  Ramsay — Pictures  of  the  Apostolic 
Church,  X.-XI.;  Smith — Paul,  pp.  34-44;  Cf.  Pieper — 
Der  Simon  Magus  Perikope  (1911)  ;  McGiffert — The 
Apostolic  Age,  pp.  81-101. 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  ROMAN  EMPERORS 

Henderson — Life  and  Principate  of  Nero  (1903). 
Phillips,  Stephen — Nero.  A  Poem  (1906). 

Tawr — Tiberius  the  Tyrant. 

Willrich — Caligula  (1903). 

LESSON  V:  SAUL’S  CONVERSION 
(About  A.  D.  35) 

Environment  of  Early  Christianity 

Chron.  N.  T. 

Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul. 

1.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  17-21. 

2.  Four  accounts  of  the  Conversion  of  Saul. 

(a)  The  historical  narrative.  Acts  ix.,  1-30. 

(b)  A  justification  of  his  authority  as  an  apostle. 
Gal.  i,  11-24. 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


213 


(c)  An  Explanation  of  his  change  from  Judaism  to 
Christianity  before  a  mob  of  his  countrymen  at 
Jerusalem.  Acts  xxii.,  1-21. 

(d)  A  formal  defense  of  his  life  before  the  Roman 
and  Jewish  civil  rulers.  Acts  xxvi.,  1-23. 

3.  Historical  exposition.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul, 
ch.  III.  and  IV.,  1-6. 

See  further,  Conybeare  and  Howson — Paul,  ch.  III. 
and  Appendix  II.  (for  chronological  table)  ;  Ramsay — 
Pictures  of  the  Apostolic  Church,  ch.  XVI.;  Smith — 
Paul,  pp.  45-62;  Robertson,  Paul  the  Interpreter  of 
Christ,  ch.  I. 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  SAUL’S  CONVERSION 

Fletcher — A  Study  of  the  Conversion  of  St.  Paul 
(1910). 

Gardner,  P. — The  Religious  Experience  of  St.  Paul 
(1911). 

Lyttleton — Observations  on  Saul’s  Conversion  (1774). 
Planque — La  Conversion  de  l’Apotre  Paul  (1909). 

LESSON  VI:  THE  YEARS  OF  TRANSITION 

(A.  D.  36-46) 

Environment  of  Early  Christianity. 

Josephus’  Antiquities. 

Chron.  N.  T. 

Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul. 

1.  Environment,  pp.  21-25  (top). 

2.  A  glimpse  at  the  outside  history.  Jos.  Ant.,  XVIII., 

viii.,  and  XIX.,  vii.-ix. 

(a)  Embassy  to  Caius  Caligula  about  worshiping  the 
statue,  and  how  Agrippa  came  to  the  rescue. 
Caligula  Emperor,  37-41. 

(b)  Agrippa  rebuilding  the  walls  of  Jerusalem. 


214  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Judea  was  part  of  Agrippa’s  kingdom  from  A. 
D.  42-44. 

(c)  Ignoble  death  of  Agrippa  at  Caesarea,  A.  D.  44. 
Importance  of  this  date  and  A.  D.  59  or  60  (com¬ 
ing  of  Festus)  in  chronology  of  Saul’s  career. 
Cf.  account  in  Acts  xii.,  18-23. 

(d)  Because  of  the  youth  of  Agrippa  II.,  Judea  and 
all  the  kingdom  (Samaria  and  Galilee)  became  a 
Roman  province,  with  Cuspius  Fadus  as  Procu¬ 
rator.  A.  D.  44. 

3.  Opening  the  door  to  the  Gentiles.  Acts  ix.,  31 — xii., 

25.  Peter  and  Cornelius,  the  dispersed  disciples, 
Barnabas,  Saul,  the  agents  in  it  through  the 
Holy  Spirit. 

4.  The  historical  exposition.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of 

Paul,  chs.  IV.  (7  and  8),  V. 

5.  Consult  any  Bible  dictionary  about  Antioch. 

See  further,  Conybeare  and  Howson — Paul,  ch.  IV. ; 
Ramsay— -St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  ch.  III.;  Smith — Paul, 
pp.  65-80;  Robertson,  Types  of  Preachers,  chapter  on 
Barnabas. 

LESSON  VII :  THE  EPISTLE  OF  JAMES 

(A.  D.  49) 

1.  The  author.  James,  brother  of  our  Lord  (Gal. 

1 :  19).  See  Chron.  N.  T.  and  Broadus’  Comm, 
on  Matt,  xiii.,  55.  For  later  history  of  James 
see  some  Bible  dictionary  or  commentary. 

2.  Date.  Chron.  N.  T.  Exhaustive  discussion  in  Mayor 

and  in  my  Practical  and  Social  Aspects  of 
Christianity,  ch.  I.  Two  theories. 

(a)  Before  A.  D.  50,  and  so  earliest  N.  T.  writing, 
unless  Mark  and  Thess.  be  so  (or  Galatians, 
according  to  Ramsay).  Time  of  transition.  So 
most  writers. 

(b)  A.  D.  62  or  later.  So  argued  from  dispersion, 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


215 


worship  in  synagogue,  corruptions.  But  these 
are  all  Jewish  traits  and  argue  other  way.  Early 
date  has  best  ground. 

3.  Character  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. 

4.  Analysis  of  James.  See  outline  in  Chron.  N.  T. 

5.  Read  the  Epistle  and  also  any  Bible  dictionary  on 

James. 

6.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  35-40. 

For  further  study  read  Robertson — Practical  and  So¬ 
cial  Aspects  of  Christianity ;  Patrick — James  the  Lord’s 
Brother;  Mayor — Commentary  on  James. 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  JAMES 

Besides  the  series  by  one  writer 

1.  On  the  English  Text 

Brown,  Charles — The  General  Epistle  of  James.  Sec¬ 
ond  edition  (1907). 

Carpenter,  W.  Boyd — The  Wisdom  of  James  the  Just 
(1903). 

Dale — Discourses  on  the  Epistle  of  James  (1895). 
Deems — The  Gospel  of  Common  Sense. 

Johnstone — Lectures  Exegetical  and  Practical  on  the 
Epistle  of  James.  Second  edition  (1889). 

Parry — The  General  Epistle  of  James  (1904). 
Plummer — The  General  Epistle  of  James.  The  Ex¬ 
positor’s  Bible  (1891). 

Plumptre — The  General  Epistle  of  James.  Cambridge 
Testament  for  Schools  (1878). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — Practical  and  Social  Aspects  of 
Christianity.  The  Wisdom  of  James  (1915). 
Winkler — The  Epistle  of  James.  American  Comm. 
(1895). 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text 

Belser — Epistel  des  hi.  Jakobus  (1909). 


216  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Beyschlag— Der  Brief  des  Jakobus.  Meyer-Komm.  6 
Aufl.  (1898). 

Camerlinck — Commentarius  in  epistolas  catholicos 
(1909). 

Carr — The  General  Epistle  of  James.  Cambridge  Gk. 
Testament  (1896). 

Dibelius — Meyer  Comm.  7  Aufl.  (1921). 

Grafe — Die  Stellung  und  Bedeutung  des  Jakobus  brief es 
in  die  Entwickelung  des  Urchristentums  (1904). 
Hollmann — Der  Jakobusbrief.  Die  Schriften  d.  N.  T. 
(1907). 

Hort— The  Epistle  of  St.  James,  1:  1 — 4:7  (1909). 
Huther — The  Meyer  Comm,  (in  English)  (1887). 
Knowling — Comm,  on  the  Epistle  of  St.  James.  West¬ 
minster  Series  (1904). 

Mayor — The  Epistle  of  St.  James.  Third  edition  (1910). 
Meinertz — Der  Jakobus  Brief  und  sein  Verfasser 
(1905). 

Oesterley — The  Epistle  of  St.  Tames.  Exp.  Gk.  Test. 
(1910). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — Practical  and  Social  Aspects  of  Chris¬ 
tianity.  The  Wisdom  of  James  (1915). 

Ropes — The  Epistle  of  James.  Int.  and  Crit.  Comm. 
(1915). 

Soden,  H.  von — Der  brief  des  Jakobus.  Hand  Comm. 
(1893). 

Spitta — Der  Brief  des  Jakobus  (1906). 

Weiss,  B. — Der  Jakobusbrief  und  die  neuere  Kritik 
(1904). 

Windisch — Handbuch  zum  N.  T.  (1911). 

LESSON  VIII:  PAUL’S  FIRST  MISSIONARY 

JOURNEY 

(A.  D.  48  to  49) 

1.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  25-29. 

2.  The  Scripture  narrative.  Acts,  chs.  xiii.  and  xiv. 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


217 


3.  The  historical  and  geographical  exposition.  Epochs 
in  the  Life  of  Paul,  ch.  VI.  For  Cyprus,  Pam- 
phylia,  Pisidia,  Lycaonia,  see  Bible  dictionary. 
Trace  on  map. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — 
Chs.  V.  and  VI. ;  Ramsay — St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  ch. 
IV.- VI.;  Smith-— Paul,  pp.  81-106;  Robertson,  Making 
Good  in  the  Ministry  (Sketch  of  John  Mark). 


LESSON  IX:  THE  CONFERENCE  AT 
JERUSALEM 

(A.  D.  49) 

A  great  Crisis  in  Christianity.  Shall  the  Jewish  Cere¬ 
monial  law  be  imposed  upon  the  Gentiles? 

1.  Environment,  pp.  30-35  (top). 

2.  The  Scripture  narrative.  Acts  xv.,  1-35 ;  Gal.,  chap. 

•  • 
li. 

(a)  The  disturbances  at  Antioch  by  the  Judaizers 
from  Jerusalem,  and  the  appeal  to  Jerusalem. 
Acts  xv.,  1-3. 

(b)  First  public  meeting  at  Jerusalem.  Acts  xv.,  4,  5. 

(c)  Private  interview  with  leading  brethren.  Gal. 

ii.,  1-10. 

(d)  The  second  public  meeting.  Acts  xv.,  6-29. 

(e)  The  reception  of  the  decision  at  Antioch.  Acts 
xv.,  30-35. 

(f)  Peter’s  subsequent  conduct  at  Antioch.  Gal.  ii., 
11-21. 

3.  The  historical  exposition.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of 

Paul,  ch.  VII. 

4.  Consult  any  Bible  dictionary  for  geographical  points 

and  map  also. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — 
Ch.  VII.;  Ramsay — St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  ch.  VII.; 


218  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Ramsay — Church  in  the  Roman  Empire,  chs.  II.-III.; 
Smith — Paul,  pp.  107-115;  chapter  on  Paul’s  Ecclesias¬ 
tical  Independence  in  Robertson,  Paul  the  Interpreter 
of  Christ. 


LESSON  X:  FROM  ANTIOCH  TO  TROAS 

(A.  D.  49) 

1.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  41-46. 

2.  First  of  Five  Lessons  on  the  Second  Mission  Tour 

of  Paul.  A.  D.  49-53. 

3.  Scripture  narrative.  Chron.  N.  T.,  Acts  15 :  36 — 

16:10. 

4.  Historical  Exposition.  Robertson,  Epochs  in  the 

Life  of  Paul,  pp.  138-148. 

5.  Consult  any  Bible  dictionary  for  Galatia. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — 
Ch.  VIII.;  Ramsay — St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  pp.  194-205 ; 
Ramsay — Church  in  the  Roman  Empire,  ch.  IV.;  Smith 
— Paul,  pp.  116-126. 

LESSON  XI :  PAUL  AT  PHILIPPI,  THESSA- 
LONICA,  AND  BERCEA 

(A.  D.  49  or  50) 

1.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  46-51. 

2.  Scripture  narrative.  Chron.  N.  T.,  Acts  16:11— 

17 :  15 ;  1  Thess.  1-3. 

3.  Historical  Exposition.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul, 

pp.  148-157. 

4.  Consult  any  Bible  dictionary  for  Philippi,  Thessa- 

lonica,  Beroea. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — 
Ch.  IX.;  Ramsay— St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  pp.  205-236; 
Smith — Paul,  pp.  126-142. 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES  219 

Cf.  Wace  and  Thompson  —  Prehistoric  Thessaly 

(1912). 


LESSON  XII :  PAUL  AT  ATHENS 
(A.  D.  49  or  50) 

1.  Environment,  pp.  51-55. 

2.  Scripture  Narrative.  Chron.  N.  T.,  Acts  17 :  16-34. 

3.  Historical  Exposition.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul, 

pp.  157-162. 

4.  Consult  any  Bible  Dictionary  for  Athens. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — 
Ch.  X.;  Ramsay — St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  pp.  237-252; 
Smith — Paul,  pp.  142-149;  chapter  on  Paul  in  the 
Center  of  Greek  Culture  in  Robertson,  Paul  the  Inter¬ 
preter  of  Christ. 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  ATHENS 

Alexander — St.  Paul  at  Athens  (1865). 

D’Ooge — The  Acropolis  (1909). 

Ferguson — Hellenistic  Athens  (1911). 

Harnack — 1st  die  Rede  des  Paulus  in  Athen  ein 
Ursprunglicher  Bestandtheil  der  Apostelgeschichte  ? 
(1913). 

Macduff — St.  Paul  at  Athens  (1887). 

Shakespeare,  Chas. — St.  Paul  in  Athens  (1878). 
Tucker — Life  in  Ancient  Athens  (1906). 

On  Stoic  and  Epicurean  philosophy,  see  previous 
bibliography. 

LESSON  XIII :  PAUL  AT  CORINTH 

(A.  D.  50-52) 

1.  Environment,  pp.  55-60. 

2.  Scripture  Narrative.  Chron.  N.  T.,  Acts  18:1-17; 

I  Cor.  1-3. 


220  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


3.  Historical  Exposition.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul, 

pp.  162-166. 

4.  Consult  any  Bible  dictionary  for  Corinth. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — 
Ch.  XII.;  Ramsay — St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  pp.  253-261; 
Smith — Paul,  pp.  149-152,  185-188. 

Cf.  Munziger- — Paulus  in  Corinth  (1908). 

LESSON  XIV:  THE  THESSALONIAN  LETTERS 
AND  RETURN  TO  ANTIOCH 

(A.  D.  50  or  51) 

1.  The  Four  Groups  of  Paul’s  Epistles.  Chron.  N.  T. ; 

Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  166-167. 

2.  A  Sketch  of  Paul.  Chron.  N.  T. 

3.  Introduction  to  and  outline  of  1  Thessalonians. 

Chron.  N.  T. 

4.  Read  1  Thessalonians. 

5.  Introduction  to  and  outline  of  2  Thessalonians. 

Chron.  N.  T. 

6.  Read  2  Thessalonians. 

7.  Occasion  of  these  two  Epistles.  Epochs  in  the  Life 

of  Paul,  pp.  167-171. 

8.  Return  to  Antioch  via  Jerusalem.  Acts  18:18-22; 

Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  171-172. 

9.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  60-63. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — 

Ch.  XI.  and  end  of  ch.  XII. ;  Ramsay — St.  Paul  the 
Traveller,  pp.  262-266;  Milligan,  Frame  or  Denney — 
On  1  and  2  Thessalonians;  Smith — Paul,  pp.  152-185. 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  1  AND  2  THESSALONIANS 
Besides  the  series  by  the  same  men. 

1.  On  the  English  Text 

Adeney — New-Century  Bible  (1907). 

Buckland — Comm,  on  2  Thess.  (1908). 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


221 


Bullinger — Thess.  Epistles  (1901). 

Cowles — Shorter  Epistles  of  Paul  (1879). 

Denney — Exp.  Bible  (1892). 

Findlay — Cambridge  Bible  for  Schools  and  Colleges 
(1891). 

Garrod — Analysis  with  Notes  (1899). 

Hutchinson — Lectures  on  1  and  2  Thess.  (1883). 
Lattey — The  Epistles  to  the  Thessalonians  (1913). 
Lillie — Lectures  on  Thess.  (1860). 

Mackintosh,  R. — In  Westminster  N.  T.  (1909). 
Sadler — Eps.  of  Paul  to  the  Col.,  Thess.,  and  Tim. 
(1890). 

Stevens — Eps.  to  the  Thess.  Am.  Comm.  (1887). 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text 

Askwith — An  Introduction  to  the  Thessalonian  Epistles 
(1902). 

Bornemann — In  Meyer  Comm.  (1884). 

Eadie — A  Comm,  on  the  Greek  Text  of  Paul  to  the 
Thess.  (1877). 

Dibelius — Lietzmann’s  Handbuch  (1911). 

Dobschutz — Meyer  Komm.  (1909). 

Ellicott — Comms.  Critical  and  Grammatical  (1884). 
Findlay — The  Epistles  of  Paul  to  the  Thess.  Camb.  Gk. 
Test.  (1904). 

Frame — A  Crit.  and  Exeg.  Comm,  on  the  Eps.  of  St. 

Paul  to  the  Thess.  Int.  Crit.  Comm.  (1912). 
Gutjahr — Die  zwei  Briefe  an  die  Thess.  und  der  Brief 
an  die  Galater  (1913). 

Harnack — Das  Problem  des  zweiten  Thessalonicher- 
briefs  (1910). 

Holtzmann,  H.  J. — 1  Thess.  (1911). 

Knabenbauer — Comm,  in  epistolas  ad  Thessalonicenses 
(1913). 

Jowett — Eps.  of  St.  Paul  to  the  Thess. 

Lightfoot — Notes  on  Eps.  of  Paul  (1895). 


222  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 

Mayer— Die  Thessalonicherbriefe  (1908). 

Milligan — St.  Paul’s  Eps.  to  the  Thess.  (1908). 
Moffatt— St.  Paul’s  Eps.  to  the  Thess.  Exp.  Gk.  Test. 
(1910). 

Plummer— First  Thessalonians  (1918)  ;  Second  Thessa- 
lonians  (1918). 

Schmidt — Comm,  on  1  Thess.  (1885). 

Schmiedel — Holtzmann’s  Hand-Komm.  2  Aufl.  (1892). 
Toussaint— Lettres  aux  Thess.,  aux  Galates,  aux  Corin- 
thiens  (1909). 

Wohlenberg — Zahn  Komm.  2  Aufl.  (1908). 

Woste — Comm,  in  Epistolas  ad  Thess.  (1917). 

Wrede — Die  Echtheit  des  zweiten  Thess.  (1903). 

LESSON  XV:  PAUL  AT  EPHESUS 
(52-55  or  56) 

1.  Third  Mission  Tour  of  Paul,  A.  D.  52-56  or  57. 

2.  The  Statesmanship  of  Paul.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of 

Paul,  pp.  173-178. 

3.  Scripture  Narrative.  Chron.  N.  T.,  Acts  18:23— 

19 : 20. 

4.  Historical  exposition.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul, 

pp.  178-183. 

5.  Any  Bible  dictionary  for  Ephesus. 

6.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  63-67. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — 
Ch.  XIV.;  Ramsay — St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  pp.  267-273; 
Ramsay— Pauline  and  Other  Studies,  III.,  VIII. ;  Ram¬ 
say — Church  in  the  Roman  Empire,  chs.  V.-VII. ; 
Smith — Paul,  pp.  188-192,  221-234. 

Cf.  Wood — Discoveries  in  Ephesus  (1877)  ;  Wynne — 
Apollos  (1910)  ;  chapter  on  Apollos  in  Robertson’s  Types 
of  Preachers  in  the  New  Testament. 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


223 


LESSON  XVI:  FIRST  CORINTHIANS  1-7 

(A.  D.  55  or  56) 

1.  Second  Group  of  Paul’s  Epistles.  Chron.  N.  T. 

2.  The  date  of  1  Corinthians  and  how  shown.  Chron. 

N.  T. 

3.  Place  of  writing  and  how  known.  Chron.  N.  T. 

4.  Occasion  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs  in 

the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  186-189. 

5.  Purpose  of  the  Epistle.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul, 

p.  189. 

6.  Outline  and  contents.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs  in  the 

Life  of  Paul,  pp.  189  f. 

7.  Style  and  character.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul, 

pp.  190  f . 

8.  Treatment  of  Timothy  and  Titus  at  Corinth.  Epochs 

in  the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  191-193. 

9.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  68-73. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — 
Ch.  XV.;  Ramsay — St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  pp.  273-277; 
Smith — Paul,  pp.  234-268. 


SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  1  CORINTHIANS 

Besides  continuous  commentaries 
1.  On  the  English  Text 

Beet — First  and  Second  Cor.  Second  edition  (1884). 
Dods — Exp.  Bible  (1889). 

Evans — Speaker’s  Comm.  (1881). 

Gould — Am.  Comm.  (1887). 

Kay — Cor.  Epistles  (1887). 

Massie — Corinthians.  New-Century  Bible. 
McFadyen — Eps.  to  the  Cors.  (1911). 


224  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Parry — Cambridge  Bible  for  Schools  (1916). 

Ramsay — Historical  Comm.  (The  Expositor,  sixth 
series). 

Rendall — The  Epistles  of  St.  Paul  to  the  Cors.  Date 
and  Composition  (1909). 

Riggs  and  Reed — -Epistles  to  the  Corinthians  (1922). 
Robertson,  F.  W. — Expository  Sermons  on  1  and  2 
Cors.  (1870)/ 

Walker,  D. — Letters  of  St.  Paul  to  the  Corinthians 
(1909). 

Walker — Reader’s  Comm. 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text 

Bach mann — Zahn  Komm.  (1910). 

Bousset — Schriften  d.  N.  T.  (1906). 

Edwards — First  Cor.  (1885). 

Ellicott — Crit.  and  Grammatical  Comm.  (1887). 
Findlay — Exp.  Gk.  Test.  (1900). 

Godet — Two  volumes  (1886-7). 

Goudge — West.  Comm. 

Heinrici — Das  erste  Sendschreiben  (1880). 

Kuhl— 1  Kor.  (1905). 

Lietzmann — 1  and  2  Kor.  Handbuch  (1907). 

Lias — -Camb.  Gk.  Test.  (1879). 

Lightfoot — -Notes  on  1-7  (1895). 

Parry — Cambridge  Greek  Testament  (1910). 
Robertson-Plummer — Int.  Crit.  (1911). 

Schaefer — Erklarung  der  Briefe  Pauli  an  die  Korinther 
(1903). 

Schmiedel — Hand-Comm.  (1892). 

Stanley — Eps.  to  the  Cors.  (1882). 

Weiss,  J. — Meyer  Komm.  9  Aufl.  (1910). 

Cf.  Lutgert — Freihertspredigt  und  Schwarmgeister  in 
Korinth  (1908)  ;  Mqsimann — Das  Zungreden  (1911)  ; 
Rohr— Paulus  und  die  Gemeinde  von  Korinth;  Stein- 
mann — Paulus  und  die  Sklaven  zu  Korinth  (1911). 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


225 


LESSON  XVII:  1  CORINTHIANS  8-16 

Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  73-78. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — 
Ch.  XIII.;  Smith — Paul,  pp.  269-322. 


LESSON  XVIII :  FROM  EPHESUS  TO  MACE¬ 
DONIA  AND  2  CORINTHIANS  1-7 

(A.  D.  55  or  56) 

1.  The  plans  of  Paul.  Acts  19 : 21  f ;  Epochs  in  the 

Life  of  Paul,  p.  183  f. 

2.  The  riot  in  Ephesus.  Acts  19 :  23-41 ;  Epochs  in  the 

Life  of  Paul,  pp.  184-186. 

3.  The  suspense  in  Troas.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul, 

p.  195. 

4.  The  rebound  in  Macedonia.  Acts  20:  1 ;  2  Cor.  1-7 ; 

Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  194-198. 

5.  Date  of  2  Corinthians.  Chron.  N.  T. 

6.  Unity  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs  in  the 

Life  of  Paul,  p.  197  f. 

7.  Purpose  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs  in 

the  Life  of  Paul,  p.  197  f. 

8.  Outline  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. 

9.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  78-83  (top). 
For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — 

Ch.  XVI.;  Ramsay — St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  pp.  277-282; 
Smith— Paul,  pp.  322-327,  341-370. 

% 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  2  CORINTHIANS  ALONE 

Besides  the  continuous  books  and  those  on  both  1  and  2 
Cors. 


226  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 

1.  On  the  English  Text 

Denney— Exp.  Bible  (1894). 

Farrar — Pulpit  Comm.  (1883). 

Goudge — Mind  of  St.  Paul  in  2  Cor.  (1911). 

Kennedy,  J.  H. — The  Second  and  Third  Letters  of  St. 

Paul  to  the  Corinthians  (1900). 

Plumptre — Ellicott  Comm. 

Robertson,  A.  T.— The  Glory  of  the  Ministry.  Exposi¬ 
tion  of  2  Cor.  2 : 12—6 :  10. 

Waite— Speaker’s  Comm.  (1881). 

Warm  an — -Reader’s  Comm. 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text 

Bachmann- — Der  zweite  Brief  des  Paulus  an  die  Ko- 
rinther.  Zahn  Komm.  (1909). 

Barde — Etude  sur  la  epitre  aux  Cor.  (1906). 

Belser — Der  zweite  Brief  des  Apostels  Paulus  an  die 
Korinther  (1910). 

Bernard— Exp.  Gk.  Test.  (1910). 

Cornel Y-—Commentarium  ( 1907) . 

Godet- — La  seconde  epitre  aux  Corinthiens  (1914). 
Heinrici — Meyer  Komm.  8  Aufl.  (1900). 

Heinrici— -Das  zweite  Sendschreiben  des  Ap.  Paulus  an 
die  Kor.  (1887). 

Isaacs- — Second  Epistle  to  the  Corinthians  (1921). 
Lietzmann — -Handbuch  (1907). 

Menzies— -The  Second  Epistle  to  the  Corinthians  (1912). 
Parry— Cambridge  Greek  Testament  (1916). 

Plummer — Int.  Crit.  Comm.  (1915). 

LESSON  XIX:  2  CORINTHIANS  8-13 
(A.  D.  55  or  56) 

1.  Scripture  lesson.  2  Cor.  8-13. 

2.  Spirit  of  Paul  in  these  chapters.  Epochs  in  the  Life 

of  Paul,  p.  198  f. 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES  227 

3.  Tourneying  toward  Greece  via  Illyricum.  Acts  20:2; 

Rom.  15:19. 

4.  The  Triumph  in  Corinth.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of 

Paul,  p.  200. 

5.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  83-89. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — 
Ch.  XVII. ;  Ramsay — Church  in  the  Roman  Empire,  ch. 
XIII.;  Smith — Paul,  pp.  327-345,  367-371 ;  Paul  as 
Church  Architect  in  Corinth  (Robertson,  Paul  the  In¬ 
terpreter  of  Christ). 


LESSON  XX:  EPISTLE  TO  THE  GALATIANS 
(Probably  A.  D.  55  or  56) 

1.  Date.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul, 

pp.  201-203. 

2.  North  or  South  Galatia.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs  in 

the  Life  of  Paul,  p.  201  f. 

3.  Occasion  for  Writing  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. ; 

Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul,  p.  203  f. 

4.  Character  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs  in 

the  Life  of  Paul,  p.  204  f . 

5.  Outline.  Chron.  N.  T. 

6.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  89-93. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — 
Ch.  XVIII. ;  Ramsay — Church  in  the  Roman  Empire,  ch. 
VI.;  Smith — Paul,  pp.  193-221. 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  GALATIANS 

Besides  continuous  works 

1.  On  the  English  Text 

Adeney — New-Century  Bible. 

Askwith — Destination  and  Date  of  Galatians. 


228  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Bacon — Bible  for  Home  and  School  (1909). 

Beet — Ep.  to  the  Gal.  (1885). 

Emmet — St.  Paul’s  Ep.  to  the  Gal.  The  Reader’s  Comm. 
(1912). 

Findlay — Expositor’s  Bible  (1888). 

Gibbon — Ep.  to  the  Gal. 

Girdlestone — Devotional  Comm. 

Hovey — Am.  Comm.  (1887). 

Macgregor — Christian  Freedom  (1914). 

Round — Date  of  St.  Paul’s  Ep.  to  the  Galatians  (1907). 
Sanday — Ellicott’s  Comm.  (1879). 

Stevens — Expository  lectures  (1894). 

Watkins — St.  Paul’s  Fight  for  Galatians  (1914). 

Wood — Studies  in  St.  Paul’s  Ep.  to  the  Gal.  (1887). 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text 

Bousset — Die  Schriften  d.  N.  T.  (1907). 

Burton — Int.  and  Crit.  Comm.  (1920). 

Ellicott — Ep.  to  the  Gal.  New  edition  (1884). 
Lagrange — Saint  Paul,  epitre  aux  Galates  (1918). 
Lietzmann — Handbuch  (1910). 

Lightfoot — St.  Paul’s  Ep.  to  the  Gal.  Eleventh  edition 
(1905). 

Lipsius — Hand-Comm.  (1902). 

Loisy — L’epitre  aux  Galates  (1916). 

Luther,  Martin — Latin  Original  in  1519,  English  tr.  in 
1575. 

Ramsay — Hist.  Comm.  (1900). 

Rendall — Exp.  Gk.  Test.  (1903). 

Sieffert — Meyer  Komm.  9  Aufl.  (1899). 

Steinmann — Die  Leserkreise  des  Galaterbriefs  (1908). 
Steinmann — Die  Abfassungszeit  des  Galaterbriefs 
(1906). 

Weber — Der  Galaterbrief  aus  sich  selbst  geschichtlich 
erklart. 

Westcott,  F.  B. — St.  Paul  and  Justification  (1913). 
Zahn — Zahn  Komm.  2  Aufl.  (1907). 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


229 


LESSON  XXI:  ROMANS  1-8 
(A.  D.  56  or  57) 

1.  Date  and  place  of  writing.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs 

in  the  Life  of  Paul,  p.  205  f. 

2.  The  amanuensis  and  the  bearer  of  the  letter.  Chron. 

N.  T. 

3.  Plans  of  Paul  and  reason  for  writing.  Chron.  N.  T. ; 

Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  206-210. 

4.  Character  of  the  church  in  Rome.  Chron.  N.  T. ; 

Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul,  p.  206  f . 

5.  Character  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs  in 

the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  210-212. 

6.  Outline.  Chron.  N.  T. 

7.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  93-98. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — 
Ch.  XIX. ;  any  Bible  dictionary  on  Romans  or  introduc¬ 
tion  to  a  commentary ;  Smith — Paul,  pp.  374-424. 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  ROMANS 

Besides  continuous  books 

1.  On  the  English  Text 

Beet — Ninth  edition  (1901). 

Brown,  D. — Analytical  exposition  (1860). 

Chalmers — Expository  discourses. 

Garvie — New-Century  Bible  (1901). 

Gifford — Speaker’s  Comm.  (1881). 

Gore — A  Practical  Expos,  of  Romans. 

Grey — Reader’s  Comm.  (1910). 

Griffith -Thomas — 3  vols.  (1913). 

Hodge,  Charles — Theol.  expos.  (1856). 

Hort — Romans  and  Ephesians.  Intr.  (1895). 

Liddon — Explanatory  Analysis  (1893). 


230  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Moule — Cambridge  Bible  (1879). 

Moule- — Expos.  Bible  (1893). 

Stifler — Exposition  (1897). 

Williams — An  Exposition. 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text 

Barth — Der  Romerbrief  (1919). 

Denney — Exp.  Gk.  Test.  (1901). 

Feine — Der  Romerbrief  (1903). 

Godet — T ranslation  ( 1 883  ) . 

Jowett — Third  edition  (1894). 

Julicher — Schriften  d.  N.  T.  2  Aufl.  (1907). 

Kuehl— Der  Brief  des  Paulus  an  die  Romer  (1913). 
Lagrange — L’epitre  aux  Romains  (1916). 

Lightfoot — Notes  on  1-7  (1895). 

Lipsius — Hand-Comm.  2  Aufl.  (1893). 

Lietzmann — Handbuch  (1906).  2  Aufl.  (1919). 
Luetgert — Der  Romerbrief  als  historisches  Problem 
(1913). 

Pallis — Comm.  (1920). 

Parry — The  Epistle  of  Paul  to  the  Romans  (1912). 
Richter — Kritisch-polemische  Untersuchungen  fiber  den 
Romerbrief  (1908). 

Sanday  and  Headlam — Int.  Crit.  Comm.  Fifth  edition 
(1905). 

Siiedd — Comm,  on  Rom.  (1893). 

Spitta — Untersuchungen,  etc.  (1901). 

Toussaint — L’epitre  aux  Romains  (1913). 

Vaughan — Seventh  edition  (1890). 

Von  Manen — Die  Unechtheit  des  rom.  Briefs  (1906). 
Weiss,  B. — Meyer  Komm.  9  Aufl.  (1899). 

Westcott,  F.  B.— -St.  Paul  and  Justification  (1913). 
Zahn— Zahn  Komm.  (1910). 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


231 


LESSON  XXII :  ROMANS  9-16 

Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  98-101. 

For  further  study,  see  commentaries  on  Romans; 
Smith — Paul,  pp.  425-456. 


LESSON  XXIII:  THE  LAST  JOURNEY  TO 

JERUSALEM 

(Spring  of  56  or  57) 

1.  Scripture  Narrative.  Acts  20 :  3-21 :  16. 

2.  The  gathering  storm  at  Jerusalem.  Epochs  in  the 

Life  of  Paul,  pp.  213-219. 

3.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  101-108. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — Ch. 

XX.;  Ramsay — St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  pp.  286-303; 
Smith — Paul,  pp.  456-467. 


LESSON  XXIV:  PAUL  AT  JERUSALEM  THE 

LAST  TIME 

(Pentecost  of  56  or  57) 

1.  Scripture  narrative.  Acts  21 :  17-23  :  35. 

2.  Historical  exposition.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul, 

pp.  220-240. 

3.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  108-111. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — Ch. 

XXI.;  Ramsay — St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  pp.  303-313; 
Smith — Paul,  pp.  467-479. 


232  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


LESSON  XXV:  PAUL  A  PRISONER  AT 

CESAREA 

(56-8  or  57-9) 

1.  Paul  before  Felix.  Acts  24;  Epochs  in  the  Life  of 

Paul,  pp.  240-6. 

2.  Paul  before  Festus.  Acts  25:1-12;  Epochs  in  the 

Life  of  Paul,  pp.  246-9. 

3.  Paul  before  Agrippa.  Acts  25:13—26:32;  Epochs 

in  the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  249-253. 

4.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  111-117. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — Ch. 

XXII. ;  Ramsay — Pictures  of  the  Apostolic  Church,  chs. 
XLII.-XLIV. ;  Smith— Paul,  pp.  480-489. 


LESSON  XXVI:  PAUL’S  VOYAGE  TO  ROME 
(Autumn  of  58  or  59  to  spring  of  59  or  60) 

1.  Caesarea  to  Myra.  Acts  27 :  1-5;  Epochs  in  the  Life 

of  Paul,  pp.  256  f . 

2.  Myra  to  Fair  Havens.  Acts  27 :  6-8;  Epochs  in  Life 

of  Paul,  p.  257. 

3.  Fair  Havens  to  Melita.  Acts  27:9-44;  Epochs  in 

the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  258-264. 

4.  The  Winter  in  Melita.  Acts  28:  1-10;  Epochs  in  the 

Life  of  Paul,  pp.  264  f. 

5.  Melita  to  Rome.  Acts  28:  11-16;  Epochs  in  the  Life 

of  Paul,  pp.  265-8. 

6.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  118-123. 
For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — Ch. 

XXIII.;  Ramsay — St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  Ch.  XIV.; 
Smith — Paul,  pp.  490-501 ;  chapter  on  Nautical  Terms 
in  Robertson,  Luke  the  Historian. 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


233 


SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  VOYAGE  OF  PAUL  AND  ANCIENT 

SEAFARING 

Balmer — Die  Romfahrt  des  Apostels  P^ulus  (1905). 
Breuring — Die  Nautik  der  Alten  (1886). 

Everitt — St.  Paul’s  Journey  to  Rome  (1904). 

Smith — Voyage  and  Shipwreck  of  St.  Paul  (1880). 
Torr — Ancient  Ships. 

Vars — L’art  nautique  dans  l’antiquite  (1887). 


LESSON  XXVII :  PAUL  IN  ROME  AND  THE 
LETTER  TO  THE  PHILIPPIANS 

(A.  D.  60-2  or  61-3) 

1.  Paul’s  effort  to  win  the  Jews  in  Rome.  Acts 

28 :  16-28 ;  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  268  f . 

2.  Delay  in  Paul’s  trial  and  his  life  in  Rome.  Acts 

28 : 30  f . ;  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul,  pp. 
269-272. 

3.  Third  Group  of  Paul’s  Epistles.  Chron.  N.  T. 

4.  Date  of  Philippians.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs  in  the 

Life  of  Paul,  pp.  273-5. 

5.  Occasion  and  purpose  of  the  letter.  Chron.  N.  T. ; 

Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  273-6. 

6.  Character  of  the  letter.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs  in 

the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  276  f. 

7.  Outline  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. 

8.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  123-129. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — Ch. 

XXIV.,  XXVI.;  Ramsay — St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  pp. 
344-356;  Forbes — Footsteps  of  St.  Paul  in  Rome 
(1899);  any  Bible  dictionary  on  Rome;  Smith — Paul, 
pp.  502-522.  See  Merivale — St.  Paul  in  Rome;  Rob¬ 
ertson — Paul’s  Joy  in  Christ. 


234  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  PHILIPPIANS 

Besides  continuous  works 

1.  On  the  English  Text 

Beet — With  Col.,  Eph.,  Philemon  (1891). 

Burns — Sermons  on  Philippians  (1917). 

Johnstone— Expository  lectures.  The  Phil.  Gospel  or 
Pauline  Ideals  (1904). 

Jordan — The  Philippian  Gospel  or  Pauline  Ideals. 
Jowett — The  High  Calling  (1909). 

Martin — New-Century  Bible. 

Moule — Philippian  Studies. 

Noble — Discourses  on  Philippians. 

Rainy — Expos.  Bible  (1893). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — Paul’s  Joy  in  Christ  (1917). 

Smith — The  Epistle  of  St.  Paul’s  First  Trial  (1899). 
Yorke — The  Law  of  the  Spirit. 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text 

Dibelius — Handbuch  zum  N.  T.  (1911). 

Ellicott — New  edition  (1890). 

Ewald — Zahn  Komm.  (1908).  3  Aufl.  von  Wohlenberg 
(1917). 

Haupt — Meyer  Komm.  8  Aufl.  (1902). 

Jones,  M. — Philippians,  Westminster  Comm. 

Kennedy,  H.  A.  A. — Exp.  Gk.  Test.  (1903). 

Klopper — Der  Brief  an  die  Philipper  (1893). 
Knabenbauer — Comm,  in  epistolas  ad  Eph.,  Phil.,  et 
Col.  (1913). 

Lightfoot — Ninth  edition  (1891). 

Lipsius — Hand-Comm.  (1893). 

Lueken — Der  Brief  an  die  Philipper  (1906). 
Plummer — Philippians  (1919). 

Robertson,  A.  T. — Paul’s  Joy  in  Christ  (1917). 

Soden — 2  Aufl.  (1906). 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


235 


Tillmann — Philipper  brief  (1917). 

Vincent — Int.  Crit.  Comm.  (1897).  Second  edition 
(1910). 

LESSON  XXVIII :  PHILEMON  AND  COLOS- 

SIANS 

(A.  D.  62  or  63) 

1.  Date  of  Philemon.  Chron.  N.  T. 

2.  Purpose  and  character  of  the  Letter.  Chron.  N.  T. ; 

Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  278  f. 

3.  Outline  of  the  letter.  Chron.  N.  T. 

4.  Date  of  Colossians.  Chron.  N.  T. 

5.  The  occasion  of  the  letter.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs  in 

the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  279. 

6.  The  new  peril  of  Gnosticism.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs 

in  the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  280-5. 

7.  Outline  of  the  letter.  Chron.  N.  T. 

8.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  129-134. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — Ch. 

XXV.;  Introduction  to  Lightfoot’s  commentary  (The 
Colossian  Heresy)  ;  any  Bible  dictionary  on  Philemon, 
Slavery,  Colossse,  Colossians,  and  Gnosticism ;  Smith — 
Paul,  pp.  546-576. 


SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  PHILEMON  AND  COLOSSIANS 

Besides  continuous  works 
1.  On  the  English  Text 

Alexander,  Gross — Colossians  and  Eph.  Bible  for 
Home  and  School  (1910). 

Christ  and  Colossse  (1922). 


236  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Dargan — Am.  Comm.  (1887). 

Findlay — Pulpit  Comm.  (1895). 

Maclaren — Expos.  Bible  (1888). 

Moule — Cambr.  Bible  (1893). 

Moule — Colossian  Studies. 

Mullins — Convention  Comm,  on  Ephesians  and  Colos- 
sians  (1913). 

Nicholson — Oneness  with  Christ. 

Rutherford— -Epistles  to  Colossae  and  Laodicea  (1908). 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text 

Abbott,  T.  K. — Int.  Crit.  Comm.  (1897). 

Dibelius — Handbuch  zum  N.  T.  (1912). 

Ellicott — New  edition  (1890). 

Ewald — Zahn  Komm.  (1905). 

Haupt — Meyer  Komm.  (1903). 

Lightfoot — Tenth  edition  (1904). 

Meinertz — Die  Gefangenschaftsbriefe  (1917). 
Oesterley — Exp.  Gk.  Test,  on  Philemon  (1910). 
Oltramare — Commentaire  (1891). 

Peake — Exp.  Gk.  Test,  on  Colossians  (1903). 
Schumann — Paulus  an  Philemon  (1908). 

Soden — Hand-Comm.  2  Aufl.  (1893). 

Vincent — Int.  Crit.  on  Philemon  (1897). 

Westcott,  F.  B. — A  Letter  to  Asia  (1914). 

Williams — Cambr.  Gk.  Test.  (1907). 


LESSON  XXIX:  EPHESIANS 
(A.  D.  62  or  63) 

1.  Date  of  the  epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. 

2.  Destination  of  the  epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs  in 

the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  285  f. 

3.  Purpose  of  the  letter.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs  in  the 

Life  of  Paul,  pp.  286  f. 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES  237 

4.  Contrast  with  Colossians.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs  in 

the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  287-9. 

5.  Outline  of  the  letter.  Chron.  N.  T. 

6.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  134-139. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — Ch. 

XXV.;  any  Bible  dictionary  and  commentary;  Smith — 
Paul,  pp.  522-545. 


SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  EPHESIANS 

Besides  continuous  works  by  same  author 

1.  On  English  Text 

Alexander — Bible  for  Home  and  School  (1910). 

Beet — Comm,  on  Eph.,  Phil.,  Col.,  Philemon  (1891). 
Candlish — Exposition  (1895). 

Dale — Lectures  on  Ephesians. 

Findlay — Expos.  Bible  (1892). 

Gore — A  Practical  Exposition  (1898). 

Hitchcock — Epistle  to  the  Ephesians — An  Encyclical  of 
St.  Paul  (1913). 

Hort — Rom.  and  Eph.  Intr.  (1895). 

Lidgett — God  in  Christ  Jesus.  A  Study  of  St.  Paul’s 
Ep.  to  the  Eph.  (1915). 

Martin — New-Century  Bible. 

McPhail — Ep.  to  Eph.  (1893). 

McPherson — Ep.  to  Eph.  (1892). 

Moule — Ephesian  Studies  (1900). 

Mullins — Convention  Series  (1913). 

Stroeter — The  Glory  of  the  Body  of  Christ  (1909). 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text 

Abbott — Int.  Crit.  Comm.  (1897). 

Belser — Komm.  (1908). 

Dibelius — Handbuchzum  N.  T.  (1912). 


238  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 

Eadie — Third  edition  (1883). 

Ellicott — Fifth  edition  (1884). 

Ewald — Zahn  Komm.  2  Aufl.  (1910). 

Haupt — Meyer  Komm.  8  Aufl.  (1902). 

Knabenbauer- — Commentarius  in  epistolas  ad  Ephesios 
(1913). 

Krukenberg— Der  Brief  an  Eph.  (1903). 

Lueken — Die  Schriften  des  N.  T.  (1906). 

Meinertz — Die  Gefangenschaftsbriefe  (1917). 

Murray — Cambr.  Gk.  Test.  (1915). 

Oltramare — Commentaire  (1891). 

Robinson — St.  Paul’s  Ep.  to  the  Eph.  (1903). 

Salmond — Exp.  Gk.  Test.  (1903). 

Soden — Hand-Comm.  2  Aufl.  (1893). 

Westcott,  F.  B. — St.  Paul’s  Ep.  to  the  Eph.  (1906). 
Wohlenberg — Strack-Zoeckler  ( 1895 ) . 


LESSON  XXX :  RELEASE  OF  PAUL  AND 

1  TIMOTHY 

(Probably  63  to  66  or  67) 

1.  The  outcome  of  the  first  Roman  imprisonment. 

Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  290-2. 

2.  The  visit  to  the  east.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul, 

p.  292. 

3.  The  visit  to  Spain.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul, 

pp.  292  f. 

4.  The  Burning  of  Rome.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul, 

pp.  293  f . 

5.  The  return  east  for  the  last  time.  Epochs  in  the 

Life  of  Paul,  pp.  294  f . 

6.  Date  of  the  Pastoral  Epistles  (fourth  group). 

Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul,  p.  295. 

7.  Genuineness  of  the  Pastoral  Epistles.  Chron.  N.  T. ; 

Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  295  f. 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES  239 

8.  Sketch  of  Timothy’s  career.  Chron.  N.  T. 

9.  Paul’s  location  when  he  wrote  1  Timothy  (1:3). 

10.  Purpose  and  character  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. ; 

Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul,  pp.  296-9. 

11.  Outline  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. 

12.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  140-143. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — Ch. 

XXVII.  (first  half),  Appendix  I.  on  the  Date  of  the  Pas¬ 
toral  Epistles;  Ramsay— St.  Paul  the  Traveller,  pp. 
356-60;  Smith — Paul,  pp.  579-622. 

See  also  Steinmetz — Die  zweite  romische  Gefang- 
schaft  des  Apostels  Paulus  (1897)  ;  Harrison — The 
Problem  of  the  Pastoral  Epistles  (1921). 


SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  PASTORAL  EPISTLES 

Besides  continuous  works 

1.  On  the  English  Text 

Bowen — Dates  of  Pastoral  Letters  (1900). 

Findlay — Appendix  on  the  Pastoral  Epistles  to  Saba¬ 
tier’s  Apostle  Paul  (1893). 

Greene,  J.  P. — Convention  Series  (1915). 

Harvey — Am.  Comm.  (1890). 

Horton — New-Century  Bible. 

Humphreys — Cambridge  Bible  (1897). 

James — The  Genuineness  and  Authorship  of  the  Pastoral 
Epistles  (1906). 

Laughlin — The  Pastoral  Epistles  in  the  Light  of  One 
Roman  Imprisonment  (1905). 

Lilley — The  Pastoral  Eps.  (1901). 

Moule — Second  Timothy. 

Plummer — Expos.  Bible  (1896). 

Pope — Pastoral  Eps.  (1901). 

Ramsay — Historical  Comm,  on  the  First  Ep.  to  Tim. 
(The  Expositor,  1909-11). 


240  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 

Stock- — Plain  Talks  on  the  Pastoral  Epistles  (1914). 
Strachan — West.  N.  T.  (1910). 

Wage— Speaker’s  Comm.  (1885). 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text 

Belser — -Die  Pastoral  brief e  (1907). 

Bernard-— Cambr.  Gk.  Test.  (1899). 

Bertrand— Essai  critique,  etc.  (1888). 

Brown,  E.  F. — Pastoral  Epistles  (Westminster  Comm., 
1917). 

Dibelius— Handbuch  zum  N.  T. 

Ellicott — Fifth  edition  (1883). 

Eylau — Zur  Cbron.  d.  Pastoralbriefe  (1888). 
Harrison— The  Problem  of  the  Pastoral  Epistles  (1921). 
Hesse — Die  Entstehung  der  neut.  Hirtenbriefe  (1889). 
Holtzmann— Die  Pastoralbriefe  kritisch  und  exegetisch 
behandelt  (1880). 

Kohler — Schriften  N.  T.  2  Aufl.  (1907). 
Knabenbauer— Commentarius  in  S.  Paul’s  Epistolas 
ad  Timotheum,  ad  Titum  (1913). 

Kraukenberg — -Komm.  (1901). 

Lutgert— Die  Irrlehrer  der  Pastoralbriefe  (1909). 
Maier— Die  Hauptprobleme  der  Pastoralbriefe  Pauli 
(1910). 

Mayer — -Ueber  der  Pastoralbriefe  (1913). 

Meinertz— Die  Pastoralbriefe  des  heil.  Paulus  (1913). 
Niebergall— Handbuch  zum  N.  T.  (1909). 

Parry — The  Pastoral  Epistles  (1920). 

Soden— Hand-Comm.  ( 1893  ) . 

Weiss,  B.— Meyer  Komm.  7  Aufl.  (1907). 

White— Exp.  Gk.  Test.  (1910). 

Wohlenberg— Zahn  Komm.  (1906). 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


241 


LESSON  XXXI:  THE  LAST  YEAR  OF 

PAUL’S  LIFE 

(Autumn  of  67  till  summer  of  68) 

1.  Sketch  of  Titus.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs  in  the  Life 

of  Paul,  pp.  299  f. 

2.  Paul’s  plans  for  the  winter.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of 

Paul,  p.  300. 

3.  The  heresy  in  Crete.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs  in  the 

Life  of  Paul,  pp.  300  f . 

4.  Date  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. 

5.  Purpose  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs  in  the 

Life  of  Paul,  pp.  301  f. 

6.  Outline  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. 

7.  The  arrest  of  Paul.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul, 

p.  303. 

8.  The  new  charges.  Epochs  in  the  Life  of  Paul, 

pp.  304  f. 

9.  The  close  confinement.  Epochs,  pp.  305  f. 

10.  The  desertion  of  Paul’s  friends.  Epochs,  pp.  306  f. 

11.  The  first  stage  of  the  trial.  Epochs,  pp.  307-9. 

12.  The  loneliness  of  Paul.  Epochs,  pp.  309-11. 

13.  A  last  message  to  Timothy  (date  and  purpose  of 

2  Tim.).  Chron.  N.  T. ;  Epochs,  pp.  311  f. 

14.  Outline  of  2  Timothy.  Chron.  N.  T. 

15.  Paul’s  estimate  of  his  career.  Epochs,  pp.  312  f. 

16.  Paul  longs  for  Jesus.  Epochs,  pp.  313-15. 

17.  The  Condemnation.  Epochs,  p.  315. 

18.  Paul’s  death.  Epochs,  pp.  316  f. 

19.  A  backward  look.  Epochs,  pp.  317-19. 

20.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  143-147. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — Ch. 

XXVII.  (last  half)  ;  Ramsay — St.  Paul  the  Traveller, 
pp.  360-366;  Ramsay — Pauline  Studies,  Ch.  XIV.;  Pic¬ 
tures  of  the  Apostolic  Church,  chs.  L.-LI. ;  Smith — Paul, 
pp.  623-661. 


242  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


LESSON  XXXII:  I  PETER 
(About  A.  D.  65) 

1.  The  General  or  Catholic  Epistles.  Chron.  N.  T. 

2.  Sketch  of  Simon  Peter.  Chron.  N.  T. 

3.  Date  of  1  Peter.  Chron.  N.  T. 

4.  Location  of  Peter  at  time  of  writing.  Chron.  N.  T. 

5.  Readers  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. 

6.  Character  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. 

7.  Outline  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. 

8.  Consult  any  Bible  dictionary  on  1  Peter. 

9.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  147-156. 

For  further  study,  see  Ramsay — Church  in  the  Roman 

Empire,  ch.  XIII.;  Lumby — (Expositor’s  Bible);  Bigg 
— (Int.  Crit.  Comm.)  ;  Expositor’s  Gk.  Test. 

See  also  Erbes — Die  Todestage  der  Apostel  Paulus  und 
Petrus  (1899)  ;  Guignebert — La  primaute  de  Pierre  et 
la  venne  de  Pierre  a  Rome  (1909) ;  Lietzmann — 
Petrus  und  Paulus  in  Rom. 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  EPISTLES  OF  PETER  AND  JUDE 

Besides  continuous  works 

1.  On  the  English  Text 

Bennett — New-Century  Bible  (1901). 

Cooke  and  Lumby — Speaker’s  Comm.  (1881). 
Johnstone — The  First  Ep.  of  Peter  (1888). 

Lumby — Expos.  Bible  (1893). 

Plumptre — Cambr.  Bible  (1879). 

Ross — First  Epistle  of  Peter  (1918). 

S almond — S chaffs  Comm.  (1883). 

Williams — Am.  Comm.  (1890). 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text 

Beck — Erklarung  der  Brief e  Petri  (1895). 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES  243 

Bigg — Int.  Crit.  Comm.  (1901). 

Blenkin — The  First  Ep.  General  of  St.  Peter  (1915). 
Camerlinck — Commentarius  in  epistolas  catholicas 
(1909). 

Couard — Commentaire  (1895). 

De  Zwaan — 2  Peter  en  Judas  (1909). 

Foster — Literary  Relations  of  the  First  Ep.  of  Peter 
(1913). 

Georghian — Der  Brief  des  Judas  (1905). 

Goutard— -Essai  critique  et  historique  sur  la  prem.  epitre 
de  S.  Pierre  (1905). 

Grosch — Die  Echtheit  des  II.  Briefes  Petri.  2  Aufl. 
(1914). 

Gunkel— Schriften  d.  N.  T.  2  Aufl.  (1907). 

Hart,  Strachan,  Mayor — Exp.  Gk.  Test.  (1910). 
Henkel — Der  zweite  Brief  des  Apostelfiirsten  Petrus 
gepriift  auf  seine  Echtheit  (1904). 

Hollmann — Die  Schriften  d.  N.  T.  (1906). 

Hort— I.  Peter  1:1-2:17  (1898). 

King — Did  St.  Peter  Write  in  Greek?  (1871). 

Knopf — Die  Briefe  Petri  und  Juda  (1912). 

Kuhl — Meyer  Komm.  6  Aufl.  (1897). 

Maier — Der  Judasbrief  (1906). 

Masterman — Eps.  of  St.  Peter  (1900). 

Mayor — The  Epistle  of  St.  Jude  and  the  Epistle  of  St. 
Peter  (1907). 

Robson — Studies  in  the  Sec.  Ep.  of  Peter  (1915). 

Soden — Hand-Comm.  (1896). 

Spitta — Der  zweite  Brief  des  Petrus  und  der  Brief  des 
Judas  (1885). 

Van  Kasteren — De  Eerste  Brief  van  d.  Ap.  Petrus 
(1911). 

Weiss,  B. — Die  erste  Petrusbrief  und  die  Kritik  (1906). 
Windisch — Handbuch  zum  N.  T.  (1911). 

Wohlenberg — Zahn  Komm.  (1915). 


244  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


LESSON  XXXIII :  JUDE  AND  2  PETER 
(About  A.  D.  66-6 7) 

1.  Sketch  of  Jude.  Chron.  N.  T. 

2.  Date  and  relation  to  2  Peter.  Chron.  N.  T. 

3.  Purpose  and  Character  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. 

4.  Outline  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. 

5.  Date  and  readers  of  2  Peter.  Chron.  N.  T. 

6.  Purpose  and  character  of  the  Epistle.  Chron.  N.  T. 

7.  Outline.  Chron.  N.  T. 

8.  Any  Bible  dictionary  on  Jude  and  2  Peter. 

9.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  156-163. 

For  further  study,  see  Lumby- — (Expos.  Bible)  ;  Bigg 

— (Int.  Crit.  Comm.)  ;  Mayor  and  Strachan — Exp. 
Gk.  Test. 


LESSON  XXXIV:  HEBREWS  1-7 
(About  A.  D.  69) 

1.  Date.  Chron.  N.  T. 

2.  Author.  Chron.  N.  T. 

3.  Destination.  Chron.  N.  T. 

4.  Purpose  and  character  of  the  book.  Chron.  N.  T. 

5.  Outline.  Chron.  N.  T. 

6.  Any  Bible  dictionary  or  commentary  on  Hebrews. 

7.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  164-174. 

For  further  study,  see  Conybeare  and  Howson — Ch. 

XXVIII.;  Edwards — Expositor’s  Bible;  Westcott — 
Commentary ;  Scott,  E.  F. — The  Epistle  to  the  Hebrews. 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  HEBREWS 
Besides  continuous  works 

Anderson,  R. — The  Hebrews  Epistle  in  the  Light  of  the 
Types  (1911). 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


245 


Ayles — Destination,  Date  and  Authorship  of  the  Ep.  to 
the  Hebrews  (1899). 

Bailey — Leading  Ideas  of  Ep.  to  the  Heb.  (1907). 
Dale — Jewish  Temple  in  the  Christian  Church. 

Du  Bose — High  Priesthood  and  Sacrifice  (1908). 
Edwards — Expos.  Bible  (1888). 

Goodspeed — Bible  for  Home  and  School  (1908). 
Kendrick — Am.  Comm.  (1890). 

Lidgett — Sonship  and  Salvation  (1921). 

Lowrie — An  Explanation  of  Hebrews. 

Milligan — The  Theology  of  the  Ep.  to  the  Heb. 
(1899). 

Moule — Messages  from  the  Ep.  to  the  Heb.  (1909). 
Murray — Devotional  comm. 

Nairne — The  Epistle  of  Priesthood  (1913). 

Peake — New-Century  Bible  (1904). 

Porter — The  Twelve-Gemmed  Crown  (1913). 

Rendall — The  Theology  of  the  Hebrew  Christians 
(1886). 

Rotherham — Ep.  to  the  Heb.  (1906). 

Saphir — Exposition  of  Hebrews. 

Scott,  E.  F. — The  Epistle  to  the  Hebrews  (1922). 
Shepardson — Lectures  on  Heb. 

Welch — Authorship  of  the  Ep.  to  the  Heb.  (1899). 

Besides  continuous  works 

1.  On  the  Greek  Text 

Andel — De  Brief  aan  de  Hebraer  (1906). 

Blass — Brief  an  die  Hebraer,  Text,  Angabe  der 
Rhythmen  (1903). 

Bruce — The  Ep.  to  the  Heb.  (1899). 

Davidson,  A.  B. — Ep.  to  the  Heb.  (1882). 

Delitzsch — Two  volumes.  Transl.  (1870). 

Dibelius — Der  Verfasser  des  Hebraerbriefes  (1910). 
Dods — Exp.  Gk.  Test.  (1910). 

Farrar — Camb.  Gk.  Test.  (1893). 


246  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Heigl — Verfasser  und  Adresse  des  Briefes  an  die 
Hebraer  (1905). 

Hollmann — Schriften  d.  N.  T.  2  Aufl.  (1907). 

MacNeill — The  Christology  of  the  Ep.  to  the  Heb. 
(1914). 

Menegoz — La  theologie  de  Pepitre  aux  Hebreaux 
(1894). 

Nairne — The  Alexandrian  Gospel  (1917). 

Riggenbach — Zoeckler  Komm.  2  Aufl.  (1913). 

Seeberg — Der  Brief  an  die  Hebraer  (1912). 

Slot — De  letterkundige  Vorm  van  den  Brief  aan  de 
Hebraer  (1912). 

Soden — Hand-Comm.  (1899). 

Vaughan — Ep.  to  Heb.  (1899). 

Weiss,  B. — Meyer  Komm.  6  Aufl.  (1902). 

Weiss,  B. — Der  Hebraerbrief  in  zeitgeschichtlicher  Be- 
leuchtung  (1910). 

Westcott — Ep.  to  Heb.  Third  edition  (1906). 

Wickham — Westm.  Comm.  (1910). 

Windisch — Handbuch  zum  N.  T.  (1913). 

Wrede — Das  literarisches  Ratsel  des  Hebraerbriefs 
(1906). 


LESSON  XXXV:  HEBREWS  8-13 

Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  174-193. 

For  further  study,  same  references  as  previous  lesson 
and  add  Josephus,  Ant.,  Book  XX.,  ch.  XI.;  War,  Book 
II.,  chs.  XIV.-XX.  for  a  vivid  picture  of  the  war  with 
Rome  and  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  (A.  D.  70). 
Read  The  Wandering  Jew. 


THE  ACTS  AND  THE  EPISTLES 


247 


LESSON  XXXVI:  THE  EPISTLES  OF  JOHN 
(Perhaps  A.  D.  85  to  90) 

1.  Probable  date.  Chron.  N.  T. 

2.  Docetic  and  Cerinthian  Gnosticism.  Chron.  N.  T. 

3.  Destination  of  I.  John.  Chron.  N.  T. 

4.  Purpose  and  character  of  the  Ep.  Chron.  N.  T. 

5.  Outline  of  the  Ep.  Chron.  N.  T. 

6.  Destination  and  character  of  II.  John.  Chron.  N.  T. 

7.  Outline  of  II.  John.  Chron.  N.  T. 

8.  Destination  and  character  of  III.  John.  Chron.  N.  T. 

9.  Outline.  Chron.  N.  T. 

10.  Any  Bible  dictionary  or  commentary  on  the  Epistles 

of  John. 

11.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  194-208. 

For  further  study,  see  Findlay — Fellowship  in  the 

Eternal;  Law — The  Tests  of  Life;  Westcott — Comm.; 
Brooke — (Int.  Crit.  Comm.). 

SPECIAL  COMMENTARIES  ON  THE  EPISTLES  OF  JOHN 

Besides  continuous  works 

1.  On  the  English  Text 

Alexander — Eps.  of  John  (1889). 

Barrett — Devot.  Comm,  on  I.  John  (1910). 

Bennett — New-Century  Bible. 

Cameron — Eps.  of  John. 

Cox — Private  Letters  of  St.  Paul  and  St.  John  (1887). 
Findlay — Fellowship  in  the  Eternal  (1909). 

Gore — Epistles  of  John  (1921). 

Green — Ephesian  Canonical  Writings  (1910). 

Law — Tests  of  Life.  Second  edition  (1909). 

Lias — Eps.  of  John  (1887). 

Ramsay,  A. — Westm.  N.  T.  (1910). 


248  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Robertson,  J.  A. — The  Johannine  Epistles  (1920). 
Sawtelle — Am.  Comm.  (1890). 

Steele — Half  Hours  with  St.  John’s  Epistles. 

Watson — Second  edition  (1910). 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text 

Besides  continuous  works 

Baumgartner — Schriften  d.  N.  T.  (1907). 

Belser— -Komm.  (1906). 

Bresky — Das  Verhaltnis  des  zweiten  Johannesbriefes 
zum  dritten  (1906). 

Brooke — Int.  Crit.  Comm.  (1912). 

Haupt — The  First  Ep.  of  John  (1893). 
Holtzmann-Bauer — Hand-Comm.  ( 1908) . 

Luthardt — Zoeckler  Komm.  2  Aufl.  (1895). 

Plummer — Camb.  Gk.  Test.  (1886). 

Rothe — Komm.  (1878).  Tr.  in  Exp.  Times  iii.-v. 
Smith,  D. — Exp.  Gk.  Test.  (1910). 

Weiss,  B.— -Meyer  Komm.  6  Aufl.  (1900). 

Westcott — Eps.  of  John.  Third  edition  (1892). 
Windisch — Handbuch  zum  N.  T.  (1811). 

Wurm — Die  Irrlehrer  im  ersten  Johannesbrief  (1904). 


PART  IV:  THE  REVELATION  OF  JOHN 
(PROBABLY  ABOUT  A.  D.  95) 


PART  IV:  THE  REVELATION  OF  JOHN 

(Probably  about  A.  D.  95.) 

Broadus’  Syllabus  on  Revelation  is  here  reproduced 
with  some  additions,  and  use  is  made  also  of  the  Chron. 
rN.  T.,  besides  references  to  other  literature. 

SPECIAL  BOOKS  ON  THE  REVELATION 

Besides  the  continuous  works 

1.  On  the  English  Text 

Benson — The  Apocalypse  (1900). 

Berg — The  Drama  of  the  Apocalypse  (1894). 

Brown,  C. — Heavenly  Visions  (1911). 

Brown,  D. — The  Structure  of  the  Apocalypse  (1891). 
Calmes — L’apocalypse  devant  la  tradition  et  devant  la 
critique.  Second  edition  (1907). 

Cadwell — The  Revelation  of  Jesus  Christ  (1920). 
Campbell — The  Patmos  Letters  Applied  to  Modern 
Criticism  (1908). 

Case — The  Millennial  Hope  (1918). 

Case — The  Revelation  of  John  (1920). 

Charles — Studies  in  the  Apocalypse  (1913). 

Chevalin — L’apocalypse  et  les  temps  presents  (1904). 
Clark — The  Holy  Land  of  Asia  Minor  (1914). 

Cowles — Revelation  (1871). 

Dean — The  Book  of  Revelation  (1915). 

Eckman — When  Christ  Comes  Again  (1917). 

Forbes — International  Handbook  on  the  Apocalypse 
(1907). 

Geil — The  Isle  that  is  called  Patmos  (1905). 

251 


252  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDYV 


Gibson — Apocalyptic  Sketches  (1910). 

Gigot — The  Apocalypse  of  St.  John  (1915). 

Guinness — The  Approaching  End  of  the  Age. 

Gwynn — The  Apocalypse  of  St.  John  (1897). 

Hill — Apocalyptic  Problems  (1916). 

Horne — The  Meaning  of  the  Apocalypse  (1916). 
Johnson — John’s  Revelation  (1904). 

Jowett,  G.  T. — The  Apocalypse  of  St.  John  (1910). 
Lee — Bible  (Speaker’s)  Comm.  (1881). 

Matheson — Sidelights  upon  Patmos. 

McNairn — The  Apocalypse. 

Milligan — Discussions  on  the  Apocalypse  (1893). 
Milligan — The  Revelation  of  St.  John  (1885). 
Milligan — The  Expos.  Bible  (1889). 

Moule — Some  Thoughts  on  the  Seven  Epistles  (1915). 
Mozley— The  Christian’s  Hope  in  the  Apocalypse 
(1915). 

Osborn — The  Lion  and  the  Lamb  (1922). 

Palmer — The  Drama  of  the  Apocalypse  (1902). 

Paul — Latter  Day  Light  on  the  Apocalypse  (1898). 
Peake — The  Person  of  Christ  in  the  Revelation  of  John 
(Mansfield  College  Essays,  1909). 

Porter — Messages  of  the  Apocalyptic  Writers  (1905). 
Pounder — Historical  Notes  on  the  Book  of  Revelation 
(1912). 

Ramsay,  A. — Westminster  N.  T.  (1910). 

Ramsay,  W.  M. — The  Letters  to  the  Seven  Churches 
(1905). 

Randall — Pulpit  Comm.  (1890). 

Ross,  J.  J. — Pearls  from  Patmos  (1923). 

Scott,  C.  Anderson — New-Century  Bible  (1902). 

Scott,  C.  Anderson— Devot.  Comm.  (1906). 

Scott,  J.  J. — Lectures  on  the  Apocalypse  (1909). 

Seiss — The  Apocalypse. 

Selwyn — The  Christian  Prophets  and  the  Prophetic 
Apocalypse  (1900). 

Smith,  J.  A. — Am.  Comm.  (1888). 


THE  REVELATION  OF  JOHN 


253 


Smith,  J.  A. — Patmos  (1875). 

Smith — The  Divine  Parable  of  History  (1901). 

Smith — The  World  Lighted  (1890). 

Strange — Instructions  on  the  Revelation  of  St.  John  the 
Divine  (1900). 

Terry — Biblical  Apocalyptics  (1898). 

Timbrell — The  Last  Message  of  Jesus  Christ  (1905). 
Whiting — The  Revelation  of  John  (1918). 

2.  On  the  Greek  Text 

Besides  continuous  works 

Allo — L’apocalypse  et  l’epoque  de  la  parousia  (1915). 
Allo — Saint  Jean.  L’ Apocalypse  (1921). 

Beckwith — The  Apocalypse  of  John  (1920). 

Bleek — Lectures  on  the  Apocalypse  (1875). 

Boll — Aus  der  Offenbarung  Johannis  (1914). 

Bousset — Meyer  Komm.  6  Aufl.  (1906). 

Bullinger — Die  Apokalypse  (1904). 

Bungeroth — Schliissel  zur  Offenbarung  Tohannis 
(1907). 

Charles — The  Revelation  of  John.  2  Vols.  (1921). 
Davidson,  S. — Outlines  of  a  Comm,  on  Revelation 
(1894). 

Delaport — Fragments  sahidiques  du  N.  T.  Apocalypse 
(1906). 

Elliott — Horae  Apocalypticae.  Four  volumes.  Fourth 
edition  (1851).  * 

Gebhardt — Doctrine  of  the  Apocalypse  (1878). 
Glasgow — Comm,  on  Apoc.  (1872). 

Gunkel — Schopfung  und  Chaos  (1905). 
Holtzmann-Bauer — Hand-Comm.  3  Aufl.  (1908). 
Hort — The  Apoc.  of  St.  John,  chs.  1-3  (1908). 
LaMPAKIS — O i  Itttol  aarripes  rrjs  7  AnoKaXyip  ews  (  1909)  . 
Laughlin — The  Solecisms  of  the  Apocalypse  (1902). 
Linder — Die  Offenbarung  d.  Joh.  aufgeschlossen  (1905). 
Moffatt — Exp.  Gk.  Test.  (1910). 


254  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Peake — The  Revelation  of  St.  John  (1921). 

Reymond — L’apocalypse  (1908). 

Sim  cox — Camb.  Gk.  Test.  (1893). 

Spitta— Die  Off.  d.  Joh.  (1889). 

Trench — Eps.  to  Seven  Chs.  Seventh  edition  (1897). 
Swete — Apoc.  of  St.  John.  Second  edition  (1907). 
Vaughan— Lectures  on  Rev.  of  St.  John. 

Vischer — Die  Off.  John  (1886). 

Voelter — Das  Problem  der  Apok.  (1893). 

Voelter — Die  Offenbarung  Johannis  (1911). 

Weiss,  B. — Apokalypse.  2  Aufl.  (1902). 

Weiss,  J.— Schriften  d.  N.  T.  (1904). 

Wellhausen — Analyse  d.  Off.  Joh.  (1908). 

LESSON  I:  REVELATION  1-3 

1.  Date  of  the  Apocalypse.  Chron.  N.  T. 

2.  Authorship.  Chron.  N.  T. 

3.  Purpose  and  character  of  the  Apocalypse.  Chron. 

N.T. 

4.  Outline.  Chron.  N.  T. 

5.  Resemblance  to  Old  Testament  (Broadus). 

Among  the  first  things  that  strike  one  in  this  book 
is  the  resemblance  of  the  imagery  to  that  of 
the  Old  Testament  prophets,  particularly  to 
Isaiah,  Ezekiel,  Daniel  and  Zechariah.  A  few 
examples : 

I.,  13  ff.  Description  of  Christ’s  glorious  appear¬ 
ance,  compare  Dan.  x.,  5,  6  and  vii.,  9;  Ezek. 
i.,  7  and  xliii.,  2. 

IV.  Throne,  with  rainbow.  Ezek.  i.,  26,  28. 

4.  Twenty-four  elders — like  heads  of  David’s 
courses. 

6-8.  Four  animals.  Ezek.  i.,  10;  x.,  14;  Isa. 
vi.,  2. 

V.  Scroll  written  within  and  without.  Ezek.  ii.,  9 ; 

Zech.  v.,  1-3. 


THE  REVELATION  OF  JOHN 


255 


VI. ,  14.  As  a  scroll  rolled  together.  Isa.  xxxiv.,  4. 

VII. ,  3.  Sealing.  Ezek.  ix.,  4. 

X. ,  5,  6.  Angel  swearing.  Dan.  xii.,  7. 

XI. ,  1.  Measuring  reed.  Ezek.  xl.,  3;  Zech.  ii.,  1. 

3,  4.  Two  witnesses,  two  olive-trees,  two  can¬ 
dlesticks.  Zech.  iv.,  2,  11,  14. 

XII. ,  7.  Michael.  Dan.  x.,  13,  21. 

XIII. ,  12.  Beast.  Dan.  vii.,  2-8. 

XIV. ,  20.  Wine-press.  Isa.  lxiii.,  3. 

XV. ,  3.  Song  of  Moses  and  the  Lamb.  Ex. 
15:  Iff. 

XVII.,  XVIII.  Babylon.  Almost  all  from  the 
Old  Testament. 

XIX. ,  17.  Invitation  to  the  birds.  Ezek.  xxxix., 
17-20. 

XX. ,  8.  Gog  and  Magog.  Ezek.  xxxviii.,  2;  iii., 

19. 

12.  The  books  in  the  judgment.  Dan.  vii., 
10 ;  xii.,  1 ;  Psa.  lxix.,  28. 

XXI. ,  1.  New  heavens  and  earth.  Isa.  lxv.,  17- 
19;lxvi.,  22.  10  ff.  New  Jerusalem.  Ezek. 
xlviii.,  30  ff. 

XXII. ,  1,  2.  River  out  of  the  throne  and  the  tree 
of  life.  Ezek.  xlvii.,  1,  12.  Zech.  xiv.,  8. 

Very  many  others.  Yet  no  quotations  from  the 
Old  Testament  at  all.  Westcott  and  Hort 
give  a  list  of  nearly  400  references  or  allusions 
to  the  Old  Testament. 

6.  Statement  of  the  theories  of  interpretation 
(Broadus). 

Ch.  iv.  and  v.  are  introductory  to  the  visions. 

Ch.  vi.  ff.  present  predictions. 

Immense  multitude  of  theories  now  usually  divided 
into  three  great  classes  (see  Tregelles  in  Horne, 
Davidson,  Angus’  Hand  Book,  Annotated  Par. 
Bible,  Alford,  and  especially  Elliott).  But  four 
other  classes  should  be  added,  making  seven: 


256  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


(a)  Preterist  theories.  That  all  fulfilled  in  the  past. 

(1)  Neronian — that  written  in  time  of  Nero, 
and  all  fulfilled  in  two  or  three  years — most 
Germans,  Renan,  Stuart,  Cowles. 

(2)  Domitianic — that  written  in  time  of  Do- 
mitian,  and  fulfilled  in  three  or  four  cen¬ 
turies — Bousset,  and  most  Romanist  writers 
now. 

(b)  Historical  theories — that  fulfillment  going  on 
throughout  history,  past  and  future. 

(1)  Synchronous — make  the  three  series  of 
seven  parallel. — Lord,  Vaughan,  Fairbairn. 
Some  include  also  the  seven  churches,  as 
in  part  Vitringa,  Elliott,  IV.,  p.  485. 

(2)  Continuous — make  the  three  series  of  seven 
successive. — Elliott  (closely  followed  by 
Cumming),  Barnes,  most  English  and 
American  writers  now. 

(c)  Futurist  theory — that  all  yet  to  be  fulfilled  in 
the  future. 

(d)  Theory  of  successive  fulfillment.  Arnold,  Alex¬ 
ander,  see  Elliott,  IV.,  p.  564.  Examined  in  El¬ 
liott,  IV.,  p.  620.  Our  Lord  certainly  seems  to 
describe  himself  as  “coming”  at  the  destruction 
of  Jerusalem.  Similar  to  this  theory  is  what 
Lee  calls  the  Spiritual  System  (Bib.  Comm.,  p. 
491). 

(e)  Theory  of  miscellaneous  or  sporadic  fulfillment. 

(f)  Theory  that  all  is  merely  spiritual.  Davidson, 
III.,  627  ff. 

(g)  Historical  spiritual  theory.  Since  Broadus  wrote 
as  above,  Sir  W.  M.  Ramsay  (Letters  to  the 
Seven  Churches)  has  proposed  a  new  theory  of 
considerable  plausibility.  He  takes  the  two 
beasts  to  be  Imperial  and  Provincial  Rome  and 
conceives  the  point  of  the  book  to  be  the  en¬ 
couragement  of  the  Christians  in  their  struggle 


THE  REVELATION  OF  JOHN 


25  7 


with  Rome  during  the  Domitianic  persecutions 
with  the  promise  of  ultimate  spiritual  victory 
over  Rome.  This  struggle  with  Rome  is  used  as 
a  type  of  Christianity’s  conflict  with  the  world 
power  of  evil  in  all  the  ages,  but  without  specific 
application  of  all  the  images  to  definite  persons 
and  events.  The  picture  is  drawn  on  large 
canvas  with  bold  outline  and  symbolic  imagery 
of  the  world  conflict.  The  actual  condition  of 
the  Seven  Churches  is  thus  seen  to  be  immedi¬ 
ately  in  the  writer’s  mind.  The  discoveries  in 
Asia  Minor  throw  some  light  on  this  theory. 
The  lessons  of  the  book  are  spiritual  for  all 
time,  though  the  historical  background  was  defi¬ 
nite  and  near  to  the  readers  of  the  book. 

7.  Scripture  lesson.  Rev.  1-3. 

8.  Any  Bible  dictionary  or  commentary. 

9.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  208-212. 

For  further  study,  see  Ramsay — Letters  to  the  Seven 

Churches;  Swete — Apocalypse  of  St.  John;  Hort — 
Apocalypse  1-3  ;  Charles — Commentary  ;  Moffatt — 
Commentary. 

LESSON  II:  REVELATION  4-11 

.  Scripture  lesson.  Rev.  4-11. 

2.  History  of  the  Theories  (Broadus). 

Sketch  of  the  history  of  interpretation  of  the  book. 
(Elliott’s  history  fullest — brief  in  Smith’s  Dictionary. 
Herzog,  etc. — also  in  Stuart.)  Three  great  periods. 

I.  In  first  three  centuries  before  Constantine  the  Chris¬ 
tians  were  persecuted  by  authorities  at  Rome ;  they  there¬ 
fore  regarded  Rome  as  their  great  enemy,  the  beast,  the 
harlot,  the  antichrist,  etc.,  and  looked  with  longing  for 
the  coming  of  Christ  to  reign  1,000  years  with  his  people. 
Some  regarded  this  reign  as  involving  only  spiritual  en¬ 
joyments.  But  others  took  a  grossly  sensual  view — 


258  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Chiliasm,  like  “The  Gates  Ajar,”  and  much  worse — a  tend¬ 
ency  strengthened  by  Montanism,  and  this  led  to  violent 
opposition,  so  that  some  in  the  third  century  began  to 
attack  the  book  as  too  much  encouraging  Chiliasm.  (See 
Neander,  I.,  p.  649  fif.  Herzog,  “Chiliasmus.”) 

II.  After  Constantine  (say  A.  D.  325),  views  changed. 
Rome  was  now  reckoned  the  friend  and  supporter  of 
Christianity.  Became  common  to  hold  that  Christ’s  reign 
of  1,000  years  began  with  Constantine.  He  (Constan¬ 
tine)  was  the  man-child  of  chap,  xii.,  born  of  the  woman, 
the  church.  So  there  had  already  begun  before  the  res¬ 
urrection,  a  secular  reign  of  Christ  for  1,000  years. 
Consequences  of  this  change:  (1)  Thus  the  longing  for 
Christ’s  coming  died  out  among  men.  (2)  So,  too,  arose 
the  historical  theory  of  interpretation — part,  already  past, 
the  1,000  years  having  begun,  remainder  yet  to  come. 
Successive  interpreters  make  the  book  a  waxen  nose 
(Ebrard  in  Herzog).  Every  interpreter  of  each  suc¬ 
cessive  age  would  find  in  the  book  events  up  to  his  time. 
This  not  wrong,  if  cautiously  done.  But  constant  tend¬ 
ency  was,  as  it  has  been  ever  since,  to  make  these  events 
cover  the  whole  ground  of  the  book,  so  as  to  infer  that 
the  end  was  near.  For  this  tendency  two  reasons:  (1) 
We  are  taught  to  look  for  Christ’s  coming.  (2)  Only 
the  men  whose  imaginations  were  inflamed  by  the 
thought  that  the  book  showed  Christ’s  coming  to  be  cer¬ 
tainly  near,  set  themselves  to  write  expositions  of  the 
book.  We  easily  see  the  error  thus  committed  by  men 
who  lived,  say  six  or  nine  centuries  ago,  in  assuming 
that  the  events  up  to  their  time  covered  nearly  the  whole 
ground — and  there  is  here  a  warning. 

III.  The  Reformers  of  the  16th  century  (Luther,  Cal¬ 
vin,  etc.)  gained  two  new  points.  (1)  It  was  already 
more  than  1,000  years  since  Constantine.  (2)  They  be¬ 
gan  to  see  in  the  harlot  Babylon  the  Papacy.  Then  com¬ 
paring  Daniel  and  2  Thess.,  they  identified  the  harlot 
Babylon  with  Antichrist.  That  the  Papacy  is  Antichrist 


THE  REVELATION  OF  JOHN 


259 


was  asserted  by  Luther,  Calvin,  Knox,  and  in  1703  was 
declared  by  Turrettin  to  be  the  firm  belief  of  all  Re¬ 
formers  and  Protestants.  This  position  has  obviously 
great  plausibility.  In  the  first  period  the  Christians  had 
understood  the  Babylon  of  chap.  xvii.  to  be  Rome,  espe¬ 
cially  in  xvii.,  9.  So  the  Protestants  were  but  reviving 
the  interpretation  of  the  early  Fathers,  only  not  Pagan, 
but  Papal  Rome. 

To  escape  from  the  Protestant  position,  two  Spanish 
Jesuits,  late  in  the  16th  century,  devised  each  a  new 
theory.  Ribera  of  Salamanca,  in  A.  D.  1585  (about  3 
centuries  ago),  presented  the  Futurist  scheme;  and  a 
little  later,  Alcasar  of  Seville,  the  Preterist  scheme  (El¬ 
liott,  IV.,  465-469).  Of  course,  each  has  since  been  a 
good  deal  modified. 

It  is  curious  to  trace  the  history  of  the  principal  works 
that  followed.  In  England  Mede,  in  1632,  published  a 
powerful  exposition  on  the  historical  scheme.  The  sec¬ 
ond  beast  is  the  Papacy,  the  first  three  vials  are  John 
Huss,  Luther,  Queen  Elizabeth,  etc.  But  Hammond,  in 
1656  (time  of  Cromwell,  when  Churchmen  were  hardly 
treated  by  the  Puritans,  and  so  less  hostile  to  Rome) 
adopted  the  Preterist  scheme  of  Alcasar.  In  France, 
Jurieu,  a  Protestant  exiled  by  revocation  of  the  Edict  of 
Nantes,  published  in  1685  an  exposition  mainly  based  on 
Mede;  and  this  was  answered  five  years  after  by  the 
celebrated  Bossuet,  taking  the  preterist  view,  so  as  to 
guard  the  Papacy  from  the  charge  of  being  the  harlot 
Babylon  and  Antichrist.  His  view  has  ever  since  been 
the  favorite  among  Romanists. 

In  the  18th  century  the  most  famous  works  are  those 
of  Vitringa  (in  Holland)  and  Sir  Isaac  Newton,  both  on 
the  historical  theory.  Late  in  the  century  began  the  great 
series  of  Preterist  expositions  in  Germany,  continuing  to 
the  present  day. 

Among  historical  expositors  (including  nearly  all  Prot¬ 
estants  out  of  Germany)  the  French  Revolution  intro- 


260  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


duced  a  new  idea,  viz. :  that  popular  revolution  and  in¬ 
fidelity,  one  or  both,  are  among  the  things  predicted  by 
the  beast  and  the  vials.  It  was  found  to  be  just  1,260 
years  from  Justinian’s  edict,  recognizing  the  Pope’s  su¬ 
premacy,  to  the  French  Revolution.  The  French  Revo¬ 
lution  still  plays  an  important  part  in  most  treatises  on  the 
historical  scheme. 

Early  in  this  century  the  Futurist  theory  was  urged  by 
some  Romanists  and  some  Church  of  England  writers. 

3.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  212-216. 

For  further  study,  see  Swete,  Moffatt,  Charles,  Beck¬ 
with,  Dean. 

LESSON  III:  REVELATION  12:1-19:10 

1.  Scripture  lesson.  Rev.  12:1 — 19:10. 

2.  Examination  of  the  theories  (Broadus). 

I  :  PRETERIST  THEORIES 

Neronian  Preterists  hold  that  the  book  was  written  in 
the  reign  of  Nero  (who  died  A.  D.  68),  or  in  that  of 
Galba,  just  after;  that  all  the  predictions  refer  to  the 
overthrow  of  Judaism  by  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem 
in  A.  D.  70  (see  chap,  xi.,  8),  and  the  fall  of  Heathenism 
as  represented  by  the  death  of  Nero  and  the  interruption 
of  his  persecutions.  A  favorite  passage  with  them  is 
xvii.,  9,  10,  where  the  6th  head,  beginning  with  Julius 
Csesar,  would  be  Nero,  and  the  7th  which  was  to  follow, 
“must  remain  a  little  time,”  viz. :  Galba,  who  reigned  a 
few  months.  That  is  certainly  one  of  the  most  exact 
correspondences  ever  yet  found  in  the  interpretation  of 
the  book.  (Duesterdieck,  Cowles,  p.  38.)  They  say  that 
Rome  is  called  a  harlot  because  idolatrous.  They  dwell 
much  on  the  expression,  “the  time  is  at  hand,”  i.,  3 ;  xxii., 
6,  10,  etc.  They  insist  that  we  must  not  expect  to  find 
a  separate  event  corresponding  to  every  detail  of  the 


THE  REVELATION  OF  JOHN 


261 


imagery.  Stuart  compared  Psalm  xviii.,  in  which  David’s 
deliverance  from  Saul  is  described  by  high  wrought  and 
multiplied  images. 

Objections 

(1)  It  depends  on  the  theory  of  the  early  (Neronian) 
date,  which  is  contrary  to  the  very  strong  evidence  of 
the  early  Christians  and  conflicts  with  the  striking  appro¬ 
priateness  of  the  book  to  be  the  last  book  of  the  New 
Testament.  (Compare  Bernard.)  Still  a  good  many 
orthodox  writers  now  contend  for  early  date,  on  general 
grounds,  as  Lightfoot  (on  Gal.),  Westcott  on  John  (Bib. 
Comm.).  Opinion  that  it  was  written  in  the  time  of 
Nero  is  first  found  in  the  Syriac  translation  of  Revelation, 
made  in  the  6th  century  (Warfield,  p.  232). 

(2)  The  fulfillment  being  so  long  past,  it  ought  by  this 
time  to  have  become  quite  plain ;  but  it  is  not  so. 

(3)  It  is  impossible  to  work  out  the  details,  referring 
chap,  vi.-xi.  to  overthrow  of  Judaism,  and  chap.  xii.  or 
xix.  to  death  of  Nero  and  end  of  the  persecutions  he 
introduced.  And  Psa.  xviii.  is  by  no  means  a  parallel 
case. 

(4)  In  the  favorite  text,  xvii.,  9-11,  what  of  the  8th 
head  (in  verse  11)  ?  Compare  xiii.,  3.  Stuart  makes  it 
refer  to  a  popular  belief  that  Nero  was  not  really  dead,  or 
would  come  to  life  again — a  strange  interpretation, 
surely.  Cowles  rejects  this,  but  has  nothing  to  substitute. 

(5)  Predictions  as  to  future  rest  and  glory  are  belittled 
by  being  restricted  to  earthly  conditions,  and  to  3  or  4 
years.  Stuart  tried  to  remove  this  objection  by  making 
chap,  xx.-xxii.  refer  to  future  triumphs  of  Christianity. 
But  thus  there  exists  a  great  leap  in  the  interpretation 
with  no  corresponding  gap  in  the  prediction.  And  then 
what  of  vii.,  9  ff .,  and  many  similar  passages  ? 

(6)  Analogy  of  Old  Testament  prophecies  is  against 
it.  Daniel,  most  closely  connected  with  Revelation,  pre¬ 
dicts  (according  to  the  common  view)  as  far  as  the  com- 


262  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


in g  of  Christ,  and  probably  much  farther.  So  with  most 
of  the  prophets.  But  here  only  3  or  4  years  at  farthest. 

Yet  this  is  the  opinion  of  most  Germans  now,  including 
Ewald,  Duesterdieck,  DeWette  (though  not  of  Hengsten- 
berg  and  Ebrard).  Also  of  Stuart,  who  commonly  fol¬ 
lowed  the  Germans ;  and  of  Renan,  in  his  book,  “L’ Anti¬ 
christ/’  Recent,  brief  and  clear  exposition  on  this  theory 
in  Cowles.  The  Germans  like  it,  because  it  reduces  the 
prophetic  element  to  a  minimum ;  Cowles,  because  it  takes 
away  everything  mystical,  makes  all  simple  and  clear. 

Domitianic  Preterists. 

This  view  began  with  the  Spanish  Jesuits  about  3  cen¬ 
turies  ago,  and  was  put  in  better  form  nearly  2  centuries 
ago  by  Bossuet,  who  was  not  only  a  most  eloquent 
preacher,  but  a  most  skillful  controversialist  (Variations 
of  Protestantism). 

They  hold  that  the  Apocalypse  predicted  the  triumphs 
of  Christianity  over  Judaism  and  Paganism,  in  the  first 
3  or  4  centuries.  As  to  Jews,  only  their  later  calamities 
predicted,  for  the  book  was  written  twenty-five  years 
after  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  by  Titus.  It  might 
include  the  second  destruction  in  time  of  Barcochba.  But 
the  destruction  by  Titus  was  the  great  calamity  to  the 
Jews  and  Judaism,  of  which  the  subsequent  events  were 
but  subordinate  consequences.  Thus  the  Domitianic 
scheme  gains  over  the  Neronian  as  to  Rome  and  Pagan¬ 
ism,  but  loses  as  to  Jerusalem  and  Judaism. 

In  the  details,  Bossuet  utterly  fails  (Elliott,  IV.,  p. 
550  ff.).  His  particular  interpretations  are  not  only  often 
wanting  in  plausibility,  but  they  often  contradict  one  an¬ 
other,  and  involve  great  confusion  and  arbitrariness.  Thus 
the  destruction  of  the  Apocalyptic  Babylon  is  with  him 
only  the  partial  destruction  of  Pagan  Rome  by  the  North¬ 
ern  barbarians.  But  it  was  Christianized  Rome,  and  not 
Pagan  Rome,  that  was  sacked  by  the  Goths.  And  then 
Babylon  was  to  be  afterwards  the  seat  of  unclean  beasts 


THE  REVELATION  OF  JOHN 


263 


and  demons — whereas  Rome  after  the  sacking  by  the  bar¬ 
barians  continued  to  be  the  seat  of  professed  Christianity. 
Such  facts  seem  fatal  to  Bossuet’s  scheme.  Moreover  the 
3l/2  years  (1,260  days)  so  prominent,  are  not  explained. 
But  any  one  who  wishes  to  meet  the  Romanists  on  the 
interpretation  of  Revelation,  must  make  himself  well  ac¬ 
quainted  with  the  Domitianic  Preterist  scheme,  of  which 
Bossuet  is  said  to  be  still  the  principal  exponent. 

II  :  FUTURIST  THEORIES 

These  hold  that  all,  at  least  after  chap,  i.-iii.,  refers  to 
Christ’s  second  advent  and  events  immediately  preceding 
it.  Some  say  even  the  Epistle  to  the  seven  churches. 
Israel  is  the  literal  Israel. 

The  Apocalyptic  beast  or  Antichrist  under  his  last  head, 
is  held  to  be  a  personal,  infidel  opposer  of  Christianity, 
who  will  rule  over  Saints  3l/2  years  (no  year-day),  till 
destroyed  by  Christ’s  coming. 

These  writers  then  agree  with  the  Preterists  in  reject¬ 
ing  year-day  and  holding  to  only  literal  Israel,  but  op¬ 
posed  as  to  time  of  fulfillment. 

The  Futurist  theory  was  devised,  as  the  Preterist  was, 
three  centuries  ago  (by  Spanish  Jesuit  Ribera),  to  set 
aside  the  Protestant  historical  interpretation.  It  is  of 
late  a  good  deal  advocated  in  the  church  of  England,  for 
several  reasons.  (1)  Dissatisfaction  with  the  common 
Protestant  interpretations  and  with  the  Preterist  scheme, 
and  just  cutting  the  knot.  (2)  Opposition  to  year-day 
theory,  which  was  little  heard  of — really,  not  a  little  dif¬ 
ferent.  Chief  advocate  Dr.  S.  R.  Maitland — also  some 
of  the  celebrated  Oxford  tracts.  (Elliott,  IV.,  524,  526.) 
I  know  of  no  American  work  advocating  it,  and  but  one 
German  Protestant  work,  that  of  Fuller,  1875. 

This  theory  cannot  be  proved,  nor  entirely  disproved. 
The  analogy  of  the  Old  Testament  prophecies  is  against 
it.  It  seems  inconsistent  with  statements  such  as  ‘‘the 


264  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


things  must  shortly  come  to  pass,”  etc.,  but  this  might  be 
explained.  It  seems  less  appropriate  to  console  John’s 
first  readers — but  James  said,  “Be  patient,  brethren,  unto 
the  coming  of  the  Lord.”  To  take  the  Apocalyptic  Israel 
as  the  literal  Israel  involves  the  literal  restoration  of  the 
Jews,  etc,  (which  is  very  doubtful),  and  also  various 
practical  difficulties  in  accord  with  events  that  have  al¬ 
ready  occurred,  so  as  to  make  it  very  probable  that  some 
of  the  predictions  have  been,  at  least  in  part,  fulfilled. 

One  thing  they  urge  is  certainly  true,  viz. :  that  the 
book  is  really  a  prophecy  of  the  second  coming  of  Christ, 
and  the  events  that  will  precede  it — not  of  coming  events 
in  general,  ending  with  the  second  coming.  This  is  im¬ 
portant.  For  Christians  the  great  event  of  the  future  is 
Christ’s  second  coming,  and  other  things  derive  their 
chief  importance  from  their  relation  to  it.  And  so  we 
are  still  in  the  same  attitude  as  regards  this  book  that 
the  first  readers  occupied,  still  looking  for  the  great  com¬ 
ing  event, -  though  some  of  the  preliminary  events  have  no 
doubt  already  occurred. 

Hi:  HISTORICAL  THEORIES 

1.  Synchronous.  This  holds  that  the  three  series  of 
Sevens  are  parallel.  Some  writers  include  the  seven 
churches  also,  as  Vitringa  (Elliott,  IV.,  485).  This  syn¬ 
chronous  scheme  is  adopted  by  very  many  English  writ¬ 
ers  ;  e.g.  Vaughan,  Fairbairn.  It  has  able  representatives 
in  Lord  and  Smith.  They  do  not  suppose  that  the  three 
series  correspond  at  every  step,  as  for  example,  that  the 
fourth  seal,  the  fourth  trumpet  and  the  fourth  vial  mean 
exactly  the  same  event;  but  that  each  series  begins  near 
the  time  of  John,  and  each  extends  to  the  second  coming 
of  Christ.  In  favor  of  this  theory : 

(1)  Analogy  of  many  Old  Testament  prophecies,  par¬ 
ticularly  Pharaoh’s  dream  (two  sevens  too),  and  Dan¬ 
iel’s  prophecies. 


THE  REVELATION  OF  JOHN 


265 


(2)  The  imagery  of  the  later  seals  and  later  trumpets 
seems  naturally  to  suggest  the  time  of  the  end ;  e.g.  vi., 
12-17,  particularly  verse  17,  and  vii.,  9-17 ;  again,  x.,  6 
(sixth  trumpet)  and  xi.,  15: 

(3)  Difficulty  of  fixing  certainly  the  fulfillment  of  the 
seals  and  trumpets  upon  the  other  theory.  Upon  the  con¬ 
tinuous  theory,  these,  at  any  rate  the  seals,  are  long  past, 
and  it  ought  to  be  possible  to  settle  their  interpretation ; 
but  the  various  schemes  are  still  uncertain.  (This  holds 
against  Elliott’s  seals  as  truly  as  against  Bossuet’s  scheme 
of  the  whole.)  Upon  synchronous  theory,  much  easier  to 
suppose  that  the  first  of  each  series,  while  still  obscure, 
will  become  plain  hereafter,  in  connection  with  the  second 
coming. 

Each  of  these  three  arguments  has  no  small  weight. 
Objections 

(1)  it  seems  to  us  less  natural  than  the  continuous 
theory;  it  appears  to  make  of  the  book  a  jumble. 

(2)  In  viii.,  1,  the  trumpets  seem  to  grow  out  of  the 
seals — seventh  seal  has  no  fulfillment  indicated,  save  in 
the  trumpets.  Still,  there  is  the  silence  in  heaven — and 
it  may  be  said  that  the  matter  ends  with  only  that,  be¬ 
cause  other  and  parallel  series  were  to  follow. 

Thus  the  synchronous  seems  to  have  very  good  ground 
as  against  the  continuous  theory. 

(2)  Continuous.  Elliott  (closely  followed  by  Cum- 
ming),  Barnes,  and  most  English  and  American  writers 
now. 

This  seems  to  us  more  natural.  Events  beginning 
soon,  and  extending  to  the  second  coming.  If  the  preterist 
and  the  futurist  theories  are  not  established,  we  seem  shut 
up  to  the  historical,  and  the  continuous  is  in  itself  the 
natural  way  to  take  the  successive  theories,  if  there  is 
nothing  to  the  contrary. 


266  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Two  Great  Difficulties 

apply  to  both  of  the  historical  theories,  but  one  of  them 
especially  to  the  continuous  theory. 

(1)  Lack  of  clear  fulfillment  of  the  early  predictions. 
If  the  continuous  theory  be  correct,  then  the  seals  were 
fulfilled  long  ago,  and  should  now  be  clear. 

Thus  Elliott  makes  the  sixth  seal  refer  to  the  time  of 
Constantine,  the  others  of  course  preceding.  These,  then, 
ought  to  be  clear.  Well,  as  to  the  four  horsemen  of  the 
first  four  seals,  Elliott  makes  a  fair  showing  for  taking 
the  horses  as  denoting  the  Roman  Empire,  the  horse 
being  sacred  to  Mars  from  the  time  of  Romulus  (tradi¬ 
tion)  L,  117  f. 

The  first  seal  is  the  period  of  preparation  which  fol¬ 
lowed  the  reign  of  Domitian,  beginning  a  year  or  so  after 
these  visions  and  reaching  to  the  early  years  of  Corn- 
modus,  say  three-fourths  of  a  century. 

The  second  seal  represents  the  civil  wars  which  fol¬ 
lowed,  vi.,  4. 

The  third  seal  is  quite  imperfectly  made  out.  Alex¬ 
ander  Severus,  oppressive  taxation  (black  horse  denoting 
consequent  distress — rider  with  balance  represents  Ro¬ 
man  proconsuls,  etc.  To  prevent  these  the  Senate  some¬ 
times  fixed  the  price  of  food  (proof  from  Cicero!!).  Oil 
and  wine.  All  Emperors  had  given  the  Roman  populace 
grain— at  this  period  oil  also  was  given  by  several  em¬ 
perors ;  and  of  a  later  Emperor  (Aurelian)  we  are  told 
that  he  determined  to  give  the  people  wine — don’t  know 
that  he  did  (Elliott,  L,  165).  Does  not  this  look  like 
trifling? 

The  fourth  seal  the  great  famine,  pestilence,  etc.,  in  the 
third  quarter  of  the  third  century.  Fits  very  well. 

The  fifth  seal  the  persecutions  under  Diocletian,  about 
A.  D.  300.  Fits  very  well.  “How  long”  (vi.,  10)  re¬ 
ferred  to  the  fact  that  many  grievous  persecutions  oc- 


THE  REVELATION  OF  JOHN 


267 


curred  before  this.  The  Christian  martyrs,  before  this 
time,  already  were  beginning  to  expect  and  to  declare 
that  their  blood  would  be  avenged  (Elliott,  I.,  210) — of 
course  they  did. 

The  sixth  seal — primary  vision  (vi.,  12-17)  destruction 
of  the  Pagan  power  in  the  Empire,  by  Constantine.  This 
does  not  come  up  to  the  strong  language.  Did  the  pagans 
universally  (every  bondman  and  freeman,  verse  17)  be¬ 
lieve  that  the  day  of  the  Lamb’s  wrath  had  then  come? 
It  was  not  a  day  of  general  wailing  and  woe,  for  Con¬ 
stantine  did  not  forbid  pagan  worship ;  he  tolerated  and 
protected  it. 

Second  vision,  chap,  vii.,  the  twelve  tribes  of  Israel 
mean  the  mass  of  professing  Christians  under  and  after 
Constantine  (when  multitudes  joined  the  Christians, 
most  of  them  without  piety)  and  the  144,000  the  elect  of 
grace  at  that  time.  There  is  thought  to  be  special  refer¬ 
ence  to  Augustine,  who  so  clearly  brought  out  the  doc¬ 
trine  of  election  and  the  certain  salvation  of  the  elect, 
as  prefigured  by  the  vision  of  the  palmbearers. 

Thus  the  interpretation  of  the  sixth  seal  seems  quite  a 
failure,  and  this  is  the  main  point  in  the  series.  The  third 
also  fails,  and  the  others,  though  more  plausible,  are  in 
no  case  certain.  No  infidel  could  be  converted  by  the 
fulfillment  of  this  series  of  seals,  as  given  by  Elliott,  and 
his  is  generally  regarded  as  the  best  interpretation  of 
them  on  the  continuous  scheme.  And  Elliott  expresses 
willingness  to  have  his  whole  theory  tested  by  the  six 
seals,  III.,  267. 

(2)  The  other  great  difficulty  about  historical  schemes 
is,  that  they  seem  to  require  the  year-day  theory. 

Year-day  theory  first  mentioned  A.  D.  1190  (see  El¬ 
liott,  Cowles’  Appendix  and  Lee).  Applied  to  the  1,260 
days  (xi.,  3  and  xii.,  6)  ;  the  42  months  (xi.,  2  and  xiii., 
5)  ;  the  time,  times  and  half  a  time — Zy2  years  (xii.,  14) 
— this  last  in  Dan.,  vii.,  25 ;  xii.,  7.  Besides  some  (e.g. 


268  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Elliott)  so  understand  the  5  months  (ix.,  10),  the  hour 
and  day  and  month  and  year  (ix.,  15),  and  the  3%  days 
(xi.,  9,  11). 

The  principle  is  denied  by  Preterists  and  Futurists,  in¬ 
cluding  Romanists,  Rationalists,  and  some  orthodox 
writers,  and  also  by  most  of  those  who  hold  to  successive 
fulfillments,  or  to  the  purely  spiritual  theory. 

1.  Passages  chiefly  relied  on  to  establish  the  year-day 
theory  are  three,  Dan.  ix.,  24-27;  Ezek.  iv.,  4-6;  Numb, 
xiv.,  33-34. 

In  Daniel,  Gabriel  tells  him  it  shall  be  “seventy  weeks” 
until  Messiah. 

Ezek.  iv.,  4-6,  390  days  and  40  days,  “I  have  appointed 
thee  each  day  for  a  year.” 

Numb,  xiv.,  34 — “each  day  for  a  year.” 

This  is  all  the  Scriptural  proof — a  few  other  passages 
adduced  by  some,  but  clear  that  they  furnish  no  proof. 
Correspondence  between  Jewish  Sabbath,  Sabbatical 
year  and  year  of  Jubilee.  Further  argued  that  results  as 
to  the  Papacy  show  that  the  principle  is  true. 

Bush  urges  that  in  attacking  year-day  we  attack  the 
Protestant  Reformation,  which  built  itself  largely  on  the 
application  of  Revelation  to  the  Papacy.  If  true,  this 
would  settle  nothing,  for  the  Reformers  made  many 
grave  mistakes.  But  it  is  not  true,  for  Luther  and  other 
Reformers  of  his  time  knew  nothing  of  the  year-day 
theory  at  all. 

2.  Objections  to  the  year-day  theory. 

Observe  that  it  is  improbable  in  itself,  and  requires 
clear  proof  from  Scripture. 

In  Dan.  ix.,  24-27,  it  is  literally  “70  sevens”  or  “70 
hebdomads,”  and  may  mean  “70  sevens”  of  years,  just 
as  well  as  “70  sevens”  of  days.  Gesenius  quotes  from  a 
late  Latin  writer  the  phrase  “hebdomas  annorum,”  “a 
seven  of  years.”  Some  Rabbinical  writers  use  the  He¬ 
brew  term  in  this  way,  a  seven  of  years.  Elliott  says  that 


THE  REVELATION  OF  JOHN  269 

this  proves  nothing  as  to  Scripture,  but  certainly  as  to 
Daniel  at  least,  it  proves  such  a  sense  possible. 

Daniel  had  been  considering  Jeremiah’s  prediction  that 
the  captivity  would  last  70  years,  and  thought  they  must 
be  nearly  ended  (Dan.  ix.,  2).  Then  he  prayed  long  for 
God’s  forgiving  mercy  to  Israel,  and  Gabriel  appeared 
saying  that  it  would  be  “70  sevens”  till  Messiah. 

As  the  prophecy  he  had  been  studying  told  of  70  years, 
so  here  he  would  naturally  understand  70  sevens  of  years, 
seven  times  as  long.  Compare  “till  7  seven  times?  Yea, 
till  the  contrary  be  proved.  This  phrase  in  Daniel  and 
usage  70  sevens  would  more  naturally  mean  70  weeks,  it 
does  not  certainly  mean  that,  the  other  being  not  only 
possible,  but  under  the  circumstances  natural. 

In  Ezek.  iv.,  4-6,  the  day  is  appointed  as  a  symbol  of  a 
year ;  but  the  Lord  does  not  there  say  day  and  mean  year. 

In  Numbers  xiv.  there  is  a  correspondence  between  the 
appointed  punishment  of  the  nation  and  the  time  spent 
by  the  spies,  “each  day  for  a  year.”  Now  if  God  had 
said,  “Ye  shall  wander  40  days,”  and  it  had  turned  out 
40  years,  this  would  then  be  a  case  in  point. 

These  passages  show  that  such  might  have  been  the 
meaning,  that  such  a  prophetic  relation  could  have  been 
established,  but  they  do  not  at  all  prove  that  it  was  done. 
If  the  question  be  asked,  what  right  have  you  to  under¬ 
stand  that  1,260  days  signify  1,260  years? — do  these  pas¬ 
sages  prove  the  right?  At  most  they  only  furnish  a 
perhaps. 

But  then  remember  how  many  dates  are  given  elsewhere 
in  prophecy  and  never  with  the  year-day  meaning.  The 
prophecy  which  Daniel  himself  was  studying,  the  prophecy 
of  Jeremiah  as  to  70  years,  was  correctly  taken  by  him 
as  literal.  Suppose  he  had  taken  it  as  year-day,  then  it 
would  have  meant  25,200  years.  So,  too,  with  Daniel’s 
time,  times,  and  the  dividing  of  a  time  (vii.,  25  and  xii., 
7),  said  to  mean  not  merely  years  but  (1,260  days  and 


270  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


so)  1,260  years;  compare  Dan.  iv.,  17,  23,  25,  32,  where 
four  times  over  it  is  predicted  that  Nebuchadnezzar’s 
insanity  would  last  until  7  “times”  should  have  passed 
over  him.  Here  a  time  is  evidently  a  year — nobody  would 
understand  the  7  times  to  be  2,520  years.  And  we  are 
bound  therefore  so  to  understand  the  Zl/2  times  of  Daniel 
till  the  contrary  is  proved.  This  phrase  in  Daniel  and 
Revelation  sounds  mysterious  and  seems  to  prove  some¬ 
thing,  but  Daniel’s  own  usage  shows  what  he  means  by 
it.  In  like  manner  in  Revelation,  if  we  apply  the  year- 
day  theory  to  the  3p2  years,  we  should  also  apply  it  to 
the  1,000  years  of  Christ’s  reign,  making  it  360,000  years, 
which  nobody  does,  except  Mr.  Lord,  Glasgow,  and  a 
German  writer,  Driessen,  A.  D.  1717. 

Thus  then  the  year-day  theory  is  possible,  but  not 
proven,  with  a  strong  probability  against  it  from  the  very 
usage  of  Daniel  and  Revelation. 

Now  as  to  the  results  of  the  year-day  theory. 

Take  Elliott’s  interpretation.  The  1,260  years  begins 
with  the  decree  of  Justinian,  recognizing  the  Pope’s 
supremacy,  in  A.  D.  529-533.  Add  1,260,  and  we  get 
1789-93,  French  Revolution.  Then,  we  are  told,  the 
Papacy  was  overthrown.  But  afterwards  Phocas  issued 
a  decree  confirming  the  Pope’s  supremacy,  in  604-8,  and 
this  with  1,260  gives  1864-8.  So  a  few  years  ago  it  was 
urged  that  at  that  epoch,  say  1867,  Christ  would  come 
and  completely  destroy  the  Papacy.  To  this  effect  nu¬ 
merous  works  of  Cumming. 

In  1872  Dr.  Cumming,  following  Elliott,  published  an¬ 
other  volume,  comparing  events  of  1870  with  the  vials 
in  chap,  xvi.,  and  triumphantly  claiming  that  here  was  a 
plain  fulfillment,  etc. 

And  what  right  have  we  to  count  the  1,260  years  from 
two  distinct  decrees,  75  years  apart?  Elliott  says  Jere¬ 
miah’s  70  years  of  the  captivity  have  to  be  counted  both 
from  B.  C.  606  to  decree  of  Cyrus,  and  from  B.  C.  588 
( destruction  of  Jerusalem)  to  decree  of  Darius,  about 


THE  REVELATION  OF  JOHN 


271 


B.  C.  518  or  520.  This  is  not  at  all  certain;  and  if  it 
were,  we  could  not  with  any  certainty  infer  the  same 
thing  here. 

So  the  results  prove  nothing  conclusive.  Mr.  Lord  is 
very  chary  of  fixing  the  beginning  of  the  1,260  years. 

The  year-day  theory  may  perhaps  be  true — no  better 
can  be  said  for  it. 

The  Historical  Scheme  in  general  does  not  stand  or  fall 
with  the  year-day  theory;  but  all  the  now  current  his¬ 
torical  interpretations  are  based  on  it. 

3.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  216-221. 

For  further  study,  see  Swete,  Moffatt,  Charles,  Beck¬ 
with,  Dean. 

LESSON  IV:  REVELATION  19:11-22:21 

1.  Scripture  lesson.  Rev.  19:11 — 22:21. 

1.  The  Millennium.  Rev.  XX.  (Broadus). 

A  thousand  years  would  be  natural  as  a  round  number 
for  a  long  period.  Plato’s  Republic  supposes  men  to  re¬ 
turn  to  life  at  the  end  of  every  thousand  years,  and  the 
Talmud  variously  connects  a  period  of  a  thousand  years 
with  King  Messiah  (Lee,  p.  809). 

i:  DIFFERENT  THEORIES  ABOUT  THE  MILLENNIUM 

1.  The  1,000  years  after  the  Christian  era,  or  after  the 
triumph  of  Christianity  over  Pagan  Rome  in  time  of  Con¬ 
stantine  (some  say  Charlemagne  about  A.  D.  800). 
Towards  the  end  of  the  10th  century  there  was  a  wide¬ 
spread  opinion  that  the  end  of  the  world  was  approach¬ 
ing.  Many  charters  of  that  time  begin  with  the  words : 
“As  the  world  is  now  drawing  to  a  close.” 

In  the  beginning  of  the  14th  century,  1,000  years  after 
Constantine,  the  Turks  came  into  prominence  (thought  to 
be  Gog  and  Magog). 

This  theory  was  once  universal.  Now  held  by  the 


272  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Romanists.  Enough  for  us  that  during  this  period  Popery 
and  Mohammedanism  were  almost  universal  in  place  of 
primitive  Christianity. 

2.  Millennium  a  new  Church  organization.  The  Ana¬ 
baptists  of  Munster,  1533,  made  it  the  new  Zion,  with 
community  of  gods  and  wives.  Swedenborg  made  it  the 
new  Jerusalem  Church,  which  he  founded.  The  Mormons 
call  themselves  Latter-day  Saints,  and  propose  to  restore 
nature  to  Paradisaical  innocence,  by  a  sort  of  Theocracy 
and  polygamy.  “The  Temple’’  at  Jaffa,  etc.  (community 
of  goods).  Many  others. 

3.  Millennium  before  second  Advent,  or  postmillennial 
Advent.  According  to  this  view  the  millennium  consists 
in  a  general  prevalence  of  Christianity  upon  earth,  before 
the  second  coming  of  Christ — supposed  to  be  prefigured 
by  Old  Testament  prophets,  particularly  the  latter  part  of 
Isaiah.  This  view  is  the  most  common  one  among  us — 
first  mentioned  three  centuries  ago  (Elliott,  IV.,  103n). 
It  grew  out  of  the  first  theory,  as  heretofore  explained. 
The  best  book  in  favor  of  it  is  probably  Brown  on  the 
second  Advent. 

The  great  argument  against  it  is  the  passages,  “Shall 
he  find  faith  on  the  Earth?” — “As  in  the  days  of  Noah, 
Lot,”  etc.,  Rev.  i.,  7 ;  chap,  xx.,  etc.  The  common  view 
must  at  least  be  greatly  modified. 

4.  Millennium  after  second  Advent,  or  premillennial 
Advent.  Christ  will  come,  first  resurrection  of  the  saints 
only,  who  will  reign  with  Christ  in  this  world  1,000  years 
— then  Satan  loosed  again,  renewed  struggle  and  victory, 
resurrection  of  the  wicked  and  last  judgment. 

This  was  common  among  the  early  Christians,  many  of 
them  with  gross  notions  we  call  Chiliasm — contrast  Mil- 
lennarianism — so  the  words  apostle  and  missionary — mar¬ 
riage  supper  and  New  Jerusalem  signifying  that  every 
day  a  sumptuous  meal  and  plenty  of  gold  and  precious 
stones.  But  not  all  Christians  were  Chiliasts  in  this  sense. 

This  view  is  now  increasingly  popular — its  advocates 


THE  REVELATION  OE  JOHN 


273 


usually  called  Adventists  or  Millennarians.  Good  speci¬ 
men  in  Elliott.  Lord  holds  in  like  manner  that  it  shall 
follow  the  Advent,  and  then  carries  out  the  year-day 
theory  consistently  by  making  the  1,000  years  represent 
360,000  years.  Throughout  this  period  the  holy  dead, 
having  had  their  resurrection,  are  to  reign  with  Christ  on 
earth — and  only  after  that  will  come  the  resurrection  of 
the  wicked  and  the  judgment.  This  follows  the  text 
strictly.  Glasgow  gives  the  same  view  as  to  360,000. 
See  also  “Yesterday,  to-day,”  etc.,  for  beautiful  descrip¬ 
tions  of  the  marriage  of  the  Lamb,  Millennium  and 
Many  Mansions. 

This  has  in  its  favor  the  plain  meaning  of  Rev.  xx.,  and 
the  teachings  of  our  Lord  above  mentioned,  and  the  utter 
uncertainty  as  to  when  Christ  will  come,  which  is  not  so 
strictly  true  according  to  the  third  theory.  These  are 
strong  arguments.  See  valuable  article  in  Presb.  Review, 
July,  1882. 

5.  Purely  spiritual — 1,000  years  and  all — Davidson. 
Swedenborg  (No.  842)  says  that  the  phrase  1,000  years 
signifies  an  indefinite  time.  In  general  he  says  that  when 
“thousand”  stands  alone  (i.  e.  not  7  thousand,  12  thousand, 
etc.),  it  always  denotes  an  indefinite  number;  he  has  been 
so  told  from  Heaven.  In  the  Heavenly  world,  to  which 
our  Bible  answers,  they  read  for  “a  thousand”  an  indefi¬ 
nite  number.  And  they  wonder  there  at  the  errors  upon 
earth  about  this  matter  of  the  1,000  years. 

6.  Millennium  in  modified  sense — Fairbairn,  Milligan. 
Fairbairn’s  view:  Millennium  before  second  Advent,  but 
indefinite  as  to  time.  Consisting  only  in  greater  preva¬ 
lence  of  Christianity  than  ever  before,  and  its  introduc¬ 
tion  constitutes  in  one  sense  a  coming  of  Christ — there 
will  be  many  comings. 

Milligan  compares  Ezek.  xxxix.,  9-12,  to  show  that  7 
years,  7  months,  there  signify  only  complete  destruction 
or  cleansing,  not  denoting  a  particular  period  of  time.  So 
he  thinks  here — 1,000  years  denoting  completeness  of 


274  SYLLABUS  FOR  NEW  TESTAMENT  STUDY 


Christ’s  reign — 1,000  being  a  favorite  number  in  this  book, 
to  symbolize  what  is  perfect  and  glorious  in  the  condition 
of  Christianity,  e.  g.  ix.,  4  ff. ;  xxi.,  16.  This  quite  pos¬ 
sible. 


II :  TIME  OF  BEGINNING 

To  some  extent  discussed  independently  of  the  question 
as  to  time  of  second  Advent.  Early  Christians— -some  said 
acceptable  year  of  the  Lord  and  A.  D.  365 — many  said  at 
end  of  6,000  years,  and  this  according  to  Septuagint 
chronology  would  be  about  A.  D.  550  (Elliott,  L,  370, 
371).  Very  many,  as  A.  D.  1000  approached,  thought 
Christ  would  come  then.  (See  above.)  Of  late  the  time 
is  usually  inferred  from  the  1260  years.  But  the  time  of 
Christ’s  second  coming  is  unknown  and  unknowable. 

Remark  upon  Glasgow’s  grave  calculations  as  to 
whether  the  earth  can  hold  the  population  at  the  end  of 
1,000  years  (not  to  say  360,000)  of  profound  peace,  uni¬ 
versal  industry,  and  freedom  from  vices.  A  new  Mal¬ 
thusianism.  He  holds  (1)  that  the  sea  may  cease,  and  the 
deserts  and  ice  mountains  be  changed;  (2)  that  the  earth 
may  be  enlarged;  (3)  that  natural  inclinations  may  be  so 
moderated  as  to  restrict  the  increase  of  the  race. 

Note. — The  lectures  which  accompany  these  lessons 
dwell  on  the  moral  and  spiritual  instructions  of  the  book, 
showing  that  whatever  view  may  be  adopted  as  to  the 
fulfillment  of  its  predictions,  it  should  be  freely  used  for 
practical  edification. 

3.  Environment  of  Early  Christianity,  pp.  221-226. 

For  further  study,  see,  as  above,  Swete,  Moffatt, 
Charles,  Beckwith,  Dean. 


Date  Due 

